Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutA15-0012_A15-0012 cut sheets_1426114260.pdf PRODUCT DATA SHEETS FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM Strata Vail Vail, Colorado 1 John Bal!man Nicet Fire Alarm systems Level IV Certification #101808 Date: I SYSTEMS GROUP 800 E. 64th Avenue #17 Denver, CO 80229 Phone: (303) 298-7900 Fax: (303) 650-5667 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Section 1) CONTROL PANEL, POWER SUPPLIES AND ANNUNCIATORS Cat.Sheet# 3-CAB21B Back Box/w 21 LRM Space w/o Door 85010-0067 3-CAB21 D Door Assembly for 3-CAB21 85010-0067 3-RCC14R Red Remote Chassis Cabinet/w Cover 85010-0067 3-CHAS7 Chassis Ass'y for 7 LRMs 85010-0067 3-CPU3 Central Processor Module 85010-0133 3-RS232 RS232 Communication Card 85010-0133 3-RS485B Network Communication Card, Class B 85010-0133 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module 85010-0071 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 120V 85010-0059 3-BBC/M Booster Power Supply 120V, Multiple Batteries 85010-0059 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply 120V 85010-0059 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator and Dialer 85010-0107 3-SSDC1 Signature Single Driver Controller(LRM) 85010-0129 3-SSDDC1 Signature Single Driver Controller(LRM) 85010-0129 3-ASU/4 Audio Source Unit/w 4 Rail Spaces 85010-0063 3-ZA20B 20 Watt Zoned Amplifier, Class B,25 or 70Vrms 85010-0057 3-ZA40B 40 Watt Zoned Amplifier, Class B,25 or 70Vrms 85010-0057 3-12SG 12 Switch, 12 Gm LED Ctrl Dis Mod 85010-0055 3-LCDANN LCD Annunciator/w CPU and Door 85010-0069 RLCM/B Flush Box for 3-LCDANN 85010-0069 3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator CPU 0 3-EVPWRA Power Supply,/w cable for 3rd party ann. 85006-0037 3-EVDVRA Driver Module,24 LEDs, 12 Switches/w cable for 3 party ann. 85006-0037 3-EVDVRX 19"rack/w space for three 3-EVDVRAs 85006-0037 BC-1 Battery Cabinet. 85010-0127 BPS6A Remote Booster Power Supply, 6.5A, 120Vac, Red 85005-0125 BPS10A Remote Booster Power Supply, 10A, 120Vac, Red 85005-0125 12V80A 12 Volt 8.0 AH Battery 12V35A 12 Volt 35 AH Battery 12V44A 12 Volt 44 AH Battery (Section 2) INITIATING DEVICES SIGA2-PS Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 85001-0619 SIGA2-PCOS Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Carbon Monoxide Sensor 85001-0619 SIGA-SB4 Standard Detector Base for 4"square box 85001-0619 SIGA2-HRS Intelligent Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector 85001-0620 SIGA-AB4GT Audible Sounder Base CO&Fire Detectors 85001-0623 SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator 85001-0623 CF135-2 Heat Detector, 135 FT 85001-0367 302-ET-135 Heat Detector, rate comp, 135F 57.2C, requires STONCO27 85001-0589 SIGA-278 Double Action Fire Alarm Station 85001-0279 SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module 85001-0241 SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module 85001-0241 SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Module-UIO Motherboard Mount 85001-0241 (Section 3) NOTIFICATION DEVICES G1F-VM Wall Strobe, Switch Select 15, 30, 75, 110 cd,white,/w FIRE 85001-0573 G4F-S7VM 70V Speaker,White, running man, FIRE, Strobe 15, 30, 75, 110 cd 85001-0549 G4RF-S7VM 70V Speaker, Red, running man, FIRE, Strobe 15, 30, 75, 110 cd 85001-0549 WG4WF-S7MC Exterior Speaker/Strobe,White,70 Volt, FIRE,Wall/Ceiling Mount 85001-0626 757-7A-T 15/75cdWC Strobe, Horn 97 dbA Avg., Red 85001-0341 757A-WB Weatherproof Box-RED. 85001-0341 11/4/2014 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Section 4) OTHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS, MODULES,AND RELAYS SIGA-CC1 Control Module, Single Channel 85001-0237 SIGA-MCC1 Signal Module/w 1 Riser in, 1 Output Ckt, CI'B'-UIO Mount 85001-0237 SIGA-CC1S Control Module, Single Channel, Synchronized 85001-0543 SIGA-MCC1S Synchronized Signal Module/w 1 Riser in, 1 Output Ckt, CI'B'-UIO Mount 85001-0543 SIGA-IO Input/Output Module 85001-0533 SIGA-IM Isolator Module 85001-0271 SIGA-CR Control Relay Module 85001-0239 SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module-UIO Mount 85001-0239 SIGA-RM1 Riser Monitor Module, monitors one riser 85001-0535 (Section 5) RESCUE ASSIST SYSTEM 2500-16NC Rescue Assistance Base Station 0 RP7700104 Rescue Assistance Uninterrutible Power Supply 0 2500-PWR24 Rescue Assistance 24vdc Power Supply 0 2100-958S Rescue Assistance Call Box 0 7049 Call Station Signage 11/4/2014 EST Catalog► EST3 Life Safety Platform ESTrM Life Safety & Communications 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 EST3 Cabinets and ,, Chassis @Di CE 3-CAB series, 3-RCC Series 3-RCC series, ®t�"I'III II I I EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending 3-CHAS7 series, BC-1 I 3-CAB Series Overview Standard Features EST3 has a wide selection of cabinet arrangements allowing the • Right or left hand hinging of doors greatest use of EST3's flexible modular design. Lobby enclosure • Lag and Keyway holes for quick mounting wallboxes are manufactured from#14 AWG cold rolled steel with a gray baked enamel finish. Lobby enclosure doors are manu- • Attack rated door for security applications factured from#14 AWG cold rolled steel and have a modern • Knockouts for 3/4 inch conduit contoured door design with integral viewing window.The excep- tion is the small lobby enclosure 3-CAB5.The 3-CAB5 wallbox • Attractive contour door design on lobby enclosures and non-contoured door are#16 AWG cold rolled steel. Lobby • Combination flush or surface mounting lobby enclosure design enclosure doors come with gray baked enamel or optional red baked enamel finishes.The EST3 lobby enclosures back boxes, • Remote closet cabinets for electrical closet mounting support doors and chassis units are ordered and shipped separately.The up to 65 AMP hour batteries 3-CAB5 lobby enclosure comes complete with door and back box • Optional earthquake hardening: OSHPD seismic pre-approval providing space to mount five local rail modules. for component Importance Factor 1.5 The EST3 remote closet cabinet design allows the installation of control panel electronics in electrical closets.The remote closet cabinets have left hand hinged doors and are available with red finish only. Optional display modules used for system diagnostics display, mount behind the closet cabinet door and are not visible with the door closed. Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0067 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Application Lobby Enclosures 24.,21n(60.9 cm) 3-CAB7B 3.0 in 22.751n(57.8 cm) Lobby Enclosures 3-CAB14B (7.7 cm) 2zsm(a53cm) 34 cm) 3-CAB21B 25 in °oRl EST3 lobby enclosures provide space for control, monitoring and (3'8cm) cl_ u u P 3.861n y.°0 9.66 cm, ALF°71 ° display modules where they remain visible even with the door j <e9I m, closed and secure. Ideal for mounting in lobby's where appear- 27.34 in(89.4 cm) ance is important, maximum mounting flexibility is provided with 3.661" 4.37 in 9.80 cm) (11.1 cm) doors that will mount for right or left hand opening. Lobby enclo- ^ sures come in several sizes to match individual project require- 6 • 6• T ments . C € E The 3-CAB5 series semi-flush or surface mounts.A built in rail Chassis assembly provides space for up to five local rail modules, no - . chassis assembly needed. Back space for 1-1/2 footprints gives room for a power supply and a 1/2 footprint module and 10 AHg batteries.The local rail module spaces provide room for amplifiers, Chassis E common control and annunciation modules. m S j o • The 3-CAB7 semi-flush or surface mounts and has a contoured g o a E c front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two 17 X °, AH batteries and one chassis assembly providing seven local rail chassis module spaces. 1 c • The 3-CAB14 semi-flush or surface mounting and has a con- 1.251n toured front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two (3.16 an) BATTERY AREA 17AH batteries and two chassis assemblies each providing seven DO NOT INSTALL CONDUIT . local rail module spaces. b The 3-CAB21 semi-flush or surface mounts and has a contoured front door with viewing window. Space is provided for two 17AH batteries and three chassis assemblies each providing seven local rail module spaces. 25.0 In(63.5 cm) Surface Mounted N 23.25 in(59.03 cm) 3.55 in Remote Closet Cabinets 21.44 in(54.46 cm) Remote Closet Cabinets 1.75 in) 1.25 in(3.18 cm) 3-RCC7R (4.45 cm) ,M, 3-RCC14R Remote closet cabinets provide an economical way of installing 3-RCC21R bin equipment in locations where esthetics are not paramount, like ALL KNOCKOUTS I (15.2 cm) 3/4• FOR CONDUIT electrical closets.You can have optional display modules used for , (IS em) system diagnostics display mounted behind the front door.These < , 21 in(53.3 cm) _> 5.641n 114.4 cm) OUTER DOOR F(5.1 cm) (14.3 cm) r display modules will not be visible with the door closed. Remote A A „ Y closet cabinets are surface mounting and come in sizes providing 1 ^ 8 a space for one to three chassis with room for standby batteries.A E 8 . UL Listed attack rated door having a 2-minute rating is available for aChassis the 3-RCC7R cabinet.This door is required for security applications. Installation and Mounting U o¢i LobbyEnclosure 14.0 in(35.56 cm) 12.7 in(32.26 cm) Chassis 3-cab5B 3.1 in 10.9 in(27.69 cm) 4, 8 (7.87 cm) 1.5 in 1.3 in (3.81 cm) i m (3.30 cm) *= 3.86 in m Ri ALL KNOCKOUTS � Y Y (9.80 cm) _ FOR 3/4.CONDUIT (1.9 cm) TOP VIEW I ' 1.65 in n OUTER DOOR lF (4.19 cm) Chassis* 3.86 in 16.4 in(41.66 cm) " 5 U 2.6 in 9.80 cm) 2 nn (6.6 cm) pp m A A 0 1.3 in BATTERY AREA (3.3 cm) £ c1 • 1 • DO NOT INSTALL CONDUIT a N BACKBOX C v NRcc.cORl • 625 in 1-; (1.6 cm) mcc 0 . Oc 0 N `� a cc e LU c *The lower mounting space can be used for an MN-BRKT1 i. 1.3 in • , N(3.3 cm) N o bracket,which holds MNEC interface equipment including an MN- " NETSW1 Ethernet network switch, an MN-ABPM Audio bridge, p BATTERY AREA an MN-FVPN VoIP module, and an MN-COM1S Communications 8 7 DO NOT INSTALL CONDUIT module. v v Page 2 of 4 DATA Si.,, , 85010-0067 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 BC-1 Dimensions o o I OTop view O 7.251in(18.42 cm) o e Note:Knockouts support } 0.75 in(1.91 cm)conduit e18.25 in(46.34 cm) w 1t i m 8' 16.00 in(40.65 cm) 8 O Fuse- OQ IMSNS+Terminal O 0 block ® Front view 14.00 in Side view (35.56 cm) • 24 or 40 Ah 24 or 40 Ah Battery Battery O •o L L 0 I Ordering Information Catalog Description Equipment Battery Space Ship Wt. Number Mounting Space lb.(Kg) Lobby Enclosures -Outer doors with viewing window Five local rail modules 3-CAB5 Cabinet w/Wallbox,door and chassis One footprint and Two-12V10A 30(13.6) 1/2 footprint module 3-CAB7B Wallbox only One Chassis Four-6V8A Two-12V10A Two- 30(13.6) 3-CAB7B-E Wallbox only,EN54"certified CE 1 Chassis 12V17A 30(13.6) 3-CAB7D(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB7B N/A 10(4.5) 3-CAB7D(R)-E Inner&outer doors for 3-CAB7B,EN54",CE 10(4.5) 3-CAB14B Wallbox only Two Chassis Four-6V8A Two-12V10A Two- 42(19.1) 3-CAB14B-E Wallbox only,EN54"certified CE 2 Chassis 12V17A 42(19.1) 3-CAB14D(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB14BN/A 15(6.8) 3-CAB14D(R)-E Inner&outer doors for 3-CAB14B,EN54",CE 15(6.8) 3-CAB21 B Wallbox only Three Chassis Four-6V8A Two-12V10A Two- 55(25) 3-CAB21 B-E Wallbox only,EN54*certified CE 3 Chassis 12V17A 55(25) 3-CAB21 D(R) Inner and outer doors for 3-CAB21 B N/A 20(9.1) 3-CAB21 D(R)-E Inner&outer doors for 3-CAB21 B,EN54",CE 20(9.1) Remote Closet Enclosure- No viewing window 3-RCC7R Red wallbox and door I One Chassis Four-6V8A,Two-12V10A 37.5(17) 3-RCC7R-E Red wallbox and door,EN54"certified CE Two-12V17A,Two-12V50A 37.5(17) ATCK Attack rated door for 3-RCC7R N/A 26(11.8) 3-RCC14R Red wallbox and door 53(24) Two Chassis Four-6V8A 3-RCC14R-E Red wallbox and door,EN54"certified CE 53(24) Two-12V10A,Two-12V17A 3 RCC21 R Red wallbox and door Three Chassis Two-12V50A,Two-12V652 70(31.8) 3-RCC21 R-E Red wallbox and door,EN54*certified CE 70(31.8) Chassis Assemblies 3-CHAS7 Takes one chassis space in wallbox,provides space for 7 local rail modules, up to two power supplies,and a1/2 footprint 8.4(3.8) module. 3-ASU"" Takes one chassis space in wallbox,provides an audio source unit/w microphone and an inner door filler plate. 15(6.8) 3-ASU/4" Takes one chassis space in wallbox,provides an audio source unit /w microphone and four local rail module spaces. 15(6.8) 3-ASU/FT"" Takes one chassis space in wallbox,provides an audio source unit /w microphone and Firefighters Telephone 20(9.1) 3-FTCU"" Takes one chassis space in wallbox,provides Firefighters Telephone Control unit and inner door filler plate. 15(6.8) MN-BRKT1 Takes one chassis space in wallbox,provides mounting for MNEC interface equipment 4.0(1.8) FSB-BRKT Mounting bracket for FSB-PC communications bridge.Allows FSB-PC to mount on the side of a Chass7 1.0(0.45) more... Notes: 1. All lobby enclosures,wallboxes and doors have a textured gray enamel finish; UL 365 category APAW,UL 1610 category AMCX,UL 1635 category AMCX outer doors are available in red by adding the suffix"R"to the catalog number,i.e. ULC-S527,ULC-S301,ULC-S302,ULC-S303,ULC-S306,ULC/ORD-C1076, 3-CAB7DR. ULC/ORD-C693 2. Remote closet cabinets will support 65 AH batteries with the use of the 3-BATS Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system require- Battery Shelf,which reduces the enclosure's chassis capacity by one chassis. ments. 3. The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: *EN54-2:1997+A 1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending UL 864 categories:UOJZ,UOXX,UUKL and SYZV,UL 2572,UL 294 category ALVY,UL 609 category AOTX,UL 636 category ANET,UL 1076 category APOU, ""Add"-CC"for City of Chicago. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0067 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Accessories Battery Shelf for RCC Enclosures.Takes one chassis space. Room for TO WA R D S 3-BATS up to one 65 AH or two 50 AH batteries. 3(1.36) A UTC Fire&Security Company BC-1 Battery Cabinet-supports up to two 40 amp hour batteries. 3-BTSEN Battery sensor/distribution module _ 0.5(.2) Detection&alarm since 1872 BC-1 EQ BC-1 -Seismic Battery hold down for BC-1. Supports up to two 40 Ahr batteries. Order BC-1 Separately. u.S. 3-CAB-Seismic Battery hold-down for 3-CAB 7, 14 or 21. Supports two 1 2V T 888-378-2329 3-CABEQ batteries from 10 Ah up to 18 Ah.Comes with EST3 Chassis hardening hardware F 866-503-3996 and instructions. Order 3-CAB7,3-CAB14 or 3-CAB21 separately.See note 1. Canada 3-RCC series-Seismic Battery hold-down.Supports one set of two 50 Ah Chubb Edwards 3-RCCEQ50 batteries.Comes with EST3 Chassis hardening hardware and instructions.Order T 519 376 2430 3-RCCxxR separately.See note 1. F 519 376 7258 3-RCC series cabinet-Seismic Battery hold-down. Supports one set of two 65 Southeast Asia 3-RCCEQ65 Ah batteries(one battery in bottom of cabinet,one battery mounted on 3-BATS). T:+65 6391 9300 Order 3-RCCxxR cabinet and 3-BATS separately.See note 1. F:+65 6391 9306 3-TAMP Tamper switch for 3-CAB7,3-CAB14 and 3-CAB21 cabinets. Mounts 0.5(.2) to side of cabinet. India 3-TAMP5 Tamper switch for 3-CAB5.Mounts to side of cabinet. 0.5(.2) T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 3-TAMPRCC 3-TAMPRCC Tamper Switch for RCC series cabinets. Mounts to side 0.5(.2) of cabinet. Australia 1. For earthquake anchorage,including detailed mounting weights and center of gravity detail,please refer to T+61 3 92391200 Seismic Application Guide 3101676.Approval of panel anchorage to site structure may require local AHJ, F+61 3 9239 1299 structural,or civil engineer review. Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi reandsecu rity.com ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 v, Page4of4 DATA Si,LL 85010-0067 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform �ESTTM Life Safety & Communications i4 - nil II • EST3 Central ' Processor Unit . - •�.,� s7 ■ = u� 3-CPU3, 3-RS485A, 3-RS485B, 3-RS232 f:. ......... .,, cE """ """ ''" - EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54- 4:1997+A1:2002+A2 li.OPF -_ pending. r. . Overview Standard Features The 3-CPU3 is the Central Processing Unit Module monitoring the • Up to 1,000 history events status of all modules and providing the link for network commu • RS 485 local rail communications nications.Although each local rail card contains their own micro- processor,the 3-CPU3 provides all inter-module communication • Multiplexed audio channels and has the ability to download rail module operating parameters. • Network communication media can consist of twisted copper Upon power up the 3-CPU3 automatically learns all local rail module RS485, short-haul modems and/or single or multimode fiber attributes and locations.Site specific software is loaded into the optic cables 3-CPU3 which then downloads data to each local rail module. Firmware upgrades are also done from the 3-CPU3 eliminating the • RS-232 communication card need to unplug chips on rail modules. • Form 'C'contacts for:Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Mounting must be in the first two local rail spaces of the upper • Low voltage memory write protection 3-CHAS7(module chassis). Options for the 3-CPU3 include the addition of an LCD display and User Interface, RS-232 Communi- • Non-volatile memory cation Card,and RS-485 Series Network Communication Cards. The 3-CPU3 is fully compatible on the same network with the 3-CPU and 3-CPU1 modules. Pagel of 4 DATA SHEL , 85010-0133 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Application Installation and Mounting The 3-CPU3 helps make EST3 an extremely powerful and flexible • ® • system.As a single node, stand alone system a single 3-CPU3 controls 1 to 19 additional local rail modules. For larger systems, _ Q _ up to 64 nodes interconnect on a peer-to-peer multi-priority token _ II II ® ring protocol network. Supply I Supply The 3-CPU3 controls all local panel responses to automatic, user initiated, or network reported events.As a network node, it is an -• 1•1•1••••••1 Ilddeldeld0 Ilddddd•IMI W666666661 equal among peers,there is no master on the network.This gives O Central exceptional response times over the network, less than three Processor seconds. \ Unit Module Each 3-CPU3 provides slots at the back for mounting Network, 13-CPU3 and RS-232, cards. Removable terminal blocks on the 3-CPU3 • support connection of network and audio data wiring.On board common relays also terminate at the 3-CPU3 terminals.To aid Data in trouble shooting and service, status LEDs monitor local rail, Maximum resistance between any 3 panels 90 Ohms network, RS232 and audio data communications. Maximum capacitance between any 3 panels 0.3 pF The Network Communications card mounts to the back of the Maximum distance between any 3 panels 5,000 ft.(1,524 m) Central Processor Unit.The 3-RS485A card provides a Class A via RS485 (Style 7)or Class B(Style 4)circuit for network communications signals and support for a Class B(Style 4)or Class A(Style 7- Capacitance,enulati network Maximumncemum Accumulative Capacitance dual Style 4)circuit for the digitized audio signals.The 3-RS485B card provides a Class B(Style 4)or Class A(Style 7)circuit for Wire Size 38.4K Baud 19.2K Baud network communications signals and a second Class B(Style 4) 18 AWG 1.4 pF 2.8 pF circuit for the digitized audio signals. Network messages received 16 AWG 1.8 pF 3.6 pF by the Network Communications card are re-transmitted to the 14 AWG 2.1 pF 4.2 NF next network node. Re-transmission maximizes the wire run lengths between nodes.With 64 nodes miles of network length is Audio possible. Fail safe mechanisms built into the card direct connect Maximum resistance between any 3 panels 90 Ohms the data input and output ports should the network card or its Maximum capacitance between any 3 panels 0.09 pF related Central Processor fail. Network communications may be Maximum distance between any 3 panels 5,000 ft.(1,524 m) configured via copper or fiber media using the 3-FIBMB. via copper RS485 The 3-RS232 Communication Card mounts to the back of the 3-CPU3.The 3-RS232 has two optically isolated RS-232 ports. The ports support connection of a printer and/or an external com- mand center. Entire network downloading from one location(to all 64 nodes)is available through the RS-232 card. Engineering Specification It must be possible to support a single stand alone node or up to 64 nodes communicating on a peer-to-peer token ring proto- col network. Network and digitized audio wiring shall be run in a [choose one: Class A(Style 7)or Class B(Style 4)]configuration. Network alarm response from alarm input to signal activation must be under 3 seconds. All field wiring must be to removable terminal blocks. Status LEDs must be provided for communications of net- work and internal rail communications. Inter-node communication speed must be programmable. Internal rail communications speed must be programmable. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0133 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Typical Wiring To external supervisory input circuit To external alarmr input circuit[ To external troubler input circuitL kJILIJH RnPPPPlimr1 Notes 0 0 0 o=b o o o=b o 1. Maximum#14 AWG(1.5 mm2)wire; ®®®®®®®®®® minimum#18 AWG(0.75 mm2). N N NC C NO NO C N/A NC NO C NC C-0 TROUBLE ALARM SUP 2. All shields,if used,must be continuous Cc o n2 c Connect to TB1 on 3-CPU3 Module and insulated from ground,except at the c6 originating panel. c^ >^ 3. Class A network data requires one pair E j CENTRAL of wires connecting the last node to the LU oU ,a PROCESSING first node. 1 c5 ILM Q o UNIT MODULE 4. Class A audio data requires two pairs +_ 4_1 I+_I Y Q of wires running in opposite directions, NN AA No V 3 U, originating at the node containing the Z) _as Connect to TB2 on 3-CPU3 Module ASU. Z U 000000000000000000000 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 /1R�/ III/III IIt- DB9 FEMALE I 11 (REAR VIEW) In PIN 9 (5)COM �� • (3)Tx. 1 PORT#2(isolated) - (2)RXD I• TO PRINTER OR REMOTE a tPINI COMMAND SYSTEM, IIORo ai a Z DB25 FEMALE Y 9 LL (REAR VIEW) oZ a a PIN 13 PIN 25 Ii z i---c -) Th—Network Audio Riser PORT#2(isolated) (7)COM COMMAND PRINTER <W�Class A only W ^^ (3) XD (2)TXD PIN 14 O= TD M D PIN 13 PIN 25 O COU DB25 FEMALE •5�Q Q Q o (REAR VIEW) 2�r> �c� PORT#1 02-.503 cCOM ISOLATED PORT 0 O (7) TO PRINTER OR REMOTE E0_ a52 COMMAND SYSTEM. 20 LL M QCT') (3)RXD _ (2)TXD I— a) I-,— PIN 14 Cj PIN 1 cts Q D_ 0 M Page 3 of 4 DATA S H E L , 85010-0133 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Specifications WAR OS 3-CPU3 Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM,CE,LPCB EN54"pending. A UTC Fire&Security Company Mounting 2-Left most local rail spaces Detection&alarm since 1872 Terminal Size 18-12 AWG(1.0mm2 to 2.5mm2) Standby Current 155 mA u.S. Alarm Current 165 mA T 888-378-2329 Contact Ratings Nonbypassable Alarm,Supervisory and Trouble Form'C' 1 A at 30 Vdc F 866-503-3996 Data Down Loading RJ14 Jack Canada Operating Environment 0°C-49°C(32°F-120°F);93%at 40°C Non-Condensing Chubb Edwards "EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending T 519 376 2430 Note:CPU current includes the main power supply,since the CPU and PPS cannot be measured F 519 376 7258 separately. Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 Option Cards F:+65 6391 9306 Catalog number 3-RS232 3-RS485A 3-RS485B India Standby Current 58 mA 98 mA 98 mA T:+91 80 4344 2000 Alarm Current 58 mA 98 mA 98 mA F:+91 80 4344 2050 One Class B(Style 4) Australia Two optically isolated Three RS-485 Class A or Class A(Style 7) T+61 3 9239 1200 Communication Ports RS 232 (Style 7) network data circuit F+61 3 9239 1299 and one Class B(Style 4)audio data circuit Europe Agency Listings UL,ULC.CSFM,CE,LPCB.EN54 pending*. T+32 2 725 11 20 Mounting Back of 3-CPU3 F+32 2 721 86 13 Operating Environment 0°C-49°C(32°F-120°F);93%at 40°C Non-Condensing Latin America *EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi reandsecu rity.com Ordering Information ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. Catalog Ship Wt. Number Description lb(kg) 3-CPU3 Central Processor Unit Module 0.71b(0.32kg) 3-RS485A Network Communications Card,Class A(Style 7) 0.331b (0.15kg) 3-RS485B One Class NB network data circuit and one Class B audio data 0.331b circuit (0.15kg) 3-RS232 RS-232 Communication Card 0.331b (0.15kg) 3-CPUDR CPU doors with filler plates. Order separately,one required per CPU 0.25Ib where no LCD display is installed. (0.11 kg) a 9 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0133 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform ESTrM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications [_ • • • • I 1111 II. I1f• I. • Liquid Crystal Display Module ! F M 3-LCD or' �-� MEA A � 0 ( D2' ' v CE _s71/ , EN54-2:1997+A1 a n n ❑ and EN54- 4:1997+A1:2002+A2 r } L 1 pending Overview Standard Features The Main Display interface is the primary user interface in the • Uses simple lights and switches EST3 Life Safety System.The main display interface focuses on • Displays information important to user the emergency user by putting information important to the user up front. Hands free,the first highest priority event is shown.The • Hands free first alarm display display always gives the last highest priority event.Arriving at • Last event of highest priority always displays the panel and without opening the door the first and last alarm is given. Simple to understand lights and switches help the emer- • Eight lines by 21 character graphic LCD display gency user execute system commands with confidence. — 168 characters total A menu system supports maintenance functions such as disables • Multlingual or reports for use by staff or service personnel. Supports English, French, Spanish,and Russian • Uses queues to sort events A queue is a list of messages Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor • Slide in LED and switch labels Makes customization for regional language easy Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0071 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 Application The 3-LCD module mounts to the local rail over the nodes Central via the Alarm Silence switch or via alarm silence software timers. Processing Unit Module(3-CPU).The 3-LCD module is optional in Pressing Panel Silence turns off the system's internal audible any network node. signal. The yellow LED turns on when panel silence is active. The Ensuring information clarity the 3-LCD uses a backlit high contrast EST3 panel buzzer has user programmable signal rates for alarm, supertwist graphical display. Eight lines of 21 characters provide supervisory,trouble and monitor conditions. the room needed to convey emergency information in a useful format. 3-LCD always displays the last highest priority event even Pressing Drill turns on the drill LED and all signals sound evacua- Thewhen the user is viewing other message queues. Further message tion. Drill does not activate city tie connections. Auxiliary relays will not activate unless programmed to do so with drill. flexibility is provided with EST3's message routing ability. Messag- es from a node can display at every node on the network or mes- 12:12:12 04 25 ss In the center of the 3-LCD is the sages can route to specific nodes only. Routing can be initiated at Liquid Crystal Display. In the a specific time/shift change.There is no need to have messages normal condition the date and display in areas that are not affected by an event. E T W OD LINES' time plus a definable system title The 3-LCD can display messages in English, Spanish, French, display on the LCD.The last line of and Russian.The bilingual display lets the operator select between the display gives an alarm history. ALRRn RISTORJ 0000 either of two languages. Consult your representative for available This total equals the number of language combinations. times the system has entered the alarm state from the normal state. The EST3 system configures for Proprietary, Local or EN54 market When active events are on display, the LCD formats into four operations.The mode of operation is selected through the System logical windows. Definition Utility(SDU)which may adjust the following operations slightly to fit the system operation selected. 12:12:12 R00002 00000 S'dSTEI? STATUS WINDOW 0001 RLRR^ FICTIVE 111 LEDs and Switches LOCATION PIE5SRGE LINE1 CURRENT EVENT WINDOW LOCATION PESSRGE LINE2 Further enhancing the 3-LCD user interface are easy to read and 0002 R L R R I1 FIC T I V E understand lights and switches.All functions are laid out in a logi- L O C R T I 0 N PIES S R G E LINE 1 LAST EVENT WINDOW cal order.At the top of the 3-LCD are five system status LEDs. L O C K 710 N N E S S R G E LINE2 Here determining the general condition of the system is easy. ® 5000 T 0 0 0 N O 0 0 TYPE 5 7 R T U 5 WINDOW IN ■ ■ ■ IN In the system status window,the display shows the time and the Power Test CPU Gnd Disable status of active and disabled points. Fail Fault The current event window, lines 2, 3, 4 automatically display the Power LED: Green, on when AC power is on. first active event of the highest priority if the user has not taken Test LED:Yellow, on when any portion of the system(Group)is control of the system. Once the emergency user takes control,this under test. window displays user message selections. Reset ,. 'Alarm , Drill , Panel , The second line of the display shows system event information. In Silence, Silence, the example above the display shows the chronological number of O El O El the event(0001 is the first alarm)followed by the event type(Alarm . , . , . , . I Active). EST3 supports over 45 event type messages from which CPU Fail LED:Yellow, on when CPU stops running. system designers choose.The last two lines of the current event window are custom programmable location message lines with Gnd Fault LED:Yellow,on when a ground exists on the system space for 42 characters. (group) Disable LED:Yellow,on when any point or zone is disabled by a The last event window shows the last highest priority event.This user. window is always displayed and updated automatically by the sys- Below the general status LEDs are located four, LED/Switch tem. Here the emergency user can monitor the progress of a fire. common controls.The versatility of EST3 allows system design ,__, When EST3 is configured for a local mode ers to define the features as affecting a domain(defined group of A Previous system viewing the second alarm message is nodes)or as global(affects all nodes)across the network. This Message easy,just press the NEXT key.The next feature is very useful when configuring systems with multiple build Umessage scrolls into the current event window. ings on one network.As an example, operating the reset in one . , Next The last highest priority event always remains building may have adverse effect in other buildings.With EST3 on view. No matter what queue the user selects for viewing,the having operational differences between buildings on the same LCD always displays the most recent alarm.A new alarm event network is not a problem. resounds the panel audible signal and appears immediately on Pressing Reset starts the system's reset operation.The yellow display without overwriting information the user selected for view. LED has three flash rates during reset.The LED flashes fast during The final window of the LCD the type status window shows the the smoke power down phase of reset,flashes slow during the re- total number of active events by queue type.A is alarm, S is start phase, and turns on steady for the restoral phase.The Reset supervisory,T is trouble,and M is monitor.The number following LED turns off when the system is normal. each letter is the number of active events existing in each queue. Pressing Alarm Silence turns off all Notification Appliance Circuits EST3 breaks down event types into queues and automatically defined as audible.The yellow LED turns on when silence is active displays the first event of the highest priority type. Page2of4 DATA SHEET 85010-0071 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 ENCm • . . •• . •• In 1998 54 the Britishopliance based Loss Prevention Certification Board V ❑ V ❑ V ❑ V ❑ (LPCB)certified EST3 control panels and power supplies as hav- ing surpassed the requirements of the pivotal EN54 standard, Alarm / Supervisory, , Trouble , , Monitor , parts two and four. LPCB Certificate#257c for EST3 fire alarm control panels marked the first such certification since the strin- Priority order is alarm, supervisory,trouble, monitor. By using gent EN54-2 : 1997 and EN54-4 : 1997 were published by the queues an emergency user does not waste time scrolling through European Committee for Standardization(CEN). In order to meet a mixed event list looking for alarms or confusing an alarm mes- these standards, display and control functions have undergone sage with other message types. slight modifications for the EN54 marketplace.These differences EST3 configures for Remote proprietary system operation where are highlighted below.All other control and annunciation features remain unchanged. every event must be acknowledged by viewing them before the internal buzzer will silence. Or the EST3 will configure for Local Note: EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 approval operation. Here the internal buzzer silences by pressing panel is pending. silence. If any events exist in queues that have not been viewed the queue LED continues to flash informing the user of un-seen events. System Status LEDs When all events in a queue are acknowledged or'seen',the ❑ GI ❑ ❑ ❑ LED associated with the queue turns on steady. If a new event is Power Test CPU Sounder Disable added to the queue,the EST3 internal buzzer resounds and the Fault queue LED flashes. Power LED(Green): on when DC power is on. EST3 allows device grouping into logical group zones. Here two or more alarm devices(such as detectors or pull stations)make up Test LED(Yellow): on when any portion of the system(Group)is the zone.When a device in the zone activates,the LCD displays under test. the zone description. Each zone only displays once, regardless of CPU Fault LED(Yellow): on when CPU stops running(processor the number of devices active within the zone. failures must be manually reset). ( ) ` Details ' To display device information the user presses Gnd Fault LED: Not available. the Details key.The device with the lowest address displays in the first window. Sounder LED(Yellow):flashing indicates fault on sounder circuit. Steady indicates a disabled sounder circuit. If multiple devices are active each is available for viewing by using the arrow associated with the Previous Message Next key and Disable LED(Yellow):on when any point or zone is disabled by scrolling through the device list. a user(disabled conditions have priority over fault conditions). ri R I N rI E N u The common controls easily Switch Functions } I l sr R T u s expand beyond the Main Display , , , 2) E IY R8 L E interface by adding a Control Reset Sounder Panel Drill 31 DiSRBLE ` , `On/Off / `Silence 43 R C T I V R T E Display Module and assigning S I RESTORE features to its switch controls. ' ` ' 5' ' ` ' ` 5) REPORTS L ROOD 5000 TODD 110DD V For Maintenance users,the EST3 ` • ` • ` I ` J provides a smooth operating menu system providing powerful tools for system management, Pressing Sounder On/Off turns off all sounder circuits defined as reports,and trouble shooting. audible.The yellow LED turns on when silence is activated via the Sounder On/Off or via the alarm silence software timers. See Page 2 for descriptions of Reset, Panel Silence, and Drill func- Installation and Mounting tions, ® 7 : •® 0 : \ Event Queues . . . . . —• • • • • • • •— A/ P A/ ❑ A/ P 4/ L Central R =. Processor M - ` Fire / ` Fault , ` Disable / ` Monitor Unit ® ® l 3-CPU1 0000 -- ® ® `.. I. For EN54 compliance, EST3 configures for remote proprietary ®®®® ® 01:0 i., system operation.This requires that every event must be acknowl- _ o • • coco edged by viewing them before the internal buzzer will silence.The DCO i m priority order is Fire, Fault, Disable, Monitor. EN54-2:1997+A1 and g g g g ,= ® co I EN54 4:1997+A1:2002+A2 approval is pending. oo0 MD a ED ED 00000 00 ® ® rn i', 170© oo - ® ® C, :, Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0071 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 Engineering Specification TOWARDS The system shall provide a user interface that displays system events in a text format, and supports basic common control LEDs and switches.The Common Control Switches and A UTC Fire&Security Company LEDs provided as minimum will be; Reset switch and LED,Alarm Silence switch and LED, Detection&alarm since 1872 Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill switch and LED. It must be possible to add additional common controls as required through the use of modular display units.The user interface u.s. must provide an LCD that will allow custom event messages of up to 42 characters.The T 888-378-2329 interface must provide a minimum of eight lines by 21 characters and provide the emer- F 866-503-3996 gency user, hands free viewing of the first and last highest priority event.The last highest Canada priority event must always display and update automatically. Events shall be automati- Chubb Edwards cally placed in easy to access queues. It shall be possible to view specific event types T 519 376 2430 separately. Having to scroll through a mixed list of event types is not acceptable.The total F 519 376 7258 number of active events by type must be displayed.Visual indication must be provided of Southeast Asia any event type which has not been acknowledged or viewed. It must be possible to cus- T:+65 6391 9300 tomize the designation of all user interface LEDs and Switches for local language require- F:+65 6391 9306 ments. It shall be possible to have a custom message for each device in addition to zone India messages. Custom device messages must support a minimum of 42 characters each. T:+91 80 4344 2000 Instructional text messages support a maximum of 1,000 characters each.The display F:+91 80 4344 2050 shall be capable of displaying English, Spanish, French, or Russian messages. Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Technical Specifications Europe Catalog Number 3-LCD T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Agency Listings UL,ULC,FM,CE,LPCB EN54*pending. LCD Display Eight lines by 21 characters backlit LCD Latin America Mounting Two local rail spaces on top of 3-CPU T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 Reset switch and LED Common Control Alarm Silence switch and LED utcfireandsecurity.com Switches and LEDs Panel Silence switch and LED Drill Switch and LED ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Alarm Current 42mA All rights reserved. Standby Current 40mA EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping Weight,lb.(kg) 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module .8 (.36) 3-LKE UK English Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKF French Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKR Russian Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKS Spanish Label Kit .25(.11) a C Page4of4 DATA SHEET 85010-0071 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform ESTrM )IIIPILife Safety & Communications Monitor Module EST3 Power , •\ :: .., Supplies . . \\„Ni,.„ .._ . :.. , .. \ A . ,. . . 3-PPS/M series, 3-BPS/M series, s 4 3-BBC/M series Power " �C Supply .� 1111 1101 , (( 1;':;i111111° . EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending Overview Standard Features EST3 Power supplies consist of two assemblies, a high efficiency • High efficiency switch mode switch mode power supply card and a power supply monitor • Increased power distribution efficiency module.The monitor module mounts to the local rail and distrib power supplies parallel allowing up to 28 amps in a single utes the power from its supply to the local rail.The local rail dis- node tributes power from all power supplies to other local rail modules and user interface cards resulting in "Shared Power"throughout • 120 or 230 Vac operation the system. By paralleling the power supplies on a rail maximum • 7 AMP filtered and regulated utilization of available power is possible, resulting in fewer power supplies. Up to four power supplies combine in a single enclosure • Two 3.5 AMP outputs providing up to 28 amps of available power. Battery backup is • Temperature compensated, dual rated battery charger provided using from one to four sets of batteries, depending on standby power requirements. • Electronic power limiting Power supplies mount to the back of the chassis units or wall- • Automatic load testing of batteries boxes.The associated power supply monitor module mounts on the local rail providing system power distribution and mounting space for any control display module.Access to auxiliary power is via easily accessible terminal blocks located on the power sup- ply monitor module. Each power supply produces 7 Amps of filtered and regulated power.With four power supplies located in an enclosure(one primary and three booster power supplies)28 amps of current is available for local rail modules, control display modules and the eight auxiliary 3.5 amp power outputs(two per supply). Page 1 of 4 DATA S H E D 85010-0059 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10.1 Application Engineering Specification The primary power supply provides the system with battery The fire alarm power supplies must be capable of being paralleled charging and voltage regulation. Software configures the charger and to load share. Multiple power supplies must be capable of be- to either 10-24 AH batteries or 30-65 AH batteries and controls ing backed up with a single 24 volt battery set. Each power supply the high/low charge rates. Batteries mounted in the same en- shall be capable of charging up to 65 AH batteries.The power closure as the power supply, have their charge rate monitored supply must be able to perform an automatic load test of batteries and adjusted based on the local enclosure temperature, keeping and return a trouble if the batteries fall outside a predetermined charging rates within battery specification. For remote batteries a range. Power supplies must incorporate the ability to adjust the temperature probe is monitored in the remote battery cabinet and charge rate of batteries based on ambient temperatures. It shall charge rates are adjusted automatically. Battery damage is unlikely be possible to adjust for ambient temperature changes in local to occur when environmental short term conditions are outside of cabinets as well as remote cabinets. normal operating ranges. The EST3 power supplies automatically load test batteries by shutting down the battery charger and placing a load across the Installation and Mounting battery. If the battery voltage is outside the specification range the power supply reports a trouble.The trouble clears if the battery is = able to recover and pass future load tests. .'� m L Battery leads are electronically short circuit protected. If a short R occurs in the battery leads the charger automatically disables itself 1 and causes a trouble.The system will constantly look to see if _ al M 6 _ _ _ the short has cleared. If the short clears the system automatically •0— O—O—O•—•O—J restores. ' o m. 0o- • �.o:.o o • During operation on standby batteries, battery voltage is constant- ly monitored.A trouble is reported if the battery voltage falls below — 777 • • — ri a specified value. EST3 power supplies provide specific information back to the Power 3-CPU(1)designed to help speed trouble shooting of system Power Distribution functions. Should a power supply detect a fault, specific diagnos- Module tic codes are available to speed trouble shooting.The 3-LCD will Supply lEN 54 only) / display the power supplies address, a specific trouble code,and a text message describing the specific trouble.Text messages are ❑" -- easy to understand and include items like: Battery Trouble,Aux — — Power Overload Circuit 1,Aux Power Overload Circuit 2. ZEE ■r^ _.o•- o.= • = o e o._.o... 0 0_ _0_0-0—Ill Pow L Sup.' R =. o ®m.®m.o. �. Power Supply Rules 1. Each battery set needs one charger, either a 3-PPS/M or a 3-BBC/M. 2. Each power supply must be connected to a battery set using an identical length and gauge of wire to keep voltage drops identical. 3. Distribute power supplies and loads evenly across rails. 4. All battery sets for a panel must be the same capacity(AH),same manufacturer,and same manufacturing date code. The Table below illustrates the combinations of power supplies and batteries that meet all the power supply rules. 24 VDC Power Supply Output Current 7A 14A 21A 28A Two Identical Three Identical Four Identical Battery One Set, One Set, Sets,65 AH One Set, Sets,65 AH One Set, Sets,65 AH Requirements 65 AH max 65 AH max max 65 AH max max 65 AH max max Required 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 2 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M 1 3-PPS/M Modules 1 3-BPS/M 1 3-BBC/M 3-BPS/M 2 3-BBC/M 3 3-BPS/M 3 3-BBC/M Page 2 of 4 DATA SH E E , 85010-0059 Not to be used for installation purposes Issue 10.1 Typical Wiring Utility Power Primary Booster Booster Booster Power Power Power Power Supply Supply Supply Supply [1] [2] [2] [2] Power �� 24Vdc* .„=,24Vdc* ��Vdc* ��dc* Supply v2x3.5A 2x3.5A �2x3.5A �2x3.5A Monitoring � 1 �_] 4 4 Primary Rails Rails Booster Power Supply —4 Power I ,, 4— Power Supply Monitor Module /To Rail +I Monitor Module Il ► ♦ ► F ♦ —} eeee We Z Rees I Auxiliary I Auxiliary I Auxiliary I Auxiliary ► Power ► Power ►Power ► Power ►Takeoff ►Takeoff ►Takeoff Takeoff 2x3.5A 2x3.5A 2x3.5A 2x3.5A [1]From battery temperature probe terminals. [2]From battery and from temperature probe terminals if 3-BTSEN-E used. *Nominal Voltage Specifications 3-PPS/M& 3-PPS/M-230& 3-PPS/M-230-E& Catalog Number 3-BBC/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M-230 3-BPS/M-230 3-BBC/M-230-E 3-BPS/M-230-E Agency Approvals UL,ULC U L,ULC UL,ULC UL,ULC LPCB EN54*,CE EN54* Input Voltage 120 Vac(+10%,-15%),50-60 Hz 230 Vac(+10%,-15%),50-60 Hz Brownout Level <or=102 Vac 96 Vac <or=195 Vac 184 Vac <or=195 Vac 188 Vac 3-PPS/M included 3-PPS/M-230 3-PPS/M-230-E with 3-CPU3 current included with included with Current Alarm 50mA 3-CPU3 current Alarm:50 mA 3-CPU3 current Alarm:50 mA Requirements 3-BBC/M Standby 50mA 3-BBC/M-230 Standby:50 mA 3 BBC/M 230E Standby:50 mA Alarm:70 mA Alarm:70 mA Alarm:70 mA Standby:70 mA Standby:70 mA Standby:70 mA Input Current 3.0 A 1.5 A Total Output Current Special Applications:7.0 Amps Battery Charging 65 AH Sealed 65 AH Sealed 30 AH Sealed Capacity Lead-Acid None Lead-Acid None Lead-Acid None Low Battery Trouble 24 Vdc 22.5 Vdc Deep Discharge 19.5 Vdc 20.0 Vdc Cutoff Mounting 1 LRM space, 1 LRM Space+ 1 LRM space, Requirements 1 chassis footprint 3-PPS:2 footprints 1 chassis footprint 3-BBC: 1 footprint Output Voltage 24 Vdc Nominal Auxiliary Output Two sources of 3.5 Amps each taken from total output current Current Auxiliary Output 18 AWG to 12 AWG(1 mm2 to 2.5 mm2) Terminal Capacity Output Protection Electronic power limiting&heat sink temperature Ground Fault Detection <10K Ohms *EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEL 85010-0059 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10.1 Ordering Information TO WA R D S Catalog Ship Wt.,lb. Number Description (kg) A UTC Fire&Security Company 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply w/local rail module 120V 50/60 Hz 5(2.3) Detection&alarm since 1872 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply w/local rail module 120V 50/60 Hz 5(2.3) 3-PPS/M-230 Primary Power Supply w/local rail module 230V 50/60 Hz 5(2.3) U.S. 3-BPS/M-230 Booster Power Supply w/local rail module 230V 50/60 Hz 5(2.3) T 888-378-2329 Primary Power Supply w/local rail module 230V 50 Hz, F 866-503-3996 3-PPS/M-230-E EN54"Certified,CE 5(2.3) Canada 3-BPS/M-230-E Booster Power Supply w/local rail module 230V 50 Hz, 5(2.3) Chubb Edwards EN54'Certified,CE T 519 376 2430 3-BBC/M Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail module 120V 50/60Hz 5(2.3) F 519 376 7258 3-BBC/M-230 Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail module 230V 50/60Hz 5(2.3) Southeast Asia 3-BBC/M-230-E Booster/Charger Supply w/local rail module,230V 50/60Hz, 5(2.3) T:+65 6391 9300 EN54*Certified,CE F:+65 6391 9306 Booster/Charger Monitor Module with charger capability 3 BBCMON(E) (upgrade 3-BPS/M(-230)(-E)to 3-BBC/M-(230)(-E)) 5(2.3) India 3-BTSEN Distribution Module required when battery installed .5 T:+91 80 4344 2000 (.22) F:+91 80 4344 2050 in remote cabinet 3 BTSEN E Distribution and Temperature Sensor Module. Required in .5(.22) Australia EN54*Markets when battery installed in a remote cabinet. T+61 3 9239 1200 Filler Plate,order separately when no LED or LED/Switch F+61 3 9239 1299 3-FP 0.1 (0.05) module installed. Europe `EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi reandsecu rity.com ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 v Page 4 of 4 DATA S H E E , 85010-0059 Not to be used for installation purposes Issue 10.1 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform �ESTTM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications Hinged Bracket F Filler plate (ordered separately) Module 1 Modem Communicator 3-MODCOM, 3-MODCOMP • • � 0 Overview Standard Features The Modem Communicator is a two-way local rail module that • Listed for fire, security and access control performs a variety of off-premise communications functions for the • V.32bis 14.4K full duplex modem EST3 system. • Digital alarm communicator transmitter supporting: SIA DCS Using the latest in digital signal processing(DSP)techniques,the protocol, Contact ID protocol, 3/1 and 4/2 pulse format proto- Modcom provides off premise communication features unavailable col on any other system. • Supports"tap"alphanumeric pager protocol The module has provisions for supervising two loop-start tele- phone lines.The module features a modular jack for telephone line • Fully programmable messages connections.The Modcom's configuration and firmware can also • Alarm override of upload/download be updated from any network node. • Two phone line capability Modcom series modules occupy a single local rail space and • can be mounted in any node on the network.Any EST3 Control/ Field upgradable firmware Display module can be mounted on the face of a Modcom series • Split and multiple reporting to as many as 80 different receivers module. Power for the Modcom is supplied by the EST3 system • 255 subscriber accounts supply. • Supports control/display modules The Modcom provides an enhanced level of survivability in the event of a network CPU failure by notifying the Central Monitoring • Supervised by the network controller Station of the failure and entering a degraded mode of operation. In degraded mode,the Modcom can transmit a default fire alarm message during a fire alarm condition. Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0107 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 Application multi-dial reporting capability permits an individual event to be transmitted to multiple receivers, including pagers. Two versions of the Modcom are available: Remote Data Upload/Download 3-MODCOM Has an internal V.32bis 14.4K baud full duplex The modem permits data to be downloaded into the memories modem.The modem permits upload and download of system of the various components making up an EST3 system. Data can data remotely via a telephone line. In addition,the 3-MODCOM be remotely uploaded and downloaded for use with the Edwards has a Digital Alarm Communications Transmitter(DACT)or dialer Access Control Database Program. In the event that an alarm is function that transmits network status information to Central received during upload/download activity,the Modcom automati- Monitoring Stations(CMS)via telephone. Four DACT protocols are cally terminates the call and transmits the alarm events to the available: appropriate receivers.When completed sending the events,the 1. Digital Communicator Standard(DCS)"SIA forma" Dialer download will continue where it left off. —300 baud format,which transmits alphanumeric system status data to the CMS; 2. Contact ID; Engineering Specification 3. SIA 3/1 dialer; and, The system shall provided an off premise communications module 4. SIA 4/2 dialer. capable of transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitor- Alarm code content is determined by system rules. ing Station(CMS)receivers.The module shall provide the CMS with point identification of system events via 4/2, Contact ID or 3-MODCOMP—In addition to all modem and dialer(DACT)func- SIA DCS protocols. <The module shall also be capable of trans- tions of the 3-MODCOM,the 3-MODCOMP can dial directly into mitting alphanumeric system activity by event to a commercial paging systems using Telelocator Alphanumeric Protocol(TAP).Al- paging system using TAP Pager protocol.>The dialer shall have phanumeric system data can be sent to a single pager or group(s) the capability to support up to 255 individual accounts and to of pagers. Some pager services can forward messages via e-mail send account information to eighty(80)different receivers, each and Fax. having a primary and secondary telephone access number. Multiple Priority System events shall be capable of being directed to one or more Each Modcom can buffer up to 500 events in its event queue. It re- receivers depending on event type or location as specified by the views all active events in the queue and identifies the highest priority system designer.The module shall have a degrade mode capable event and dials the associated receiver.When the receiver is con- of transmitting fire alarm signals to the CMS in the event of system tacted,the MODCOM will transmit the highest priority message for CPU failure.The module shall provide a high speed(V 32bis or that receiver. If the message is successfully received,the MODCOM greater)modem function in order to upload and download system identifies the next highest priority message and the process repeats. data to/from a remote location. Phone Line Friendly The Modcom series has been designed for installation on the Typical Wiring same phone lines with other devices such as phones and faxes. SURGE The module makes its first dial out attempt on either of the two PROTECTOR RING Az phone lines that is not in use.This prevents unnecessary interrup- 1 (RED) tion of calls in progress by the line seizure relays. In the event that al both lines are busy,the module seizes line one. TIP GREEN (GREEN) �. //' R1TO PHONE LINE#2 A fixed DACT testing time can be set at an off-hour, e.g. 2:00am, 1d.GL 8 J3PINX MODULAR (WIRED SAME AS CONNECTOR FOR PHONE LINE#1) again minimizing interruptions and phone line costs.The call time RED a PHONE LINE#1 is programmable,and allows testing of the DACT with the central PHONES PREMISES e 8 PIN station. 8 PIN MODULAR CONNECTOR FOR �� PHONE LINE#2 All './The Modcom series also has the ability to detect Type 1,Type w ? 2 and Type 3 distinctive ringing patterns, permitting it to share its phone lines with other devices and still have a unique phone PNO T-TAPS ERMITTED number for incoming modem calls. 7Ft. (2.13 M)/ \ Multiple Modcoms per Network 4, 4, A Notes: Multiple Modcoms can be installed in a single cabinet or locatedMoDcoMEz Connect Line 1 and Line 2 to RJ31X or RJ38X . (CA31 A or CA38A in Canada)telephone jacks (front in nodes throughout the network to provide added availability and O installed by an authorized telephone company enhanced redundancyof offpremise communications. representative.Jacks(not supplied)must be Linstalled within 5 ft.(1.5 m)of the panel. Multiple Receiver Capability /Z\Phone Cord(P/N 360137)supplied)is In large system applications the EST3 system may be partitioned ^�� supervised and non-power limited. such that it supports a number of different customers, each using different Central Monitoring Stations and/or paging companies. The Modcom can accommodate up to 255 different accounts us- ing up to 80 different receivers. The Modcom supports split reporting, a process where the system directs the Modcom to send some events or event types to one receiver, and different events to alternate receivers.The module's Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0107 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 Specifications Agency Listings UL,FCC Part 68/CFR 47,ULC.See Note 1. Installation Takes up one LRM space in 3-CHAS7 Input Power 24 Vdc 60mA standby,95 mA active Modem Protocol ITU-V.32bis 14.4K baud full duplex using standard PC modem compatible data Dialer Protocol SIA 3/1 (format P2)and 4/2(format P3):20 pulses per second,double round Contact ID(DTMF format) Digital Communications Standard(DCS)"SIA format': Level 2(300 baud,Bell 103) Pager Protocol(3-MODCOMP only) Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol(TAP),Version 1.8,300 baud,Bell 103 Telephone Dialing Pulse or Tone(DTMF) Connector Two 8-position modular phone jacks CMS Telephone Numbers Quantity Two per receiver-160 max. Available Digits Up to 24 digits per number Receivers Supports up to 80 individual receivers. Event Buffer 500 events Operating Environment 32°F(0°C)to 120°F(49°C),93%RH Non-condensing Receivers Tested Format Manufacturer Model Receiver Card 4/2 and 3/1 Ademco 685 685-1 or 685-8 FBI(Fire Burglary Instruments) CP220 Osborne-Hoffman OH2000 Radionics D6600 Silent Knight 9000 9032 Sur-Gard MLR2,SG-SLR MCDI TLR,TLR+ Contact ID Ademco 685 685-8 Osborne-Hoffman OH2000 Sur-Gard MLR2,SG-SLR Radionics D6600 Silent Knight 9000 9032 MCDI TLR,TLR+ SIA DCS Sur-Gard MLR2,SG-SLR Note 1: The EST3 is modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 categories:UOJZ,UOXX,UUKL and SYZV,UL 294 category ALVY,UL 609 category AOTX,UL 636 category ANET,UL 1076 category APOU,UL 365 category APAW,UL 1610 category AMCX,UL 1635 category AMCX ULC-S527,ULC-S301,ULC-S302,ULC-S303,ULC-S306,ULC/ORD-C1076 and ULC/ORD-C693 Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. Ordering Information Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lb(kg) 3-MODCOM Modem/Dialer(DACT)version 0.5(0.23) 3 MODCOMP Modem/Dialer(DACT)w/TAP Pager 0.5(0.23) Protocol 3 FP Filler Plate,order separately when no LED 0.1 (0.05) or LED/Switch module installed. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0107 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 WARDS A UTC Fire&Security Company Detection&alarm since 1872 U.S. T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Canada Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi rean dsec u rity.c om ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 C Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0107 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 5.1 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform T.-8T TTM Life Safety & Communications Signature Driver - Controller Modules ..... . :;fin 3-SSDC1 , 3-SDDC1 , 3-SDC1 '' � ': , CE 111_.,:;',:;1111.7 EN54-2:1997+A1:2006 ''�' .u� and EN54-4:1997+2002 Overview Standard Features The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Signature Driver Controller modules • One or two circuit versions provide an intelligent interface between the 3-CPU3 module and • Dedicated microprocessor control Signature Series devices. Each module contains its own micro- processor used to coordinate, process and interpret information • Full digital communication received from and sent to Signature devices. Power and commu- • Specialized communication protocol nications is received directly from the control panel rail assembly. -Less sensitive to cable characteristics The 3-SSDC1 Single Signature Driver Controller module supports -Utilize existing wiring in most applications one Signature Data circuit,while the 3-SDDC1 Signature Dual Driver Controller module supports two Signature circuits. Both • Loop alarm in under 750 milliseconds modules occupy one rail space in the fire alarm control cabinet • Device location supervision and provide removable field wiring terminals to aid installation. -Unexpected additional device addresses Innovative design gives the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 and Signature -Missing device addresses devices truly"distributed intelligence". Signature detectors and -Switched device locations modules have their own on-board microprocessor communicating -Programmed device parameters with the loop controller in a fully digital communication format.This . Automatic nonvolatile as-built mapping increases the accuracy of the information coming to and from the -Stores"actual"and"expected"device data loop controller by reducing the effects of capacitance and noise. -Stores physical connection sequence including "T"taps With decentralized intelligence much of the decision making moves • Automatic day/night sensitivity from the loop controller to the devices.Advanced fire detection • algorithms processed within the Signature devices effectively end Supports up to 250 intelligent Signature detectors unwanted alarms.Environmental compensation and multiple sens and 250 Intelligent Signature Modules ing element decision making operations are resident in the devices. • Up to five 3-SDDC1 s per node Intelligent devices allow the Signature Controllers to execute commu- -Total of 10 Signature circuits nication and system functions with greater speed and low baud rates, • Removable field wiring terminal blocks increasing the accuracy of information transmitted between the loop controller and devices. • Multiple survival modes — stand alone • Fully backward compatible with 3-SSDC and 3-SDDC • Supports the full line of Signature II devices, including carbon monixide detection Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0129 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Application Up to 125 detectors and 125 modules are supported over a single During maintenance, should groups of detector heads be removed pair of wires by the 3-SDC1 Signature Cards that plug into the for service and returned into the wrong smoke detector base Signature controller modules. Both Class A wiring(style 6 or style (location),the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will automatically detect the 7)and Class B(style 4)wiring are supported. Loop distances over problem. If the attributes of the switched devices are the same, 11,000 feet(3300m)are possible. the system will automatically download the correct soft addresses The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 use advanced communication for and algorithms to the devices(maintaining location supervision). mats that provide exceptional response. Using a "BROADCAST If the attributes are not the same the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will send POLL"the loop controller checks the entire device circuit for any a map fault indication to the 3-CPU3 and post a trouble indicating changes of state. Should one or more devices report a change the the specific devices in fault. 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 uses"DIRECT ADDRESS SEARCH"to find reporting device(s). Devices that have entered the alarm state or The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 also monitors the Signature Series become active are located nearly instantaneously. devices for maintenance and trouble conditions. Each smoke de- tector contains intelligence to adjust with environmental changes. The unique use of"BROADCAST POLLING"combined with "DI- This expands the amount of time required between cleaning while RECT ADDRESS SEARCH"ensures that only new information is maintaining a constant alarm threshold.As the detector begins to transmitted allowing a reduced baud rate with fast response time. exhaust the environmental compensation, and reaches the 80% The low baud rate is ideal for retrofit applications since in most level,the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 will indicate a maintenance alert applications existing wiring can be used. or dirty condition to the 3-CPU and indicate the specific device To enhance survivability of the system the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 requiring cleaning. If cleaning is not performed the detector will supports a standalone mode for Signature devices.Two cata continue to operate until all of its environmental compensation is strophic failure modes are supported. If the 3-CPU(1/3)fails, the loop controller will continue to poll its devices. If an alarm Typical Wiring is detected it will be sent on the local rail communication bus and received by other local rail modules.A common alarm X A `n: `n, 1 condition throughout the panel will result. If the local rail mod- ule(3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1)fails,and a device(smoke or module) 4.ki .A& I SDC#1 Smoke detects an alarm, specialized circuitry will make the node aware of e Pi A Circuit#1 '_r��111"ili i the alarm condition.The 3-CPU(1/3)will communicate the alarm ,.... ao o, condition to the rest of the network. Having multiple redundant O TB1 on 35DDC1 Moeule modes is paramount in a life safety system. 3-SDDC1 SIGNATURE Every time the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 communicates with a detector Class B Configuration Shown(Typical) DAL UDRIVER a green LED on the detector flashes. Normal green LED activity is COMODOOLEER not disturbing to building occupants, but can be quickly spotted T Tae°n3-SDDC1 Molle by a maintenance technician.A red LED on the detector turns on ,.,„.,ee. only in the alarm condition. Circuit#2IIII °`���;, The 3 SSDC1/3 SDDC1 also supervises the device wiring, physi- AA P° �Qke 1 cal location of each device and the programmed device charac- e A teristics.This Edwards/Signature Series unique characteristic is 3A, aA, A, accomplished by"MAPPING"the Signature circuit and committing ° ° the map to memory. Upon power up the loop controller will scan device serial numbers and map their physical location sequence ig i .;.1..,' on the loop, including "T"taps.After mapping is complete the = ° controller automatically addresses each detector and module 4, 00 through downloading over the loop.There are no switches or dials ClassAConfiguration Shown(Typical) to set. Each device is assigned a unique soft address generated by the site specific program. ;gin, ) to uo to, co A The 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 then compares the"Actual"physical 1 1 SDC#,Smoke device data to the"Expected"site specific program data. If any Wiring Notes + -+ rPmver correlations are different,the loop controller issues a trouble to the A Maximum#12AWG(1.5mm')wire; Circuit#1 ._,.,,,,, o 1 minimum CPU identifying the devices which do not match and posting a oTB1 on 3.SDDC1 MOEule map fault.Through the 3-CPU3's RS-232 port a graphical map of 2. All wiring supervised and power limited. 3-DDDC1 the loopcan be uploaded depicting each device's location on the 0 Shields(if used)must be continuous and SIGNATUREU p p g free from Earth Ground. DUAL loop, including branches (T-Taps and all of the physical attributes q Class A wiring. DRIVER CONTROLLER ER associated with the device.This diagnostic information is unparal- A Class B wiring. MODULE T. leled in the fire detection industry and vital for keeping accurateTo Universal Module or MAB module To TB2 on3SDDC1 Module A records on how the system was installed. e when 2-wire smokes are powered from Y the module. circuit#2 e�ee n' During installation a common problem with analog/addressable '+��'+ SDC#2 Smoke 111 I 1 systems is locating ground faults.The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Power A controllers have the ability to locate ground faults by specific mod- cid) (( a a) a° a A ule, speeding up the troubleshooting process.Another significant advantage of the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 controllers during com- missioning is electronic addressing and mapping.This eliminates ClassAConfigurationShown(Typical) 4.4 AL duplicate addresses,which are also very difficult for most systems &WM LEW a 0 to locate. I U ■ U Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0129 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 utilized.At this point the 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 sends a dirty trouble "End of Life"trouble automatically posts on the panel when the indication to the 3-CPU and posts a trouble condition. If mainte- CO sensor detection capability is exhausted. nance is still not performed the Signature detector will automati Remote test capability permits devices to be put in alarm, pre- cally remove itself from service once the programmed threshold alarm, supervisory, monitor, or security alarm, or trouble from the window has been breached(preventing a false alarm). panel menu or controls.This facilitates testing of smoke and heat When a detector includes carbon monoxide(CO)detection,the detectors as well as monitor and security devices. Fast test is also detector monitors its CO life remaining for the CO sensor element provided for CO detectors allowing these devices to be tested and provides this information automatically to the panel. For main- quickly in the field. tenance of the system the CO life remaining is also available by The 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 local rail modules modules are fully simply running a maintenance report at the panel or through the backwards compatible with the 3-SSDC and 3-SDDC local rail FireWorks graphical interface.A unique CO maintenance signal is automatically generated by the panel when there is 8%(several modules.3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 modules provide additional months)of CO element life remaining. Should the CO sensor ele- onboard memory to facilitate future Synergy functions.To upgrade a ment not be replaced after the maintenance signal is reported, an 3-SSDC/3-SDDC to a 3-SSDC1/3-SDDC1 respectively, replace the 3-SSDC/3-SDDC Local Rail Module with a 3-SDDC1-MB Local Rail Module and reuse the 3-SDC Signature Device Cards and filters. Specifications (Signature Circuits) Charts assume wire and devices are evenly distributed over length of circuit Non-twisted,non shielded wire Device type #of Detectors #of Module #14 AWG(20pf/foot) #16 AWG(20pf/foot) #18 AWG(20pf/foot) Addresses (2.53 Ohm/1000ft) (4.02 Ohm/1000ft) (6.38 Ohm/1000ft) Detectors only 125 0 14,752 feet 9,275 feet 5,839 feet (4,497 meters) (2,827 meters) (1,780 meters) Modules only 0 125 12,599 feet(3,840 7,921 feet(2,414 4,986 feet meters) meters) (1,520 meters) Detectors and Modules 125 125 5,738 feet 3,608 feet 2,271 feet (1,749 meters) (1,100 meters) (692 meters) Detectors and Modules 63 55+9 SIGA UM 7,623 feet 4,793 feet 3,017 feet with 2-wire smokes (2,324 meters) (1,461 meters) (920 meters) Modules 0 107+9 SIGA UM 3,798 feet 2,388 feet 1,503 feet with 2-wire smokes (1,158 meters) (728 meters) (458 meters) Twisted pair non shielded wire #14 AWG 1.5mm2 #16 AWG 1.0mm2 #18 AWG Device Type #of Detectors #of Module (38pf/foot) (36pf/foot) (36pf/foot) (25pf/foot) (25pf/foot) Addresses (2.53 (3.75 (4.02 (5.51 (6.38 Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Ohm/1000ft) Detectors only 125 0 13,157 feet 9,933 feet 9,275 feet 6,760 feet 5,839 feet (4,010 m) (3,028 m) (2,827 m) (2,061 m) (1,780 m) Modules Only 0 125 12,599 feet 8,483 feet 7,921 feet 5,774 feet 4,986 feet (3,840 m) (2,586 m) (2,414 m) (1,760 m) (1,520 m) Detectors 5,738 feet 3,864 feet 3,608 feet 2,630 feet 2,271 feet &Modules 125 125 (1,749 m) (1,178 m) (1,100 m) (802 m) (692 m) Detectors and 7,623 feet 5,133 feet 4,793 feet 3,494 feet 3,017 feet modules with 63 55+9 SIGA UM (2,324 m) (1,565 m) (1,461 m) (1,065 m) (920 m) 2-wire smokes Modules with 107+9 SIGA- 3,798 feet 2,558 feet 2,388 feet 1,741 feet 1,503 feet 2-wire smokes 0 UM (1,158 m) (780 m) (728 m) (531 m) (458 m) Twisted pair shielded wire Device Type #of Detectors #of Module #14 AWG(84pf/foot) #16 AWG(82pf/foot) #18 AWG(58pf/foot) Addresses (2.53 Ohm/1,000ft) (4.02 Ohm/1,000ft) (6.38 Ohm/1,000ft) • Detectors only 125 0 5,952 feet 6,098 feet 5,839 feet (1,814 meters) (1,859 meters) (1,780 meters) Modules Only 0 125 5,952 feet 6,098 feet 4,986 feet (1,814 meters) (1,859 meters) (1,520 meters) Detectors&Modules 125 125 5,738 feet 3,608 feet 2,271 feet (1,749 meters) (1,100 meters) (692 meters) Detectors and modules 63 55+9 SIGA UM 5,952 feet 4,793 feet 3,017 feet with 2-wire smokes (1,814 meters) (1,461 meters) (920 meters) Modules with 2-wire 0 107+9 SIGA UM 2,558 feet 2,388 feet 1,503 feet smokes (780 meters) (728 meters) (458 meters) Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0129 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Engineering Specification It must be possible to wire the circuit as The communication format between the Class A or Class B with non-shielded, non- TOWARDS on- ��WAR D S twisted wire. It must be possible to wire control panel and analog devices shall be branches(T-taps)with Class B wiring. A UTC Fire&Security Company 100%digital. The driver controller must be manufactured Detection&alarm since 1872 Loop alarm recognition must be within in accordance with ISO 9001 standards. 750 milliseconds of a device going into the u.s. alarm state,with system response time no The system must have tolerance to mul- T 888 378 2329 ti le failures.There must be a standalone F 866 503 3996 greater than 3 seconds.All devices shall tip le remote testing. mode of operation that will ensure the Canada system is aware of alarms even if the local Chubb Edwards rail or main CPU fails. T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Specifications (controllers) Southeast Asia Catalog Number I 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 T:+65 6391 9300 Installation 1 LRM Space 1 LRM Space F:+65 6391 9306 1 Addressable circuit(3-SDC1 2 Addressable circuits Module Configuration Card) expandable to 2 circuits. (3-SDC1 Cards) India T:+91 80 4344 2000 Operating Current[Note 2] Standby 144 mA Alarm 204 mA Standby 264 mA Alarm 336 mA F:+91 80 4344 2050 Operating Voltage 24 Vdc,Nominal Address Requirements Automatic Australia Detectors Supported 125 per 3-SDC1 Card T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Modules Supported 125 Module Addresses per 3-SDC1 Card 2-Wire Smoke Power Output 100 mA per 3-SDC1 Card(not included in Operating Current above Europe Conventional detectors T+32 2 725 11 20 supported 150 of 100 pA type per circuit. F+32 2 721 86 13 Signature Circuit Voltage 20 VDC+/-5% Latin America Maximum Signature Circuit 100 Ohms T 305 593 4301 Resistance F 305 593 4300 Maximum Signature Circuit utcfi reandsecu rity.com Capacitance 0.33 pF Communications Format 100%Digital ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Circuit Wiring Styles Class A or Class B All rights reserved. Termination Removable plug-in terminal strip(s)on module Permissable Wire Size 18 to 12 AWG(0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Agency Listings UL,ULC,CE(see Note 1),LPCB EN54(see Note 3). Operating Environment 32°F(0°C)to 120°F(49°C)93%RH,non-condensing Note 1:Other EST3 components are modularly listed under the following standards: UL 864 categories:UOJZ,UOXX,UUKL and SYZV,UL 294 category ALVY,UL 609 category AOTX,UL 636 category ANET,UL 1076 category APOU,UL 365 category APAW,UL 1610 category AMCX,UL 1635 category AMCX ULC-S527,ULC-S301,ULC-S302,ULC-S303,ULC-S306,ULC/ORD-C1076,ULC/ORD-C693 Please refer to EST3 Installation and Service Manual for complete system requirements. Note 2:Current shown Includes full loop of devices. Note 3:EN54-2:1997+A1:2006 and EN54-4:1997+2002+A2:2006 (verify device and loop controller compatibility) Ordering Information Catalog Description Shipping Number Wt.lb(kg) 3-SSDC1 Single Signature Driver Controller.Comes with one 3-SDC1 Device Card. 0.5(0.23) Mounts to Local Rail.Add suffex"-E"for EN54 complient versions. 3-SDDC1 Dual Signature Driver Controller.Comes with two 3-SDC1 s. 0.5(0.23) Mounts to Local Rail.Add suffex"-E"for EN54 complient versions. 3-SDC1 Signature Device Card-upgrades a 3-SSDC1 to a 3-SDDC1 0.25(0.11) 3-FP Filler Plate,order separately when no LED or LED/Switch module installed. 0.1 (0.05) a 9 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0129 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform T.-8T TTM Life Safety & Communications Audio and - . .. . a e Telephone1 -. . t. ...e�.,. ....e�: J co Masters �E 3-ASU series o Overview Standard Features The efficient EST3 audio system provides for intuitive local and • Eight channels for audio source selection remote audio control for Mass Notification/Emergency Com • Audio data to remote EST3 panels with amplifiers can be munications(MNEC), Life Safety and other approved uses. EST3 transmitted over twisted copper wires or fiber optic cables(see audio builds from standard modules that fit together easily.Audio Data Sheet 85010-0131 for details on EST3 fiber optic corn- components use standard EST3 cabinets and power supplies. munications) Taking full advantage of digital technology, up to eight channels • Listed for Mass Notification/Emergency Communications of audio sources transmit over a single twisted pair of wires or fiber optic cables between nodes.Coupling the inherent reliability • UL2572 as CCS or ACU or LOC. and performance of zoned amplifiers with EST3 simplified user • Auxiliary audio input interface for campus paging,telephone interfaces makes audio system design and operation easy and interface,etc. dependable. • Single fiber optic filament or one twisted pair of wires between The 3-ASU is seamlessly integrated into an EST3 system to pro- nodes vide for a rugged and reliable communications package that can be configured for Mass Notification/Emergency Communication • VU display shows paging output level (MNEC), as well as fire alarm and other emergency functions.The • Ready-to-page LED 3-ASU audio source unit supports eight channels of clear digital • audio that is easily distributed to panels containing 3-ZA rail ampli Digital transmission of audio signals - fiers.The 3-ASU supports digital storage and playback of pre- greater noise immunity recorded messages as well as live paging.The optional 3-FTCU - high quality signal transmission provides a unique, space-saving and easy-to-operate control point • On board storage of programmed messages and tones for dedicated emergency/firefighter two-way telephones. • Optional LCD display of fire phone calls • Optional earthquake hardening: OSHPD seismic pre-approval for component Importance Factor 1.5 Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0063 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 Application All Call Minus selects all amplifiers not programmed for alarm signaling for page delivery(typically stairwells). EST3 audio is accomplished by selecting modular components for installation in standard fire alarm cabinet assemblies.At the main Page by Phone selects the telephone voice line as the paging control panel location mounting audio control equipment provides source. an emergency user interface for"Paging"and optionally a"Fire Operating the Microphone Talk Key stops alarm signaling to se- fighters Master Telephone".Zoned amplifiers mount in the main lected zones and starts pre announce tone delivery. control panel and/or in remote nodes. By mounting amplifiers in remote nodes,wire runs and space requirements are reduced at When the pre-announce tone finishes,the Ready to Page LED turns the main control panel. on. The heart of the EST3 audio package is the Audio Source Unit When system design calls for paging with Firefighters telephone (ASU).The Audio Source unit converts analog signals to digital the 3-ASU/FT provides all the paging features of the 3-ASU series signals. On board audio memory stores signal tones and/or alarm- with the added benefit of a master handset assembly.The 3-ASU/ alert verbal messages. FT brings to the emergency user easy to understand switches These digitally stored messages can be recorded onsite using and text messages displaying on a backlit 8 x 20 character LCD standard PC audio components or downloaded from a library display. of pre-recorded messages and tones. Messages can be in any language or combination of languages.The ASU comes standard with two minutes of memory for tone and message storage.Avail Firefighters telephone able message memory expands easily to 100 minutes with the CONNECT switch selects phone optional 3-ASUMX/100 memory expansion card. circuits shown in the Calls Pending Audio Source units support connection of a local microphone, ' F= ,' -u-,' U Window. remote microphone,telephone voice line, and Mass Notification/ oa;, E„,.� REVIEW PENDING stops auto- Emergency Communication(MNEC)audio feed.With eight audio matic display of pending calls and channels to choose from combinations of paging,alert, evacuation -o, allows the operator to step through signaling and automatic messages are available for simultaneous ( 1 each message at his own pace. delivery to different parts of a building or to different buildings. 5. ° ACK(acknowledge)silences the There are two main audio user interface modules:the paging P.1. telephone systems audible signal. microphone, and the firefighter's telephone,which supports three- The signal resounds for any new state and four-state firefighter telephones.Available individually or call. in a set, EST3 audio modules open system design possibilities. DISCONNECT disconnects the highlighted call in the calls con- When the Life Safety system requires paging only the 3-ASU or nected list. 3-ASU/4 Audio Source Units provides a Master Paging micro- phone with common controls. Switch labeling makes the opera- REVIEW CONNECTED scrolls a reverse highlight through the tion intuitive. Six LEDs and five switches cover paging operations. calls connected list. Three of the five paging switches,All Call, Page to Evacuation, and Page to Alert, cover most paging operations.A VU display shows the user the output level of the page in process.The 3-ASU 0 CALLS PENDING The Firefighters telephone LCD is very series mount in one chassis space of a EST3 Lobby enclosure. similar to the 3-LCD. When there is no In addition to the paging microphone the 3-ASU/4 has mounting E A E R G E N C S TELEPHONE active telephone calls the LCD shows space for up to four local rail modules, including 20,40,and 95 a title screen.Active calls display a text watt zone amplifiers and up to four Control Display modules allow- message referenc-ing the remote ing layout flexibility. The 3-ASU provides the same functionality as UNIT. OK phone location. the 3-ASU/4 but is supplied with an inner door filler plate and no , CR L L S PENDING local rail module spaces. FIRST S R S E PI n Ec CONNECTED V LEVEL When a remote handset is lifted the LCD display updates to show the calls pending and the call-in signal sounds to alert the user of a pending call. Paging Microphone D C R L L S PENDING The user answers the call by press- If Ready-to-Page LED turns on after the CALLS CORRECTED I �: 0 = pre announce tone has finished indicating the FIRST B R S E N E N T LEVEL ing the Connect switch. The location message moves from the pending system is ready to page. line to the connected line.The call in .. .I Erol I 400.01 All Call selects all amplifiers for page signal silences.The user simply uses hlll. 1 delivery. CR L L S PENDING the master telephone to talk with the iENGINEERING OFFICE connected telephone. 1471 01 I CRLLS CONNECTED PagetoEVAC selects allamplifiers cur i FIRST BRSEIOENT LEVEL EL I,MGs If another call comes in the location 1.11=11 rently delivering evacuation signaling for message appears in the calls pending delivery. line and audible signal resounds.The ',,,j ... ,, Page to ALERT selects all amplifiers user can silence the signal by answer- currently delivering alert signaling for page ing the call or by pressing the ACK(acknowledge)switch. delivery. Up to five remote telephone handset assemblies connect to the system simultaneously without any degradation of audio quality. Page 2 of 4 DATA Si.,, , 85010-0063 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 Installation and Mounting Typical Wiring Typical Fire Fighters Telephone Circuit ULI/ULC Listed I®I' 47K ohm EOL Resistor _1 i V - I� Twisted Shielded Pair �I 0 `- if run with other wiring Sr;I O. roan 111,..2.1O'.^^I= e Z rl�l rm`ZaZaZZaZ�Z�`�`7�7s7 —.-==--11-. To SI nature ir�1 I I Data Circuit r1°n I!II!I�II!III I!I!I!I 1 T Phones �® GI1I1Is 111111:Jr■1=1 InL�f - • --f, - �® - NC C NO NO C NIA NC NO C NC1 I aCu .es TROUBLE ALARM SUP e z, Connect to T61 on 3-CPU3 Module 1 I .a a I 3-ASU/4 has Chassis,Audio Source Unit, To next panel MAIN PROCESSOR MODULE I To Signature Paging Common Control and rail space 3-CPU Module 3-CPU3 1 I Data Circuit for four Local Rail Modules. Mounts in + + W i► Telephone Riser Twisted Shielded Pair lobby enclosure. p° ii cc ,Ameeeeeeeeee - Connect Shield to 0 1 I =Earth Ground only 1111111 I I I at the panel. Maintain ::: shield continuity. [i}••• 'moi 'a '°' V u a z�_iiIJ I I Dashed Wires Required J +p -.° o ■=•■ �1 for Class'A'Wiring Only •== Audio Source Unit I Audio Fire <:% z I + 3-ASU r Source Phone RAIL --3-ASUFT • Card Card CARD •O ¢ +- Control Panel From previous panel • 3-CPU Module Mass Notification •• Key-Out • J' 10 • 3-REMICA ICA e �` or .p ® Audio Out 3-3REMICP ��� � I (Shielded) • o- To CPU Module • • 'a ❑_ TB2-Audio A IN y MI MN-FVPN or AUX ttl Input(1V)for Remote /i'� / Paging from UL listed - r compatible Fire or MNEC 00000000000000 system. 3-ASU/FT has Chassis Assembly/w 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Audio Source Unit, Paging Common ASU TB1 Audio Data Telephone Page Remote Mic—\ Aux Control and Fire Phone Controls Primary Secondary Out Key Audio Engineering Specification The audio system shall provide eight simultaneous and distinct System amplifiers must be distributed zoned type. Centrally banked audio channels.These shall consist of a minimum of: Local Page, systems are not acceptable.The circuit must carry a minimum rating Emergency Communication, Multiple Evacuation,Alert,Auxiliary, of 3.5 Amps for operating 24 Vdc signals. and General Signaling.Channels shall support hierarchical opera- The system shall provide fully integrated fire fighters'telephone tion and be controllable from system programming.The audio system that shall provide 2-way communication between the fire system also provides Elevator, Stairwell and Auxiliary signaling. alarm control panel and any fire fighters'telephone station. «The Systems that cause signaling devices to go silent while performing Audio Source Unit and Firefighters Telephone shall be installed so any signaling functions will not be accepted. that a seismic component Importance Factor of 1.5 is achieved.» The system must provide operation to 25Vrms or 70.7Vrms speak- The system shall include an alphanumeric user display and controls. ers. The system must provide as a minimum the following paging When a telephone is activated,a call-in buzzer shall sound,and the common controls and indicators: Ready to page LED,VU display of location of the phone shall be shown on the alphanumeric display. paging output level,single switch function for paging to all —Alert The display shall be capable of bilingual operation,displaying Eng- zones,Evacuation zones,and areas not programmed for signaling. lish, Dutch, Finnish, French,German, Italian, Portuguese or Spanish The system must provide high quality analog to digital conversion messages. of paging sources. Digital transmission of paging must be provided The incoming call shall be selected by activating a single button.All between system nodes.The analog sources must be sampled and subsequent telephone call locations shall be displayed in full text. converted to digital with a sampling rate no less than 9600 samples The system shall display all incoming calls,all connected phone(s) per second. It must be possible to transmit signal sources(Alert, on the alphanumeric display.The system shall be configured so that Alarm, Page,etc.)together over a single pair of wires between nodes. page messages may be issued from any firefighter's telephone con- nected to the system,as directed by the emergency operator. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0063 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 Specifications TOWARDS Catalog 3-ASU 3-ASU/4 3-ASU/FT 3-FTCU Number A UTC Fire&Security Company Agency Listings UL,ULC,CE Detection&alarm since 1872 Ambient Temp. 0°C-49°C(32°F-120°F) Ambient Humidity 93%Non-condensing @ 32°C u.S. Mounting One Chassis Space T 888-378-2329 Network Data Riser-18-12AWG F 866-503-3996 (1.0-2.5mm2)(3-ASU/FT only) Canada Network Data Riser-One pair twisted Chubb Edwards 18-12AWG(1.0mm2-2.5mm2) Network Audio Riser-18-12AWG T 519 376 2430 Wire Size (1.0-2.5mm2)(3-ASU/FT only) F 519 376 7258 Network Audio Riser-One pair twisted 18-12AWG(1.0mm2-2.5mm2) Telephone Riser-One pair twisted Southeast Asia shielded 18-14 AWG T:+65 6391 9300 (1.0mm2 to 1.5mm2) F:+65 6391 9306 112 mA 32 mA Current Rating 80 mA in Alarm and Supervisory Supervisory and Supervisory and India Alarm Alarm T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Local Microphone(isolated and Local microphone(isolated and supervised);Remote Microphone supervised);Remote microphone Australia Audio Inputs (isolated and supervised); (isolated and supervised);Firefighters' T+61 3 9239 1200 OneMNEC audioinput. telephone(isolated and supervised; F+61 392391299One MNEC audio input. Europe Pre-recorded Two minutes standard expandable to 100 minutes T+32 2 725 11 20 Message Storage with optional 3-ASUMX/100.Max.message length 40 N/A F+32 2 721 86 13 seconds. Supported 255 N/A Latin America Message Count T 305 593 4301 Auxiliary Input F 305 593 4300 impedance 1K Ohm N/A utcfireandsecurity.com Bilingual Support English, Dutch,Finnish, French,German,Italian,Portuguese,Spanish ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Telephone Riser All rights reserved. Active N/A Five Maximum Telephones Wire size vN/A One pair twisted shielded 18-14 AWG (1.0mm2 tol.5mm2) Line Resistance N/A 50 Ohm EOL Resistance N/A 15K Ohm Ordering Information Catalog Ship Number Description Wt.lb. (kg) 3-ASU/FT' Audio Source Unit with Local Microphone and Firefighters Telephone. 20(9.1) 3-ASU/4 Audio Source Unit w/Local Microphone.Provides four local rail spaces. 15(6.8) 3-ASU' Audio Source Unit w/Local Microphone. Inner door filler plate 15(6.8) 3-FTCU' Firefighters Telephone Control Unit inner door filler plate. 15(6.8) 3 ASUMX/100 Audio Source Unit Memory Expansion.Provides 100 minutes of 0.5(.23) message time. 3-FTEQ Seismic hardening kit for 3-ASU/FT or 3-FTCU telephone handset 2 RFK1 Ferrite Clamp Kit required for EN-54 compliance .25(.11) 3-LKE UK English Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKF French Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKR Russian Label Kit .25(.11) 3-LKS Spanish Label Kit .25(.11) 1.Add"-CC"for City of Chicago 2.For earthquake anchorage,including detailed mounting weights and center of gravity detail,please refer to Seismic Application Guide 3101676.Approval of panel anchorage to site structure may require local AHJ, structural,or civil engineer review. 0 Page 4 of 4 DATA S 85010-0063 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 EST Catalog►EST3 Life Safety Platform ESTrM )111PILife Safety & Communications CIO • IP • • • • • Zoned Audio 4• �.. • Amplifiers :, !, . • : 3-ZA20A, 3-ZA20B, :3w 3-ZA40A, 3-ZA40B, 3-ZA95 CE 0. • r- 3-ZA95 shown Overview Standard Features The EST3 audio amplifiers take full advantage of proven digital • Three Sizes Available technology to deliver highly intelligible voice audio for evacua- -20 Watts tion and Mass Notification/Emergency Communication(MNEC) -40 Watts purposes. Digital messages generated by the Audio Source -95 Watts Unit(ASU)and live paging messages are multiplexed into eight • Simultaneous eight channel digital audio separate channels transmitted over fiber optic cable or a single -Superior sound quality twisted pair of wires. Each zoned amplifier contains integrated de- - Each amplifier does it's own decoding multiplexing circuitry that allows any one of the eight digital audio channels to place messages or signals on the amplifier's built-in • Speaker circuit built into amplifier speaker circuit. -Selectable for 70 or 25 VRMS output -Class A(Style Z)or Class B(Style Y)output models available Audio channel selection is network software controlled, and - Power limited audio amplifiers mount in the same enclosures as other EST3 equipment. Power for the amplifiers comes from standard sys- • 3.5 amp 24 Vdc notification appliance circuit tem power supplies through the local rail. Field wiring connects on 20 and 40 watt amplifiers to removable terminal blocks on the amplifier module.Amplifiers -Class A(Style Z)or Class B(Style Y)output models available support either 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS power limited speaker circuits. - Power limited For visual signaling, each 20 or 40 watt amplifier comes standard • Network software control of channel selection with one 24 Vdc power limited Notification Appliance Circuit. • Integral backup tone generator - 1 KHz temporal(3-3-3)tone evac Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0057 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Application EST3 zoned amplifier configurations offer improved reliability and performance. Configuration provides improved survivability in the Dual _I I_ Distributed Bank Zoned event of wiring faults that result in a loss of signaling. In the exam- central Amplifiers ple shown in the diagram, a fault on the system using a central backed-up amplifier disables multiple signal/page circuits, and the —I I- standby amplifier is not able to bypass the fault.With EST3,the same fault removes the Audio Source Unit riser. Central Zoned I 1— Page Amplifier Amplifiers A //n�� Alert Short on Riser Short on Riser / \ Evacuation disables all disables signal / \ Auxiliary circuits sourcePage Stairwell Alert Elevator Standby Amplifiers Evacuation Environmental are local in nodes Emergency Standby Evacuation Tone at each Amplifier For example,with an alarm on Floor Eight,the following automatic message instructions could be given concurrently. Note:A Page could also be sent to any other location in the building—without interrupting any of the messages below. FLOOR 9 HEARS: "A fire alarm has been reported on the floor Because all EST3 zoned amplifiers have an integrated backup below. Please evacuate using the stairwell." 1000 Hz temporal tone generator,the locally-generated alarm FLOOR 8 HEARS: "A fire alarm has been reported on this floor. tones notify occupants of a hazard—even with the primary riser Please evacuate using the stairwell." out of commission.The backup tone also operates if the ASU or the audio distribution system fails.To further enhance system OTHER FLOORS HEAR:"An emergency has been reported on survivability, a single standby amplifier can backup any zoned floor 8. Please remain in the building and await further instruc- amplifier in the same cabinet. tions." Zoned amplifiers can be housed in remote cabinets close to the ELEVATOR: "A fire alarm has been reported in the building.The speakers.This minimizes the voltage drop between the amplifier elevator is being returned to the ground floor for emergency use. and the load, and permits the use of a smaller wire size than is Please evacuate the building." possible with centrally located amplification systems. STAIRWELLS:"Please remain calm and walk down the stairs to EST3 easily outperforms banked audio systems with its ability to evacuate the building in a safe manner." simultaneously deliver up to eight different signals.When using In addition to robust paging, EST3 provides UL listed Mass centrally banked amplifiers, paging and alert channels typically Notification/Emergency Communication(MNEC),which overrides share a common amplifier. Consequently,when paging,the alert fire alarm functions.This capability allows emergency response signal goes silent in all alerted areas when a Page is issued.At commanders to advise building occupants of the safest action to the end of the Page,the alert signal resumes in the alert area, take while an emergency is unfolding. Occupants can be in- which could cause confusion because occupants did not receive the page message and do not know why the Page stopped and structed to leave, relocate, or seek immediate shelter, depending restarted. on the situation.This provides the flexibility for communications to mesh with the facility's risk analysis needs — without the risk of an With EST3, simultaneous page,alert, and evacuation signal capa- unexpected fire alarm or general evacuation signal interfering with bility is engineered into the system.With eight channels to choose established emergency response protocols. from, dedicated messages can be delivered to stairwells, elevator cabs, etc.while alert, evacuation,and page instructions are simul- taneously being sent to the rest of the building.The eight audio channels allow messages to be automatically routed, and provide specific instructions based on the alarm's location. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEE 85010-0057 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Engineering Specification Typical Wiring The audio system shall provide eight simultaneous and distinct VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT yF° audio channels.These shall consist of a minimum of: Local Page, Notavallableon3-ZA95 ;i aw;uare°R�o, Emergency Communication, Multiple Evacuation,Alert,Auxiliary, r COMMON ENCLOSURE ISNW EOL _ to amplifier PI and General Signaling.Channels shall support hierarchical opera- I F Na nngitlen1i° OfiO�OO�OIi ®®®®®®9EIi7� fiOO®99900 fiOfiOOOliOlifi tion and be controllable from system programming.The audio I `\oo"""% ‘ -------", --------j ,'--------j system also provides Elevator, Stairwell and Auxiliary signaling. I T°a'°°tea"m a'� "°�" ^ AUDIO° AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO Systems that cause signaling devices to go silent while performing I AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER any signaling functions will not be accepted. I MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE (Backup) (WNE.,) (Zone#2) (Zone#3) The audio system zoned amplifiers must be able to operate 25 I VRMS or 70 VRMS speakers.The amplifier output must be power °_ I ,,,,,.,eeee�,,., .;.��,�„eeea,,.� ,�.�,��,�eeee�e �eeeeeeeee limited,and wired in a<Class A(Style Z)><Class B(Style Y)> I Ili -`-Ii- II- m --' .� configuration.The amplifiers shall provide an integral backup 1000 I °. ro,a,e„w„e p.«, K- KHz temporal tone generator which shall operate in the event Lee signal primary audio signals are lost and the amplifier is instructedEl * IliaHI to broadcast alarm information. It shall be possible to backup Speaker VlsualNOOOOIo EOLReaismr `"'”"rt°°°'” Appliance multiple zoned amplifiers with a common backup amplifier. AUDIO NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT Specifications 3-ZA20A 3-ZA20B 3-ZA40A I 3-ZA40B I 3-ZA95 Agency Listing UL,ULC,CE Environmental 0°C-49°C (32°F-120°F)93% RH,Non-condensing Frequency Response 400Hz to 4KHz(4)+/-3dB Output Voltage 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS THD(distortion) <7% Wire Size 18 to 12 AWG(1.0 to 2.5 mm2) Internal Tone 1 KHz Temporal(3-3-3)Tone(evacuation);20 PPM(alert) Generator SIGA-CC1/2 Support 10 Units,Maximum Standby Current 62mA for 20 and 40 watt amps; 64mA for the 3-ZA95 watt amp Alarm Current 1120mA 1120mA 2480mA 2480mA 5540mA Pwr.Ltd.Audio Output Class A or B Class B(Style Y) Class A or B Class B(Style Y) Class A or B Wiring Configuration (Style Z or Y) 15K Ohms (Style Z or Y) 15K Ohms (Style Z or Y) EOL Resistor 15K Ohms in Class B 15K Ohms in Class B 15K Ohms in Class B Pwr.Ltd.24 Vdc NAC Class A or B Class B Class A or B Class B Wiring Configuration (Style Z or Y) (Style Y) (Style Z or Y) (Style Y) Line Resistance,Max.” 50 Ohms,Max. 50 Ohms,Max. 50 Ohms,Max. 50 Ohms,Max. N/A EOL Resistor Line N/A 15 K Ohms N/A 15K Ohms Capacitance,Max 0.33pF 0.33pF 0.33pF 0.33pF Space Requirements 1 LRM Space 2 LRM Spaces Maximum Speaker Circuit Distance at 0.5 dB loss* 70 VRMS Output 3-ZA20A I 3-ZA20B 3-ZA40A I 3-ZA40B 3-ZA95 #12 AWG 4,536 ft(1,382 m) 2,268 ft(691 m) 955 ft(290 m) (3.2 Ohm/1000 ft pair) #14 AWG 2,792 ft(850 m) 1,396 ft(425 m) 588 ft(179 m) (5.2 Ohm/1000 ft pair) #16 AWG 1,815 ft(553 m) 907 ft(276 m) 382 ft(116 m) (8.0 Ohm/1000 ft pair) #18 AWG 1,117 ft(340 m) 558 ft(170 m) 235 ft(71 m) (13 Ohm/1000 ft pair) 25 VRMS Output 3-ZA20A I 3-ZA20B 3-ZA40A I 3-ZA40B 3-ZA95 #12 AWG 579 ft(176 m) 289 ft(88 m) 122 ft(37 m) (3.2 Ohm/1000 ft pair) #14 AWG 356 ft(108 m) 178 ft(54 m) 75 ft(22 m) (5.2 Ohm/1000 ft pair) #16 AWG 231 ft(70 m) 116 ft(35 m) 49 ft(14 m) (8.0 Ohm/1000 ft pair) #18 AWG 142 ft(43 m) 71 ft(21 m) Not supported (13 Ohm/1000 ft pair) by 18 AWG "Refer to product manual for wire run calculations. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0057 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Ordering Information TOWARDS Catalog Number Description Ship k t.,lb. ( g) A UTC Fire&Security Company 20 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class NB(Style Z/Y) 3 ZA20A Audio&Class NB(Style Z/Y)24 VDC outputs 1.55(0.7) Detection&alarm since 1872 3 ZA20B 20 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class B(Style Y) 1.55(0.7) u.S. Audio&Class B(Style Y)24 VDC outputs T 888-378-2329 40 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class NB(Style Z/Y) F 866-503-3996 3 ZA40A Audio&Class NB(Style Z/Y)24 VDC outputs 1.55(0.7) Canada 3 ZA40B 40 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class B(Style Y) 1.55(0.7) Chubb Edwards Audio&Class B(Style Y)24 VDC outputs T 519 376 2430 3 ZA95 95 Watt Zoned Amplifier w/Class NB(Style Z/Y)Audio 3.0(1.5) F 519 376 7258 output Southeast Asia 3 FP Filler Plate,order separately one required per amplifier when 0.1 (0.05) T:+65 6391 9300 no LED or LED/Switch module installed on operator layer. F:+65 6391 9306 India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi reandsecu rity.com ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 Page4of4 DATA SHEE 85010-0057 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 EST Catalog► EST3 Life Safety Platform ESTrM )1111/Life Safety & Communications CO Control Display re Modules ® (Pa moo , 3-LDSM, 3-24x series, 3-1 2)o< series, ® �E 3-6/351 xxx series ro � �D[1111 � is �.� - Overview Standard Features The EST3 Control Display modules provide the emergency user • Programmable LED flash rates with the simplest of interfaces, lights and switch control.The Con- • Membrane style tactile pushbuttons trol Display modules install over local rail modules.The local rail modules supply the power and drivers via a ribbon cable connec- • Software supported for toggle,and latching interlock switch action tion to the control display modules.The displays mount over any • Slide in labels local rail module maximizing the flexibility of design layout.When a display module is required where no local rail module exists, • Lamp test an LED Display Support Module 3-LDSM mounts to the local rail providing support for one Control Display Module. Surface mount technology used to minimize space, also reduces the power requirements of display modules. Slide-in labels keep the control display modules flexible and allow labeling for local languages. Module lamp test can be programmed to any spare control switch or a local node lamp test is initiated by simultaneously operating the Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches on the 3-CPU. Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0055 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Application Notes or"Off." Programming of the switches to multiple relays keeps operational design choices open.The user returns the system Control Display Modules come in a variety of types providing op- control of the remote device to the Life Safety system by simply erational flexibility.There are five types of display modules available pressing Auto.The Auto LED programs to its related switch and with EST3. gives positive feed back to the user by turning on yellow when the Typically alarm zone annunciation appears on any of the first four system has active control of remote devices. module types shown.The first module supports simple zone Individual switch LEDs are also programmable.As an example the annunciation;the second,zone annunciation with zone disable; "Open"or"On" LED(green)could program to follow its related the third,alarm and trouble zone annunciation,the fourth alarm switch or, program to follow a remote monitor input and provide and trouble zone annunciation with zone disable. From a simple positive feedback of the remote devices control status. If budget one LED annunciation point to higher functionality, EST3 fills the restrictions prevent"sail type"positive feedback, EST's unique requirements. command processing satisfy requirements for positive feedback of Simple Control Examples The fifth module is very adaptable HVAC control systems.Any switch command will send a signal to / \ to system requirements for audio the 3-CPU for processing.While in this state the LED associated ❑ ON F or remote equipment control. with the switch will flash. Once the command has been received a Each module contains 18 LEDs by a remote Signature Series Module,the module(since it is n and 18 switches. Each group of intelligent with its own microprocessor)will issue a"Processed" ❑ AUTO three switches has a latching- command back to the 3-CPU which will latch the LED associ- # interlock to support operations ated with the switch "ON"steady.This same process is used for ❑ OFF 5 that must be kept separated.The all audio speaker selections ensuring the circuit is connected.A ) interlock is under software control variety of switch and associated LED colors are available to meet • the demands of the specifiers application. only one switch is active at a p given time. EST3 software makes Life Safety Systems are generally passive requiring only occasional ❑ OPEN meeting the wide variety of ap operation.Yet, in an emergency the user must be able to identify plications needed with today's system operation and status quickly and easily. LCD displays are codes and building system opera - Damper excellent for identifying specific information, but even a large LCD ❑ AUTO tions easy. 5th Fir can not display overall "system"status as effectively as LEDs and Switches.The EST3 Control Display modules are designed to pro- vide❑ CLOSE simple identification and operation of system functions for the For fan control the emergency emergency user.They provide positive feedback of control activity user assumes control of the with unrivaled selection of display configurations and mounting remote device by selecting "On" location options. Installation and Mounting Engineering Specification Display The Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm, - Supervisory,Trouble and Monitor operations. Annunciation must be through the use of LED display strips complete with a means to °44' custom label each LED as to its function.Where applicable control of remote smoke control devices must be made available at the L control center. Switches with LEDs must provide positive feed fLz:'''' w," back to the operator of remote equipment status.Where voice au- , dio is required a means of paging individual zones must be made. ® ° The status of each paging zone must be annunciated. It must be R POI 1rill ❑I ) .10 oo possible to selectively page into specific zones. It shall be possible Label to manipulate the evacuation of the building from the main control Local Rail/ POI I SOI 1 to center. It must be possible for the emergency operator to put POI 1 SOI 1 °o specific zones into evacuation manually. Module POI I COI 1 °o POI I rill I °o POI I tOI I ..°..0 POI SOI I Oo POI I SOI I 0 POI I r❑I 1 00 POI I tOI I °❑ POI C❑I I 00 Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEE N 85010-0055 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Technical Specifications Catalog Number of Alarm LED Colors Switches Applications Number LEDs Current 3-LDSM N/A N/A N/A Provides interface for one Control Display Module 5 mA ,❑ Alarm Main Electrical ❑ Electrical Room ❑ Trouble Room 3-24R red Alarm Annunciation 3-24Y yellow Supervisory and Trouble Annunciation 2 mA base 3-24G 24 green 0 Monitor Annunciation +1.5 mA per 12 red over 12 Red LEDs Alarm Annunciation Yellow LEDs Supervisory active LED 3-12RY yellow pairs Annunciation /❑ \ /❑ EVAC \ /❑ SHELTER \ 5th Floor Message Message • / ♦ i 3-12SR red Alarm Annunciation with enable/disable operation 2 mA base 3-12SY 12 yellow 12 Supervisory Annunciation with enable/disable operation +1.5 mA per 3-12SG green Monitor Annunciation,Page select active LED /❑ \ /❑ EVAC \ /❑ AMBER ` 5th Floor ❑ ❑ Strobe ❑ Strobe • / ♦ / / 3-12/S1 GY 12 groups green/yellow Zone Page select with Trouble Annunciation 2 mA base 3-12/S1 RY of two w/ red/yellow 12 Alarm and Trouble Annunciation with enable/disable +1.5 mA per 3-12/S2Y switch yellow/yellow Supervisory and Trouble Annunciation with enable/disable active LED ' IIIf J ON ` / ❑f J OPEN D Trouble Trouble A 0^ AUTO RI J AUTO M Normal Normal P ❑[ JOFF o1 JCLOSE RE • / • / Green/Yellow 1 2 3 On-Auto-Off fan and Open-Auto-Close Damper Control with 2mA base 3-4/3SGYWR 4 LEDs and White/Red switches Trouble and Normal LED indicators +1.5mA per active LED ❑• ALERT 5th ❑ ON A ❑ OPEN D F H A ❑ PAGE L ❑ AUTO u ❑ AUTO M 0 P 1=1 EVAC R ❑ OFF #4 ❑CLOSE R N / \ / N / green/yellow/ 3-6/351 G2Y Six On-Auto-Off fan and Open-Auto-Close Damper Control 2 mA base 6 groups of yellow groups of +1.5 mA per 3-6/351 GYR 3 w/switch green eydellow/ three Page and Evacuation select with zone trouble active LED Notes: 1) All Control Display Modules are UL and ULC listed. 2) All Control Display Modules mount over one Local Rail Module. If no local rail module exists the 3-LDSM mounts to local rail and supports one control display module. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0055 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Ordering Information TO WA R D S Catalog Shipping Number Description Weight A UTC Fire&Security Company 0.451b 3-LDSM LED Display Support Module Detection&alarm since 1872 (.2kg) 3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module u.S. 3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module T 888-378-2329 3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module F 866-503-3996 3-12SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module Canada 3-12SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module Chubb Edwards 3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module T 519 376 2430 3-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module F 519 376 7258 12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch Display/ 3-12/Si GY Control Asia Module T:+65 6391 9300 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch Display/ 0.351b F:+65 6391 9306 3-12/S1 RY Control Module (.12kg) India 3 12/S2Y 12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch Display/Control T:+91 80 4344 2000 Module F:+91 80 4344 2050 3 6/3S1 G2Y Six groups of three switches.Each switch with one LED.LEDs provided Green,Yellow,Yellow. Australia 12 switches in four groups of three switches,switch one with a green T+61 3 92391200 3-4/3SGYWR LED,switch two with yellow and white LEDs and switch three with a F+61 3 9239 1299 red LED Europe 3-6/3S1 GYR Six groups of three switches.Each switch with one LED.LEDs T+32 2 725 11 20 provided Green,Yellow,Red F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi reandsecu rity.com ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. C Page4of4 DATA SHEE 85010-0055 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 EST Catalog► EST3 Life Safety Platform ESTrM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications • • • • i , a a EST3 Remote T , __ o „ssa J o o Annunciators i = gIgE h] 0- _� 3—ANNCPU3, 3—LCDANN, 3-6ANN, o00 OE= 0 3-1 OANN 3—EVxxx, 3-4ANN o00 0 ® of c sr3 111111111 1 111 g • CE EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending Overview Application g optionsDisplay EST3 supports a full range of annunciator for Mass Use EST3 remote annunciators when a Notification/Emergency Communication(MNEC), Life Safety and compact system status display is need- other purposes.Annunciator cabinets are constructed from 16 ed.Annunciator configurations include: *1` 1 w gauge cold rolled steel.The gray textured enamel finish of the LCD only display, LED only displays or \ r.":°°' annunciators complements any decor. Both surface and semi- combination LED and LCD display in a � flush mounting cabinet configurations maximize mounting flexibility single enclosure. tt\ °' and esthetic appeal. Cabinet arrangements allow both LED and t�1\ LCD annunciation to easily combine in a single enclosure. Slide in The LCD display uses either the 3-LCD ,1� '' Label labeling for LEDs and switches provides designation flexibility for or 3-LCDXL1 Liquid crystal display mod / ule. The 3-LCD has a 128 x 64 graphi- labeling in local languages. For graphic annunciation EST3 offers Annunciator Support LED driver boards perfectly suited to operate in most graphic an- cal display typically used to display eight Module nunciators. lines of 21 characters on its LCD display while the 3-LCDXL1 has a larger 240 x 320 pixel backlit display EST3 annunciators are perfect for MNEC applications.They can that supports 24 lines of 40 characters. Both LDC displays pro- be used in Central Control Stations(CCS),Autonomous Control vide the room needed to convey emergency information in a useful Units(ACU), Local Operating Console(LOC)and combination format. units. In these applications, annunciators are configured to oper- The 3-LCD always displays the last highest priority event even ate as Local Operation Consoles,or even Central Command Sta- when the user is viewing other message queues.To give the tions,from which MNEC is initiated and controlled. greatest message flexibility EST3 event messages can route to specific annunciators. Routing can be initiated at a specific time/ Standard Features shift change. Messages need only display in areas having to • Standard 3-LCD(168 characters)and large-format 3-LCDXL1 respond to an event. (960 character)display options For LED display,the full line of EST3 Control/Display Modules • LCD uses queues to sort events support event display. Control/Display modules install over any• Variety of wallbox configurations an- nunciator support module maximizing annunciator design flexibility. A Lamptest feature can program to any spare control switch. If • Programmable LED flash rates an LCD display is installed in the annunciator, simply operate the • Slide in labels Alarm Silence and Trouble Silence switches simultaneously to Makes customization for regional language easy lamptest all LEDs. • Full line of driver boards for graphic annunciators Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0069 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Typical Wiring Graphic Annunciator Field Wiring Rear view 3-ANNCPU3 Field Wiring p 3-6AN N Shown RS-485 NETWORK DATA RS-485 NETWORK DATA FROM PREVIOUS PANEL TO NEXT PANEL Ground Lead TO BaCkbOX 24VDC FROM 3-PPS/M OR 3-BPS/M 24VDC TO NEXT POWER RISER Q I o POWER MODULE Z Q CD 0 Y Y cc O 0 _ > > ¢ 3 1— A Power limited ir N N a z z circuit Graphic Annunciator w +-+-� +-+- ®®®®®®®®® \o0 cccccc00 \ / ToTB1 on 3-ANNCPU3 NOTES: I II ®II ®IIi.All wiring except earth Wire Specifications ground supervised and power Network Data Communications RS485 Format limited. 2.24 VDC available from Minimum Twisted Pair 18 AWG(0.75 mm2). Primary or Booster Power Maximum Circuit Resistance 90 Ohms I II II Isupply. Maximum Circuit Capacitance 0.3 pF 3.Uses RS-485 Network Maximum Distance communication format between any 3 panels 5,000 ft.(1,524 m). 4.Network wiring Twisted Pair Capacitance,entire network Maximum Accumulative Capacitance Power Riser Calculate wire size for a maximum 3.4 Vdc total line loss from the 24 Vdc Wire Size 38.4K Baud 19.2K Baud nominal voltage. 18 AWG 1.4 pF 2.8 pF 16 AWG 1.8 pF 3.6 pF 14 AWG 2.1 pF 4.2 pF Distance limits are determined using the maximum allowable circuit resistance and capacitance,and manufacturer's cable specifications. Specifications Catalog Number 3-ANNCPU3 1 3-ANNSM I 3-LCD I _ 3-LCDXL1 Agency Listings UL,ULC, FM,CE, LPCB EN54'pending. Mounting Space Two Spaces One Space Mounts over 3-ANNCPU Mounts over 3 ANNCPU plus two spaces. Communication Format RS-485 N/A N/A N/A Current @ 24 Vdc Standby 144 mA 10mA 40mA 48mA Alarm 144 mA 10mA 42mA 50mA Wiring Termination Plug in terminal strip Wiring Size Twisted Pair 18-14AWG (0.75-1.5 mm2) N/A 5000 ft(1524m) Max.Wire Distance between any 3 panels Relative Humidity 93%non condensing at 90°F(32°C) Temperature Rating 0-49°C(32-120°F) Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Note:For a complete list of EST3 annunciator display and control modules please refer to Edwards literature sheet part number 85010- 0055. *EN54-2:1997+A1 and EN54-4:1997+AI:2002+A2 pending Engineering Specification The Life Safety system shall incorporate annunciation of Alarm, units.The LCD interface must provide the ability to display custom Supervisory,Trouble and Monitor operations.Annunciation must event messages of a minimum of 40 characters.The LCD must be through the use of both LED display strips complete with a provide the emergency user, hands free viewing of the first and means to custom label each LED as to its function.Where ap- last highest priority event.The last highest priority event must plicable control switches must be provided. Switches with LEDs always display and update automatically. System events must must provide positive feed back to the operator of remote equip- automatically be placed in queues. It shall be possible to view ment status.An LCD display with basic common control LEDs specific event types separately. Having to scroll through a mixed and switches shall be provided.The Common Control Switches list of events types is not acceptable.The total number of active and LEDs provided as minimum will be: Reset switch and LED, events by type must be displayed. It must be possible to custom- Alarm Silence switch and LED, Panel Silence switch and LED, Drill ize the designations of all user interface LEDs and switches for switch and LED. It must be possible to add additional common local language requirements. It must be possible to route system controls as required though the use of modular display/control event messages to specific annunciator locations. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0069 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Dimensions 6.12 in Semiflush Mount c-115.55cmT- Surface Mount 55 0.46 in 11.17 cm) - 6p 114 'c 14�301in 0 11,) ° I TOP ° TOP .h ound stmI to •-d ® Earth RIound stud.I. .-d n a up ere . er on in a up er e t . er t o no out ° - next to knockout RCLM/B( S) 1 : urlI3c' ° M:ciao ° o 0 0 10.1 in.(25.7 cm)-01 11.6 in.(29.4 cm) O O O 2;1,75 .(7.0 cm) [ O O O ;Fin.(7.0 cm) 11.6 in.(29.4 cm) -101 Ci 0 I 4ANN/B(-S) 0° 0 [ O e 8° O ° ° e ° ° 13.19 in. 12.1 in. ° I 13.19 in. (33.5 cm) (30.7 cm) (33.5 cm) [ e ° , ° [ e C it Semiflush Surface mount 141- 14.5 in.(36.8 cm) -0'1 16.1 in.(40.9 cm) O O 0 0 2.i.(7.0 cm) [ 0 0 O O 2 in.(7.0 cm) F 101- 16.1 in.(40.9 cm) C = C 0 O 0 0O 6ANN/B(-S) [ o , [ 0 ° ° ° ° ° 13.19 in. 12.1 in. °° , , , ° , 13.19 in. - (33.5 cm) (30.7 cm) - (33.5 cm) S C C. 4 i . 4 ° c Semiflush Surface mount H23.86 in.(60.60 cm) ' H 25.47 in.(64.7 cm) "I OO OO2.75 in.( 0cm) [ 00 00 I= 25.47 in.(64.7 cm) T C = _ C c 0 0 O 0 O 1OANN/B(-S) [ O - [ O , 17,.1 in., , , , , 13.19 in. 1 o , , 17,.1 in., ,, ,,130.7 cm) (33.5 cm) )30.7 cm) o [ . ° [ ° i _ oI ° c Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85010-0069 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Ordering Information Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lb(kg) Command Module Annunciators(Come with CPU,LCD display and doors.Order wallbox separately.) 3-LCDANN Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator. 3.8(1.7) TD WA R D S 3-LCDANN-E Remote LCD Command Module Annunciator.For EN54"market only,CE. 3.8(1.7) Base Annunciators(Come with two 3-ANNSM annunciator support modules,a CPU,and doors. A UTC Fire&Security Company Order Display/Control modules,additional support modules&wallbox separately) 3-4ANN Four Position Base Annunciator. Detection&alarm since 1872 3-4ANN-E Four Position Base Annunciator.For EN54"market only,CE. U.S. 3-6ANN Six Position Base Annunciator. 6.28 T 888-378-2329 (2.85) F 866-503-39963-6ANN-E Six Position Base Annunciator. For EN54*market only,CE. 6'28 (2.85) Canada 3-10ANN 10 Position Base Annunciator. 10.5(4.8) Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 3-10ANN-E 10 Position Base Annunciator.For EN54"market only,CE. 10.5(4.8) F 519 376 7258 "EN54-2:1997+A 1 and EN54-4:1997+A1:2002+A2 pending CPU,Support Module,&LCD Displays Southeast Asia 3-ANNCPU3 Annunciator CPU 1 (.45) T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 3-CPUDR CPU doors with filler plates. Order separately,one required per CPU 0.25(.11) where no LCD display is installed. India 3-ANNSM Annunciator Support Module .45(.2) T:+91 80 4344 2000 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module,eight lines. .8(.36) F:+91 80 4344 2050 Liquid Crystal Display Module,40 lines mounts in 3-4ANN,3-6ANN or 3-10ANN Australia 3-LCDXL1 anunciators. Note one 3-LCDXLIKBL, (ordered separately)is required for each T+61 3 9239 1200 3-LCDXL 1 mounting into 3-6ANN or 3-10ANN annunicator boxes. F+61 3 92391299 Cable for 3-LCDXL1 (Use to connect from 3-ANNCPU3 to the first annuciator 3 LCDXLI KBL support model. Not required with 3-4ANN and 3-LCDXL1 applications.) Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 Control/Display Modules F+32 2 721 86 13 3-CPUDR Two blank filler plates suitable for any annunciator blank space. .5(.22) 3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module .35(.12) Latin America 3-24Y 24 Yellow LED Display Module .35(.12) T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 3-24G 24 Green LED Display Module .35(.12) 3-12SR 12 switches with 12 Red LED Display/Control Module .35(.12) utcfireandsecurity.com 3-12SY 12 switches with 12 Yellow LED Display/Control Module .35(.12) ©201o UTC Fire&Security. 3-12SG 12 switches with 12 Green LED Display/Control Module .35(.12) All rights reserved. 3-12RY 12 Red LED and 12 Yellow LED Display Module .35(.12) 3-12/S1 GY 12 switches with one Green and one Yellow LED per switch .35(.12) 3-12/S1 RY 12 switches with one Red and one Yellow LED per switch .35(.12) 3-12/S2Y 12 switches with two Yellow LEDs per switch .35(.12) 3 6/3S1 G2Y Six groups of three switches.Each switch with one LED:Green,Yellow, .35(.12) Yellow. 3 6/3S1 GYR Six groups of three switches.Each switch with one LED:Green,Yellow, .35(.12) Red. 3-REMICA Remote microphone for use in 3-ANN series annunciator cabinets 15(6.8) 3 FP Filler Plate,order separately one required per 3-ANNSM when no 0.1 (0.05) LED or LED/Switch module installed on operator layer. Driver Modules,Power Supplies 3-EVDVR LED/SWITCH Driver Module,For Edwards Graphics .35(.12) 3-EVDVRA LED/SWITCH Driver Module Assembly for Third-party Graphics .35(.12) 3-EVPWR Power Supply for Edwards Graphics .5(.22) 3-EVPWRA Power Supply Assembly c/w 19 inch rail mounting chassis assembly 2.5(1.2) space for one 3-ANNCPU3 for Third-party Graphics 3-EVDVRX Plastic mounting extrusion 19 inch mounting-Space for up to three 35(.12) 3-EVDVRA modules. Enclosures RLCM/B Remote Command module flush mount LCD wallbox 2.5(1.2) RLCM/B-S Remote Command module surface mount LCD wallbox 2.5(1.2) 3-RLCM/D Inner&outer doors for RLCM/B(-S) 2.0(0.9) 4ANN/B Four Position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox. 6.0(2.7) 4ANN/B-S Four position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox. 6.0(2.7) 6ANN/B Six position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 7.0(3.2) 6ANN/B-S Six position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 7.0(3.2) 10ANN/B Ten position LED/LCD flush mount wallbox 9.0(4.1) 10ANN/B-S Ten position LED/LCD surface mount wallbox 9.0(4.1) 0 v, Page 4 of 4 DATA S I 85010-0069 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 EST Catalog►Annunciation ES T T M Life Safety & Communications - - - MC- Graphic Annunciator - EV Series Graphic Annunciators n (€sr u 6 d FSCS Series Smoke Control Stations I I 15 g Overview Standard Features ENVOY graphic annunciators and smoke control panels are • High contrast lines and text designed to present complex status and control information in an • LCD display capability easy-to-understand package.The design of ENVOY products per- Allows display of custom text messages in graphic mits users to rapidly determine system status and easily operate annunciator enclosure. associated system controls.The addition of system LCD annun • Smoke control option ciators and remote microphones can turn ENVOY into a complete fire command station. • Agency listed with Edwards control panels ENVOY EV series graphic annunciators display system information • Surface or semi flush mounting using high intensity LEDs mounted behind the smoked Plexiglas® Semi Flush mount with optional trim. panel that displays the artwork.The ENVOY FSCS smoke control • Field installed modification of EV series graphics series replaces the Plexiglas®graphic panel with a gloss black with optional graphic transfer kit. finished steel panel. High contrast white graphics are placed on • Left or right hand hinging of outer door the panel along with the required switches and LED indicators, in- tegrating the element of control directly"into the picture."Switches and LEDs can be mounted virtually anywhere on the graphic Application display itself.White artwork and text on a dark background is ENVOY graphics are designed for indoor mounting in areas where standard. Colored artwork is available as an option,to enhance easy-to-understand annunciation and/or control is required such building areas or individual zones.A variety of LEDs and switches as lobbies, control rooms, and building management areas.The are available to meet any display and control requirement. flexibility of the ENVOY design and wide variety of options makes Power ON,Trouble, and Signal Silenced LEDs; System Reset, Si- ENVOY suitable for everything from a simple graphic annunciator lence,Trouble Silence, and Drill push button switches are available to complex graphic smoke control and fire command stations, as panel feature options. Other panel options include system LCD complete with audio paging capability. displays and remote microphones. "ENVOY graphic panels are available in a variety of standard sizes. Wall boxes are manufactured from 16-gauge cold rolled steel and finished with a textured black baked enamel. Panels can be surface mount or semi-flush mount.When semi-flush mounting, optional trim kits provide a finished look to the installation. Page 1 of 8 DATA s H t t I 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Installation and Mounting TYP.KNOCKOUTS TOP&BOTTOM All Knockouts are 4-1/2 -� 4-9/16 Combination 1/2"x 3/4" (1 14) C' - C (116) A _I AA 1-1/2 C y}� 1-1/2(38) ri. A(38) I IIL I D� 0 '9 0 1-1/4(32) • \ 3-7/8 y r 7/8(22)TYP. (98) I ) ° TOP ° —t 2.0 / 111 (51) LED PLACEMENT BB B E 0 AREA 1111B . / . 2.0 Optional Features Fig.1 Fig.2 (51) Location Surface Mounting Semi-Flush Mounting Fig.3 f Mounting Hole and Knockout Locations MAXIMUM For Use With... WALLBOX FINISH in(mm)) in I in(mm) in mm mm TRIM m in(mm) RECOMMENDED in(mm) in(mm) ( ( ( in(mm) ( ) #OF LED's EV1 and FSCS-1 EV1B TEXT,BLACK 24 16101 18 14581 3.5(89) EVl T 26(660) 20(508) 40 17.5(445) 10.5(267) EV2 and FSCS-2 i EV2B TEXT,BLACK 24 16101 24 16101 3.5(89) EV2T 26(660) 26(660) 72 17.5(445) 15.75 14001 EV3 and FSCS-3 EV3B TEXT,BLACK 24 16101 36 19151 3.5(89) EV3T 26(660) 38(965) 100 17.5(445) 26.25 16671 EV4 and FSCS-4 EV4B TEXT,BLACK 36(9141 48(1219) 3.5(89) EV4T 38(965) 50(1270) 120 30 17621 40(1016) These drawings are for information 1,1 Driver BoardMountingpurposes only and are subject to change Exhusiwithout notice. Consult the relevant instal- Chassis lation sheet for details. ` LED Matrix Board Hinged LED/GRAPHIC Mounting i'' I to I/ Graphic Display 0e0,11 I, Separate Hinged Outer Door Wallbox • 0 Mounting Rails Mounting Instructions: Optional I 1011111111111111111"1 Surface Mounting-Ref.Fig.1 Feature Module p c/w Pushbuttons \ 1.Hold wallbox in level and upright position against the wall. and LED's \._ 2.Use the mounting holes located in the rear panel to mark the hole positions. (See Fig.3) The top of the wallbox should be no greater than 80"(2032)from the finished floor. 3.Drill the mounting holes.Secure the wallbox using suitable fasteners(By Others). Opti onal Semi-Flush Mounting-Ref.Fig.2 Semi-Flush Trim 1.Plan wall cutout according to wallbox size.(MIN.DEPTH 3 1/2"(89)) Provide mounting supports for each side of wallbox. 24(610)x 36(915) 2.Hold the wallbox in a level position. (Shown) IMPORTANT:Be sure the front of the wallbox is flush to the finished wall surface. 3.Secure the wallbox in position using suitable fasteners(By Others). 4.Install Optional Trim to the wallbox using mounting hardware prodded. All wall boxes and trim kits are fabricated of 16 gauge cold rolled steel finished in textured black baked enamel. General Notes: 1.Install in accordance with National and Local Installation Standards. Page 2 of 8 DATA SHEE N 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 3-EVRMF - AAOptional _ — D 1 3-EVRMF L .1 \ / 1 2 3 4 5 6 LED E PLACEMENT AREA BB B 0/ \ r 1 1 BP1 or Features — ® a , r °11Fl11° 11 11 ii 11 Optional Features Location with 3-EVRMF A B C TRIM AA BB Typical Typical D E Wallbox Finish recommended recommended IN(mm) IN(mm) IN(mm) IN(mm) IN(mm) #of LEDs #of switches IN(mm) IN(mm) (FSCs Series Only) EV3B TEXT.BLACK 24(610) 36(915) 3.5(89) EV3T 26(660) 38(965) 100 132 17.5(445) 15.75(400) DBoard Mounting Extrusion/river Chassis These drawings are for information purposes only and are subject to change 000000000--- ifr, I 0.11 LED Matrix Board without notice. Consult the relevant instal- I tinged LED/GRAPHIC Mounting lation sheet for details. toI Graphic Display j Notes: 0Remove these two spacers when Wallbox a 3-LCD+3-ANNCPU3 mounts Mounting Rails in slots 1 &2 ONLY. Optional Q 2. Mounting Space in 3-EVRMF for Feature Plate OC (1)3-ANNCPU3 with a 3-LCD and up to 4 Control/Display Modules or 200up to 6 Control/Display Modules. Optional Flush Trim I0 3. No Driver Modules can mount on the Separate Hinged Outer Door rails behind the Module Mounting Frame. N. Optional 3-EVRMF Module Mounting Frame (7 EIA Panel spaces high) Page 3 of 8 DATA SHLL I 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 3-CHAS7, 3-EVRMF CBA Series /Back Box These drawings are for information Mounting Rails purposes only and are subject to change `� / without notice. Consult the relevant instal- - Mountingard lation sheet for details. �Oe I , Extrusion/Chassis O ' rc 03-CHAS7 Elevating ChassisLED Matrix Board 3-CHAS7Inner Door Assembly IIII�III ' Smoked Plexiglass c/w Graphic IIII — Inner Door Assembly ,� I I9 Cover Plate with` / Viewing Cutout I for 3-CHAS7 a (7 EIA panel spaces high) ��I� / 1 I \ Battery Shelf I CBA-BTS I Battery also fits II in bottom of box I 3-EVRMF Optional Module Mounting Frame (7 EIA panel spaces high) III a * TOP TOP fl IIIA a o i7 i7 0111. lig . Multiple Cabinet Installation-Surface or Semi-flush-Ref.Fig.4 and 5 1.IMPORTANT-Remove ALL conduit AND mounting bolt knockouts from adjacent cabinet side • panels before ganging the cabinets together.(See Fig.4) a 2.Use appropriate quantity of 1/4 x 3/4(6.0 x 18)bolts,shakeproof washers and nuts to gang 0 0 © the cabinets together.Bag Assemply supplied with each box.See detail Fig.4. .0' .Q' ,0' 3.Plan rough-in wiring and conduit layout before removing outside panel knockouts. Fig.5 \111111111See Fig.4 Mounting Bolt Knockout 1/4 x 3/4Nut for 1/4(6.0)Bolt (6.0 x 18)Bolt — 0 —® M p v ;,� Shakeproof Washer 0 a - 0 o Fig.4 Page 4 of 8 DATA SHEE N 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 CBA48, CBA72 1.5 1.083(2B) 2.0(38 These drawings are for information Knockout (51 �BA Series Back Box purposes only and are subject to change without notice. Consult the relevant instal- ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,Mounting Rails 2.0 .� / lation sheet for details. (51 Driver Board nsl 3.0 - Mounting (76 Extrusion/Chassis E 4.5 Optional o (114) Q 1 Semi-flushflshitrim shown ro "1:-.5....' / flush trim available 3.500/ See Drawing C-61000-0031 r° 189 0 LED Matrix Board Inner Door Assembly I�f 0� Smoked Plexiglas c/w Graphic 1 I�� Outer Door Assembly 9 � lik Battery Shelf Ii CBA-BT5 Z.0(76) �� K Knockout Battery also fits :I in bottom of box Fig.1 Optional Feature Module I�'/ c/w Pushbuttons and LEDs or Blank Pnels a General Rough-in Notes (BP1,BP2 orBP3s) i10II��� 1. Locate 120V,60Hz primary input power on the left hand side of the cabinets. (Left hand cabinet if multiple cabinets). 2. Locate input/output zone wiring on the top or right hand side of all cabinets. 3. System batteries mount on bottom of cabinet or on the battery shelf mounted to rear rails.(See Fig.1.)Do not use the bottom panel for conduit entry. 4. Do not cut roughed-in wiring too short.Leave a length of wire equal to the height plus the width of the cabinets. 5. Maintain a minimum of 1.5(38)clearance from corner walls to side of wallbox. Cat.# Height Width Cabinet Mounting Instuctions Dim."A" Dim."B" Flush and Semi-flush Mounting-Refer Fig.2 and 2A CBA48-B 48(1219) 28(711) 1. The wall cutout for flush and semi-flush cabinet installation should be 1.0(25) CBA72-B 72(1828) 28(711) greater than overall cabinet dimensions(min.depth 8.0(203)).Provide supports for each side of cabinet. 2. The front of the semi-flush mounted cabinets should be a minimum of 5/8(16) from the finished wall surface. 1-13/16 lasl 3. The front of the flush mounted cabinets should be flush to the finished wall sur- 6/81161 face. min 8.0 1-3/16 8.0 1-3/16 4. Hold the cabinet in a level position. CIzo31 (30) rzo311 laol �;4't:...I I II 5. Secure the cabinet in position using suitable 1/4(6.0)fasteners. 6'•+T . ') NnS`�"2"1 '"' - .t,1 Y;..• ek �t.,` O �.�..• O x O Surface Mounting-Refer Fig.3 9�},O 53;•;;O ql O 1. Hold cabinet in level and upright position against the wall. ri"° Or:O :i O 2. Use the mounting holes located in the rear panel to mark the hole positions.The ;M7.gq ,,74_,,...,L,------� "'' top of the cabinet should be no greater than 80(2032)from the finished floor. 3. Drill the mountingholes.Secure the cabinet usingsuitable 1/4(6.0)fasteners. s{1�. � V.:•1 O '4,1,,- . ``; Doors and Trims-Refer Fig.1 7`i'f'• ';d of 0 ;y 2 .1.41O 1. Install doors and trims using mounting hardware provided. ,?;p'�if e,s. ., - Kik 2. Outer doors mount with either a Left or Right hand opening.Left hand hinged Fig.2 Fig.2A Fig.3 door shown. Semi-flush Flush Surface Page 5 of 8 DATA S H t t I 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Optional Rack Mount Frames RSAN-6 These drawings are for information r _ M _ _� purposes only and are subject to change �" without notice. Consult the relevant instal- 1 lation sheet for details. \ / Optional Module Mounting / Frame RSAN-6 LED E PLACEMENT AREA BBe ❑ / \ 1 2 3 4 5 6 BP1 &Features or BP2 Optional Features r 1 Location with RSAN-6 A B C Trim AA BB Typical D E Wallbox Finish Recommended IN(mm) IN(mm) IN(mm) IN(mm) IN(mm) #of LEDs IN(mm) IN(mm) EV3B TEXT.BLACK 24(610) 36(915) 3.5(89) EV3T 26(660) 38(9651 100 17.5(4451 15.75(4001 Driver Board Mounting Extrusion/ 4:#; :: Chassis LED Matrix Board I ... Hinged LED/GRAPHIC Mounting I Smoked Plexiglas c/w Graphic • • • Wallbox Mounting Rails ,:. Optional Feature Plate &BP1 Separate Hinged 0 Outer Door Or BP2 • Optional Semi-Flush'Sim 0 Notes: 1.No Driver Modules can mount on the rails behind the Module Mounting Frame. 2.Mounting space in RSAN-6 for[1]SMDN(-C)with up to 4 SAN modules or up to 6 SAN modules. Optional Module Mounting Frame (6 EIA Panel spaces high) Page 6 of 8 DATA S H E E N 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Engineering Specification Driver Electronics Reference Provide a<semi-flush><surface>mounted graphic<annunciator> The following cross-reference lists the suggested driver electronics <smoke control>panel at the location(s)specified on the plans. The panel to be used with Envoy series products. shall be provided with a key locked see through door,capable of left-hand or right-hand mounting.The graphic<annunciator><smoke control>pan- Cat# Description System el shall be UL,and ULC listed,and operate on nominal 24 VDC that shall be Annunciator CPU-Supports up to eighteen battery backed up.Communication between the annunciator and the host 3-ANNCPU1 3-EVDVR(A)modules 3 control panel shall be digital.No individual point wiring shall be permitted. 3-EVDVR Driver,24 LEDs&12 switches 3 Annunciator series graphics shall be white artwork on a smoked Plex- Driver,24 LEDs&12 switches w/cables for iglas®background. The annunciator graphic display shall utilize back-lit 3-EVDVRA third party annunciators 3 using high intensity LEDs,located as shown in the shop drawings.LEDs 3-EVPWR Power Supply-supports up to eighteen 3 shall be capable of being independently controlled by the host system. 3-EVDVR(A)drivers Smoke Control Series graphics shall be white artwork on a gloss black 19"rack mount w/3-EVPWR&room for one steel background. System control switches and high intensity LEDs shall 3-EVPWRA 3-ANNCPU1 for third party annunciators 3 be mounted directly on the graphic,as shown in the shop drawings.Each 19"rack mount for up to three 3-EVDVRA5 switch and LED function shall be independently identified by the host sys- 3-EVDVRX for third party annunciators 3 tem;and function as described elsewhere in this specification.It shall be SAN CPU Annunciator CPU&Power Supply 2,4 possible to update the graphic artwork in the field with the need to replace the entire graphic artwork. SAN- Common Control Module 4 COMM/D The following System controls and indicators shall be provided on the <an- SDR-32 Driver,32 LEDs 2,4 nunciator><smoke control>panel:Power ON,Trouble,and Signal Silenced SIN 16 Input Interface 16 Switches 2 LEDs;System Reset,Silence,Trouble Silence,and Drill push buttons. RSA4-CPU Annunciator CPU 4 <It shall be possible to annunciate text messages via LCD display mount- RSA4-COM/D Common Control Strip 2,4 ed in the graphic <annunciator><smoke control>enclosure.> SRAx Annunciator CPU. Supports up to 6 XGD 5 The graphic<annunciator><smoke control>panel shall provide an inte- cards gral remote microphone for system paging.> XGD Driver,24 LED's and 12 Switches 5 The graphic <annunciator><smoke control panel>shall be Edwards EV24VDC Individual LEDs wired with LED positive leads 1 ENVOY series. connected together 1=Direct wired 24 VDC LEDs.2=EST2/IRC-3/FCC.3=EST3,4=LSS4,5=QuickStart Ordering / Specification Information Graphic Annunciator/Smoke Control Panels Typical#of Max#of Artwork/LED/ In-graphic In-graphic Feature Options Catalog ULI/ULC Switch Placement LEDs Switches Driver Electronics (see option chart Number area (See Note (See Note Listing below) 1) 1) EV1 17.5"W x 10.5"H 40 option 6 SAN/RSA4 Modules or a 3-ANNCPU1, (445 mm x 267 mm) #1,2 one 3-EVPWR&four 3-EVDVRS EV2 17.5"W x 15.75"H 72 option 12 SAN/RSA4 Modules or a 3-ANNCPU1, (445 mm x 400 mm) #1,2 one 3-EVPWR&six 3-EVDVRs EV3 17.5"W x 26.25"H 100 option 18 SAN/RSA4 Modules or a 3-ANNCPU1, (445 mm x 667 mm) #1,2 one 3-EVPWR&eleven 3-EVDVRs EV4 30"W x 40"H(762 120 option N/A Accessory 18 SAN/RSA4 Modules or a 3-ANNCPU1, mm x 1016 mm) #1,2 one 3-EVPWR&eleven 3-EVDVRS System LEDs: EVCBA48 17.5"W x 38"H 120&up One&up 3-ANNCPU1s, 15,16,17 (445mm x 965 mm) option#1,2 one&up 3-EVPWR &eleven&up 3-EVDVRs (6 max.) 17.5"W x 63"H 120&up One&up 3-ANNCPU1s, EVCBA72 (445mm x 1600mm) option#1,2 one&up 3-EVPWR &eleven&up 3-EVDVRs (See Note 2) System Switches: FSCS 1 17.5"W x 10.5"H 40 option 48 options One 3-ANNCPU1, 14,18,19,20,22,23 (445 mm x 267 mm) #3,4 #5 thru 13 one 3-EVPWR &four 3-EVDVRs (6 max.) FSCS-2 17.5"W x 15.75"H 72 option 72 options One 3-ANNCPU1, (445 mm x 400 mm) #3,4 #5 thru 13 one 3-EVPWR &six 3-EVDVRs FSCS-3 17.5"W x 26.25"H 100 option 132 options One 3-ANNCPU1,one 3-EVPWR (445 mm x 667 mm) #3,4 #5 thru 13 &eleven 3-EVDVRS PS: 30"W x 1x x 1 40"H 120 option 132 options Control Smoke One 3-ANNCPU1,one 3-EVPWR 24 FSCS-4 (762 mm016 #3,4 #5 thru 13 &eleven 3-EVDVRs (1 max.) mm) (EST3 Only) FSCBA48 17.5"W x 38"H up120 opt on opt ons One&up 3-ANNCPU1s,one (445mm x 965 mm) #1,2,3,4 #5 thru 13 &up 3-EVPWR &eleven&up 3-EVDVRs 17.5"W x 63"H 120& 48&up One&up 3-ANNCPU1 s,one FSCBA72 (445mm x 1600mm) up option options &up 3-EVPWR &eleven&up 3 EVDVRS (See Note 2) #1,2,3,4 #5 thru 13 Notes: 1. The density of individual graphic LED and switch layouts may change the quantities shown.LED spacing should be Y"apart on center and not less then 3/16". All switches,text and symbols should be kept 1/2"away from viewing area border.In-graphic toggle switches(options 3,4,&5)require 11/4"centers. 2. The EVCBA72/FSCBA72B provide mounting space equivalent to two EV3 or two FSCS-3 units mounted in a single cabinet. Page 7 of 8 DATA S N t t i 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Options Feature/ Catalog# Description Option# 1 _ EVZLED Back Lit Graphic LED-Red,Yellow,or Green for EV series graphics 2 EVBLED Back Lit Graphic LED-Blue for EV series graphics 2 EVZWLED Back Lit graphic LED-White for EV series graphics 3 EVZSLED In-graphic LED-Red,Yellow or Green for FSCS series graphics TOWARDS 4 EVZSBLED In-graphic LED- hit for FSCS seriesegraphic 4 EVZSWLED In-graphic LED White- for FSCS series graphics A UTC Fire&Security Company 5 EVSC3-21 In-graphic 2-Pos Toggle Switch for FSCS series graphics -ON wired to driver input(1 point) Detection&alarm since 1872 6 EVSC3-22 In-graphic 2-Pos Toggle Switch for FSCS series graphics -ON &OFF wired to driver inputs(2 points) u.S. In-graphic 3-Pos Toggle Switch for FSCS series graphics T 888-378-2329 4 EVSC3-32 -ON&OFF wired to driver inputs(2 points) F 866-503-3996 In-graphic 3-Pos Toggle Switch for FSCS series graphics Canada 5 EVSC3-33 -ON,AUTO&OFF wired to driver inputs(3 points) Chubb Edwards 9 EVSC3R-21 In-graphic 2-Pos Rotary Switch for FSCS series graphics T 519 376 2430 -ON wired to driver input(1 point) F 519 376 7258 In-graphic 2-Pos Rotary Switch for FSCS series graphics 10 EVSC3R-22 -ON &OFF wired to driver inputs(2 points) Southeast Asia In-graphic 3-Pos Rotary Switch for FSCS series graphics T:+65 6391 9300 11 EVSC3R-32 F:+65 6391 9306 -ON &OFF wired to driver inputs(2 points) 12 EVSC3R-33 In-graphic 3-Pos Rotary Switch for FSCS series graphics India -ON,AUTO&OFF wired to driver inputs(3 points) T:+91 80 4344 2000 In-graphic 4-Pos Rotary Switch for FSCS series graphics F:+91 80 4344 2050 13 EVSC3R-44 -all positions wired to driver inputs(4 points) 14 EVKE Enable Key switch Australia 15 EVPLED Annunciator Power On LED-EV&FSCS series T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 16 EVTLED Trouble LED-EV&FSCS series 17 EVSSLED Signals Silenced LED-EV&FSCS series Europe 18 EVRP Reset Push Button-EV&FSCS series T+32 2 72511 20 19 EVSSP Signal Silence Push Button-EV&FSCS series F+32 2 721 86 13 20 EVTS Trouble Silence Switch-EV&FSCS series Latin America 21 EVDRILL Drill Switch-EV&FSCS series T 305 593 4301 22 EVLT Lamp Test Push Button-EV&FSCS series F 305 593 4300 23 EVSP Spare Push Button-EV&FSCS series 24 EVLTPS Lamp Test Power Supply -EV&FSCS series-Required if lamp test utcfireandsecurity.com option used on type 1 (24VDC)system. ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. Wallboxes, Doors&Trim Kits Catalog# Description EV1 B EV1 &FSCS-1 Wallbox-24"W x 18"H x 31 "D-(609mm x 457mm x 89mm)-black EV2B EV2&FSCS-2 Wallbox-24"W x 24"H x 3 1/2"D-(609mm x 609mm x 89mm)-black EV3B EV3&FSCS-3 Wallbox-24"W x 36"H x 3'/2"D-(609mm x 914mm x 89mm)-black EV4B EV4&FSCS-4 Wallbox-36"W x 48"H x 31/2"D-(914mm x 1219mm x 89mm)-black EV1 T Trim for EV1 B Wallbox-Overall Dimensions 26"W x 20"H-(660mm x 508mm)-black EV2T Trim for EV2B Wallbox-Overall Dimensions 26"W x 26"H-(660mm x 660mm)-black EV3T Trim for EV3B Wallbox-Overall Dimensions 26"W x 38"H-(660mm x 965mm)-black EV4T Trim for EV4B Wallbox-Overall Dimensions 38"W x 50"H-(965mm x 1270mm)-black CBA48-B 28"W x 48"H x 8"D(711 mm x 1219mm x 203mm)Wallbox white CBA48-D Door,Viewing area 17 3/8"W 38"H(441 mm x 965mm) CBA72-B 28"W x 72"H x 8"D Wallbox white(711 mm x 1829mm x 203mm) CBA72-D Door,Viewing area 17 3/8"W 63"H(441 mm x 1600mm) CBA48-VT Semi-Flush Vertical Trim White for a CBA48-B wallbox-Overall 48 1/8"H(1221 mm) CBA72-VT Semi-Flush Vertical Trim White for a CBA72-B wallbox-Overall 72 1/8"H(1831 mm) CBA HT1 Semi-Flush Horizontal Trim for 1 CBA48-B or CBA72-B wallbox-Overall 30 5/8"W (778mm) CBA-HT2 Semi-Flush Horizontal Trim for 2 CBA48-B or CBA72-B wallboxes-Overall 58 5/8"W (1489mm) CBA-HT3 Semi-Flush Horizontal Trim for 3 CBA48-B or CBA72-B wallboxes-Overall 86 5/8"W (2200mm) CBA48-FVT Flush Vertical Trim White for a CBA48-B wallbox-Overall 46 3/4"H(1188mm) CBA72-FVT Flush Vertical Trim White for a CBA72-B wallbox-Overall 70 3/4"H(1798mm) CBA-FHT1 Flush Horizontal Trim for 1 CBA48-B or CBA72-B wallbox-Overall 30"W(762mm) CBA-FHT2 Flush Horizontal Trim for 2 CBA48-B or CBA72-B wallboxes-Overall 58"W (1473mm) CBA-FHT3 Flush Horizontal Trim for 3 CBA48-B or CBA72-B wallboxes-Overall 86"W (2184mm) a Page 8 of 8 DATA SHEE 85006-0037 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 BA! 1'1✓RY CABINET (P/N 240059) DESCRIPTION The BC-1 battery cabinet is a surface mounted secure enclosure for the installation backup batteries. The cabinet is constructed of 16 gage steel and features a locking door. A terminal strip and in-line fuse is mounted within the cabinet to facilitate battery wiring. The cabinet is finished with a off white finish. Electrical knockouts are provided on the top and sides of the cabinet, with keyhole mounting slots back panel. 0 SPECIFICATIONS Material 16 Ga Steel Finish Off White Dimensions 14" H X 18.25" W X 7.25" D [CBATCAB.DC2I BC-1 BA IERY CABINET CAPACITY BATTERY P/N VOLTAGE AMP-HOUR BC-1 CAPACITY CAPACITY B1250 372001 12 V 5.0 AH 4 B12700 372012 12 V 7.0 AH 4 B 12100 372024 12 V 10.0 AH 4 B12150 372014 12 V 15.0 AH 2 • B12200 372015 12 V 20.0 AH 2 B12240 372016 12 V 24.0 AH 2 B 12333 372016 12 V 33.0 AH 2 B12400 372018 12 V 40.0 AH 2 1.1.4.1 APPLICATION The BC-1 is designed for housing large batteries which are too large to fit inside standard surface and semi-flush mounted enclosures. Cabinets may be bolted together vertically to increase capacity. BAIT1 RY CABINET DIMENSIONS 18.250 15.758 1 3/4" CONDUIT KNOCKOUT J 0 0 IITOP VIEW 18.00 y 7.250 (QI Ic \ � I 0-4e 01000010i I CD TERMINAL BLOCK FIND FUSE 3/4" CONDUIT KNOCKDLT 0 0 O/° ° O SIDE VIEW NOTE: USE A 8-32 SCREW, NUT AND LOCKWRSHER FOR CONNECTION TO END BATTERY CABINET (4 EACH REQUIRED) [BATCAB.DC2] [801•ROO.INS[ 1.1.4.2 EST Catalog►Power Supplies and Accessories riga T rM )111111/Life Safety & Communications 11111111111.\\\\ ll1Iltill+ - 1lrtl�i , ltl411�I 1111111Ni •Remote Booster Power Supplies ff �t „ BPS6A, BPS1 OA Idt LC ++'7''.'+)i r 'l lj��lrfl+j�r_+;'•; • � ri Overview Standard Features The Booster Power Supply(BPS)is a UL 864, 9th Edition listed • Allows for reliable filtered and regulated power to be installed power supply. It is a 24 Vdc filtered-regulated,and supervised where needed unit that can easily be configured to provide additional notification • Cost effective system expansion appliance circuits(NACs)or auxiliary power for Mass Notification/ • Provides for Genesis and Enhanced Integrity notification ap- Emergency Communication(MNEC), as well as life safety, security, and access control applications. pliance synchronization • Supports coded output operation The BPS contains the circuitry to monitor and charge internal • or external batteries. Its steel enclosure has room for up to two or restoring overcurrent protection 10 ampere-hour batteries. For access control-only applications, • Multiple signal rates the BPS can support batteries totaling up to 65 ampere-hours in • Can be cascaded or controlled independently an external enclosure.The BPS has four Class B(convertible to • Easy field configuration two Class A)NACs.These can be activated in one or two groups from the BPS's unique dual input circuits. • On-board diagnostic LEDs identify wiring or internal faults • The BPS is available in 6.5 or 10 ampere models. Each output Standard Edwards keyed lockable steel cabinet with remov- able door circuit has a capacity of three amperes;total current draw cannot exceed the unit's rating. • 110 and 230 Vac models available The BPS meets current UL requirements and is listed under the • Accommodates 18 to 12 AWG wire sizes following standards: • Optional tamper switch Standard(CON) Description • Dual battery charging rates UL864 9th edition(UOXX)Fire Alarm Systems • Optional earthquake hardening: OSHPD seismic pre-approval UL636(ANET,UEHX7) Holdup Alarm Units and Systems UL609(AOTX,AOTX7) Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems for component Importance Factor 1.5 UL294(ALVY,UEHX7) Access Control Systems UL365(APAW,APAW7) Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems UL1076(APOU,APOU7) Proprietary Burglar Alarm System Units UL1610(AMCX) Central Station Alarm Unit ULC-5527(UOXXC) Control Units,Fire Alarm(Canada) ULC-S303(AOTX7) Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems(Canada) C22.2 No.205 Signaling Equipment(Canada) Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85005-0125 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Application Dimensions The BPS provides additional power and circuits for notification ap- pliances and other 24 Vdc loads. It is listed for indoor dry locations a 0- D5 a and can easily be installed where needed. Top View Fault conditions are indicated on the on-board diagnostic LEDs, opening the BPS input sense circuit and the trouble relay(if + D2±1 i D3 programmed).While this provides indication to the host system, . -� the BPS can still be activated upon command.A separate AC Fail contact is available on the BPS circuit board,which can be 01—D4—*0 o programmed for trouble or AC Fail.There are seven on-board diagnostic LEDs: one for each NAC fault, one for battery fault, one Front View O for ground fault, and one for AC power. a) • The unique dual-input activation circuits of the BPS can be acti- vated by any voltage from 6 to 45 VDC(filtered-regulated)or 11 D1 0 D6 to 33 Vdc(full-wave rectified, unfiltered).The first input circuit can be configured to activate 1-4 of the four possible outputs.The o7 second input circuit can be configured to control circuits 3 and 4. All knockouts co When outputs are configured for auxiliary operation,these circuits for 3/4 in conduit can be configured to stay on or automatically deactivate 30 sec- (1.9 cm) o a) onds after AC power is lost.This feature makes these circuits ideal 0 for door holder applications.The BPS also has a separate 200 mA 24 Vdc output that can be used to power internal activation V i 1 , ■. modules. BPS NACs can be configured for a 3-3-3 temporal or continuous Di D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 output.California temporal rate outputs are also available on cer- 17.0 in 3.5 in 13.0 in 6.5 in 3.375 in 12.0 in tain models.This makes the BPS ideal for applications requiring (43.2 cm) (8.9 cm) (33.0 cm) (16.5 cm) (8.6 cm) (30.4 cm) signaling rates that are not available from the main system. In addition to the internally generated signal rates,the BPS can also be configured to follow the coded signal rate of the main Wire routing Power-limited system NACs.This allows for the seamless expansion of existing wiring area NACs. The BPS enclosure has mounting brackets for up to three Signa- U ture modules to the right of the circuit board. ^ 8 - =, i--• Engineering Specification = [- ■ Supply,where needed, Edwards BPS Series Booster Power Sup- I — ._ ' ° plies(BPS)that are interconnected to and supervised by the main Q _ _ _ system.The BPS shall function as a stand-alone auxiliary power — • • supply with its own fully-supervised battery compliment.The BPS �•o [3l battery compliment shall be sized to match the requirements of Route AC supply !, cc*: l• ° 0° the main system.The BPS shall be capable of supervising and through these — u -1 I o° charging batteries having the capacity of 24 ampere-hours for knockouts only« 1 Mass Notification/Emergency Communication(MNEC), life safety (Nonpower-limited and security applications, and the capacity of 65 ampere-hours for and supervised) Battery wiring (nonpower- access control applications. limited and supervised) o «The BPS shall be capable of installation for a seismic com- Battery Battery ponent Importance Factor of 1.5.»The BPS shall provide a minimum of four independent,fully supervised Class B circuits that can be field configurable for notification appliance circuits or auxiliary 24 Vdc power circuits. BPS NACs shall be convertible to a minimum of two Class A NACs. Each BPS output circuit shall Notes be rated at 3 amperes at 24 Vdc. Each output circuit shall be 1. Maintain 1/4-inch(6 mm)spacing between power-limited and nonpower-limited provided with automatically restoring overcurrent protection.The wiring or use type FPL,FPLR,or FPLP cable per NEC. [2] Power-limited and supervised when not configured as auxiliary power.Non- BPS shall be operable from the main system NAC and/or Edwards supervised when configured as auxiliary power. Signature Series control modules. BPS NACs shall be configurable [3] Source must be power-limited.Source determines supervision. for continuous, 3-3-3 temporal or optionally, California rate. Fault 4. When using larger batteries,make sure to position the battery terminals towards conditions on the BPS shall not impede operation of main sys- the door. tem NAC.The BPS shall be provided with ground fault detection circuitry and a separate AC fail relay. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85005-0125 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Typical Wiring Sin le or cascaded booster NAC Circuit >To next signaling g NAC Circuit \V/ >device,booster,or anywhere on a notification appliance circuit EOL resistor ExistingNAC end-of-line resistors are not required to be 3 >NAC output#1 q Fire Alarm D >NAC output#2 installed at the booster's terminals.This allows multiple ControlltipleCD >NAC output#3 boosters to be driven from a single NAC circuit without the 5 s >NAC output#4 a need for special configurations. Booster Power Supply Configuring the Booster for Multiple CC1(S) modules using the AC Power Fail delay operation* BPS's sense inputs TB1 Notification appliance circuit(NAC) TB1 Notification appliance circuit(NAC) NAC1/+ © UL listed NAC1/ + © UL listed AUX1 - a DMZ EOL 15 kf) AUX1 - g CAAEOL 15 KW NAC2/ + NAC2/ + 0AUX2 - Notification appliance circuit(NAC) n AUX2 - aNotification appliance circuit(NAC) NAC3/ + n UL listed NAC3/ + a UL listed AUX3 - aJ ©MZ EOL 15 Id) AUX3 - ® DMZ EOL 15 KW NAC4/ + 0 NAC4/ + 0 AUX4 - in AUX4 - Ql 200 mAAUX, 0 + 200 mAAUX u, Continuous m - Continuous m 0 INl©- IN ® + Sense 1 COM 11'`�`,,,,J,,.=II`` Sense 1 COM I ni OUT I +C - + OUT in) EOL 47 K IN1�J \ Doo INI© +_ Sense 2 COM l© EOL 47 kO 109 Sense 2 COM I aJEOL 47 K O O 0 CC1(S)module odle[1][3] OUT a Trouble COM V) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Trouble COM a 1 0 I O ���o 109 109 NC B llMLII +I-_11 +-+'_ NC TB2 CC1(S)module CC1(S)module 0 0 e�C�1� Data in from Data out to 8765 4321 i 8765 ® 4321 previous device —P next device ���i�ln �i �J H..1.11., m�� module[4] or Signature _+ [11 S + [1] +4 3 2 ' controller I Data in from previous>I+ *The Booster supports AC Power fail delay [3] device or Signature T —P Data out to of three hours via its trouble contact when controller next device dip switch SW2-6 is on.All other troubles are reported to supervising module or panel without delay via Sense inputs. Security and access BPS TB1 24 V 12 V NAC1/ + (1 Security Security EOL AUX1 - 24DC12 V device device monitoring NAC2/ + © device AUX2 - NAC3/ + ©i AUX3 - PJ NAC4/ + AUX4 - Control panel BPS[1] Card reader Card reader Card reader controller controller controller + — + — + — + — + — AT AT To next device [1] Disable the BPS's ground fault jumper(JP3) or end Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85005-0125 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 Specifications TOWARDS Model 6.5 amp Booster 10 amp Booster AC Line Voltage 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz A UTC Fire&Security Company 390 watts 580 watts Detection&alarm since 1872 Notification Appliance 3.OA max.per circuit @ 24Vdc 3.OA max.per circuit @ 24Vdc Circuit Ratings nominal 6.5A max total all NACs nominal 10A max total all NACs u.S. Trouble Relay 2 Amps @ 30Vdc T 888-378-2329 Auxiliary Outputs Four configurable outputs replace NACs 1,2,3 or 4. as auxiliary F 866-503-3996 outputs and 200 mA dedicated auxiliary.(See note 2.) Canada Input Current 3mA @ 12Vdc,6mA @ 24Vdc Chubb Edwards (from an existing NAC) T 519 376 2430 Booster Internal 70mA F 519 376 7258 Supervisory Current Southeast Asia Signature Mounting Accomodates three two-gang modules. T:+65 6391 9300 Space F:+65 6391 9306 Maximum Battery Size 10 Amp Hours(2 of 12V1 OA)in cabinet up to 24 Amp hours with ex- India ternal battery cabinet for fire and security applications;up to 65 Amp T:+91 80 4344 2000 hours for access control applications in external battery box. F:+91 80 4344 2050 Terminal Wire Gauge 18-12 AWG Australia Relative Humidity 0 to 93%non condensing @ 32°C T+61 3 9239 1200 Temperature Rating 32°to 120°F(0°to 49°C) F+61 3 9239 1299 NAC Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Europe Output Signal Rates Continuous,California rate,3-3-3 temporal, T+32 2 725 11 20 or follow installed panel's NAC.(See note 1.) F+32 2 721 86 13 Ground Fault Detection Enable or Disable via jumper Latin America Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM T 305 593 4301 1. Model BPS*CAA provides selection for California rate,in place of temporal. F 305 593 4300 2. Maximum of 8 Amps can be used for auxiliary output. utcfi reandsecu rity.com Ordering Information ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. Catalog Description Shipping Number Wt.lb(kg) BPS6A 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) BPS6AC 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply(ULC) 13(5.9) BPS6A/230 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply(220V) 13(5.9) BPS6CAA 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply with California rate 13(5.9) BPS1 OA 10 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) BPS1OAC 10 Amp Booster Power Supply(ULC) 13(5.9) BPS10A/230 10 Amp Booster Power Supply(220V) 13(5.9) BPS1 OCAA 10 Amp Booster Power Supply with California rate 13(5.9) Related Equipment 12V6A5 7.2 Amp Hour Battery,two required 3.4(1.6) 1. Requires installation of sepa- 12V1 OA 10 Amp Hour Battery,two required 9.5(4.3) rate battery cabinet. 3-TAMP Tamper switch 2. BPS supports batteries greater BC-1 EQ Seismic Kit for BC-1. Order BC-1 separately.See note 3. than 24 Amp hours for access BPSEQ Seismic kit for BPS6A or BPS10 Booster Power Supplies.See control applications only. 3. For earthquake anchorage, note 3 including detailed mounting BC-1 Battery Cabinet(up to 2-40 Amp Hour Batteries) 58(26.4) weights and center of gravity BC-2 Battery Cabinet(up to 2-17 Amp Hour Batteries) 19(8.6) detail,refer to Seismic Applica- 12V17A 18 Amp Hour Battery,two required(see note 1) 13(5.9) tion Guide 3101676. Approval 12V24A 24 Amp Hour Battery,two required(see note 1) 20(9.07) of panel anchorage to site structure may require local 12V40A 40 Amp Hour Battery,two required(see notes 1,2) 32(14.5) AHJ,structural or civil engineer 12V50A 50 Amp Hour Battery,two required(see notes 1,2) 40(18.14) review. 12V65A 65 Amp Hour Battery,two required(see notes 1,2) 49(22.2) 0 rr Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85005-0125 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 ower 1 ® Batteries Battery Specification Sheet SLA1075 Technical Speak tichn*e characteristics y Nominal Voltag- V SS Nominal'apacity ..I Ah (20 Hr Rate) Chemil'rel• Acid -AGM 1.8 Physical Sp cifi ti ns o,1CA o.O5CA FLOAT SERVICE LIFE Lc 7)_A O?SCA I Len °h: 1 -101 , mm 5.94 in. J I W d 14 3ACA20CA o• mm 2.56 in. S TESTING CONDITIONS:FLOATING VOLTAGE 2.25 TO 2.30V/CELL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:20°C TO 22°C(64°F TO 72°F) 7. Height1. •a.: 3.69 in. (�o'�) Hcightiw/Term' al: •1.- m 3.88 in. d 100 •..- 1. 1111111"111111111111111r- W?fight 2. kt 5.53 lbs. U 80 0 1 8 4 6 810 80 4060 4 6 810 80 40 W 60 Terminal I-Type (Minute) (118,77 Faston z 4CD 0 Case Material Discharge time Black ABS ¢ D 1 2 3 5 5.5 a Charging SptIf4cteristiosfor Standby Use LIFE(YEARS) Max. Charge Curr;:nt 2.16 A Approw-Fin&l Cha .le Cell ehar:eLI _. Currertt-(2.215_`vpfts - ,F � / Una.x4 2e1rn 166.1 1.7/ rill. F APP Fkla)diarPI , 0.07 A _ C)Discharge I.- © (1.45 volts ccllCy e) 500%(O.1CA*10h) 60 .o-ee=r t.o3 --50 %(O.1CA*Sh) I ©Constant voltage charging pp Charge voltage:2.275V/cell OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE 4°- U 0.06- y 1.66 ®TemperatureCharge en C 25°C (77°F) VS REMAINING CAPACITY Ca paicity°.Spec f* atkons (0) AT 25°C(77°F) Cut-off Voltage , / 20 qtr Rate Char `Af9t 14.0 �; 1.75 volts/cell @ 25°C° i 0 Hr °T'O 6.J'8 Ah o ' - 13.0 I . I .1 - a -- - A 13 tto Charging haraotcriatica For y „e E1 .. •.55,0 olts/veil @3,5°C 1 @3,5°C Rate .2 j...14.U.5A) 4.5 Ah === c° 12.0 Bloc Per Cell C+hygr�g{e Voltage FIo/a113.641a3_e.f ltage__22 230 .°- 11 0 (consan - V 2.34 li < , Ey 1 �14h ge volume 2.402.45 D ch ge-C arr:°.•1 ' 8C A 10.0I Q Discharge 5° eco s ma lm 71 -100%(0.1CA*10h) 0 20 40 60 60 100 , ' e, p,, ) A --50%(0.1CA*5h) c2)t.onstantvoltagecharg REMAINING CAPACITY(°/0) D4seh ge ( .Irr:nt/ ',A Chargevohage:2.45v/ 10 A , a0.- 0.ta- 1.e3 Charge current:0.3CA maximum eon nu• , ©Temperature:25°C (77'F) Self Discharge 21`C i� months @ ----s harge cuutDAN current -- 'to 89%capacity)0 o 6 c _ nternal Resistance Charge Time(hr) 25 and SCeAaUeTdchIOgMae nnatgentiagnhteree Rechargeable Battery-Non-Spillable-AGM ry- Non-Spillable-AGM Due to changes in the manufacturing processes,specifications are subject to change without notice Do not short the battery terminals CAUTION:Do not char e in a sealed container.Avoid Short Circuit. Before using this batt r' aton erfwn a anated a �ttei� with electronte(acid) y -p 11-proof. Most SLA(Sealed Lead Acid)batteries now use t mChina u•rcRn=r°.�°°• s =. • 9 0660 ''°lVdrrnng�(T1+eatebnveGS(.aae. r I "technology. In an AGM battery,fiberglass mats absorb the se e battery. Bec t sorbed by the sponge like mats,it will not leak or spill(pro .rging and usage instructions are followed). Addi s res include the use of special sealing epoxies,tongue and groove case and cover construction as well as long f and connectors. Our AGM batteries are approved for all modes of transport(water,road, rail,air,etc.). nlSrNU 801.88/11 ©Interstate Battery System of America,Inc. 06/12 ower I I ® Batteries Battery Specification Sheet SLA1 1 56 Technical Specifications Nominal Voltage 12.0 V Nominal Capacity 35.0 Ah (20 Hr Rate) Chemistry Lead Acid -AGM 130.0 Physical Specifications Length: 193.5 mm 7.62 in. Width: 130.0 mm 5.12 in. I I 19a5 r I Dimension:rnm(+t-0.5) Height: 166.5 mm 6.56 in. �* I I 1 4 Weight 12.0 kg 26.5 lbs. Terminal Type: Threaded Insert w/Bolt Case Material: Black ABS An, z 166.5 N.Ie,FIYI.�.IW W W 4Na Mlw,fil.tyfrw. Charging Specifications =.-.- Bloc Per Cell v41 07.PRE Charge Voltage Float 13.513.8 2.25-2.30 • (constant) Cycle 14.414.7 2.402.45 _ Max. Charge Current 9.9A 110 0 Approx Final Charge 0.06A (60mA) 14.9 ! MEM ; 3.4 Current (2.25 volts/cell Float) 1.T Approx Final Charge 0.33A (330'mA) - .15 1.0 Current (2.45 volts/cell Cycle) _ / / \ 6.0 Ali Capacity Specifications Dimension: mm (+/- 0.1) Cut-off Voltage 20 Hr Rate (1.75A) 35.0 Ah 1.75 volts/cell @ 25°C 10 Hr Rate (3.02A) 30.2 Ah 1.70 volts/cell @ 25QC 5 Hr Rate (5.61A) 28.0 Ah 1.55 volts/cell @ 25°C 1 Hr Rate (19.8A) 19.8 Ah i f ' AI Discharge Current 280 A (5 seconds maximum) - Discharge Current 100 A IA A R (maximum continuous) Self Discharge 9 months @ 21 cC (to 80%capacity) • Due to changes in the manufacturing processes,specifications are subject to change without notice Via ....„...:r7 4,...... .may �r.F,�~ BAZR2.MH18830 4 Z I} 5 t ower Batteries Battery Specification Sheet SLA1156 DISCHARGE CHARACTERISTIC TEMPERATURE EFFECTS IN RELATION CURVES AT 25°C (77°F) TO BATTERY CAPACITY 2V) s (V) u.J (%) Battery Battery Battery NP Temperature 250C(77°F) 120 13.0- 6.5-4.33 ¢ -__5:_::2 !���11.1 Lu 12.0- 6.0- 4.0 ;�`\'; 100 005CA L7 80 01_- 11.0' S.5-3.87 Q °.1 AO.OSC' U 60 02C ilk1111 E 10.0- -5.0-3.33 r C' 0 11111111.11.1.W''.-- - .-0.4CA I- ■ . 45 .1 AO.BCA I., 40 1GA I- 9.0" -4.5-3.0 i ..'11.1 20 ' ' 3CA 8.0- 4.0-2.67 L 2CA IIIM L.L. 3CA 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 2 4 6 e 10 20 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 (°C) min - .)4 h -.i -24 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 (°F) DISCHARGE TIME TEMPERATURE SELF DISCHARGE CHARACTERISTICS OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE VS REMAINING CAPACITY (%) (V) AT 25°C(77°F) 100 14.0 Y c7 ¢ 75 13.0 I cc z E cc c c.>50 12.0 w 20°C(68°F) z 40°C(104°F) 30°C(86°F) o 25 1 11.0 -- 1 I 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 10.0 0 20 40 60 80 100 STORAGE TIME(MONTHS) REMAINING CAPACITY(%) CYCLE SERVICE LIFE IN RELATION FLOAT SERVICE LIFE TO DEPTH OF DISCHARGE TESTING CONDITIONS:DISCHARGE CURRENT:0.17C AMP.(F.V.1.7V/CELL) co J CHARGING CURRENT:0.09C AMP. ¢ TESTING CONDITIONS:FLOATING VOLTAGE 2.25 TO 2.30V/CELL CHARGING VOLUME:125%OF DISCHARGED CAPACITY 7:cAMBIENT TEMPERATURE:20°C TO 22°C(64°F TO 72°F) (AH%) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:20°C TO 25°C(68°F TO 77°F) ¢ (pH%) 120 ,- 120 00 d 100 80 0 80 0 60 c; c: 40 ¢ 60 100%D.O.D. 50%D.O.D. 30%DEPTH OF DISCHARGE z 20 - - _- z c.1 40 cc c 0 1 2 3 4 5 5.5 LLJd D 20 LIFE(YEARS) D 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 NUMBER OF CYCLES CAUTION:Do not charge in a sealed container.Avoid Short Circuit. Before using this battery in high current applications(>3C),consult with Interstate Batteries. Notes:Leak-proof/spill-proof. Most SLA(Sealed Lead Acid)batteries now use AGM(Absorbent Glass Mat)technology which has largely replaced the old"gel"technology. In an AGM battery,fiberglass mats absorb the acid and hold it against the lead plates inside the battery. Because the acid is absorbed by the sponge-like mats,it will not leak or spill(provided proper charging and usage instructions are followed). Additional safety features include the use of special sealing epoxies,tongue-and-groove case and cover construction as well as long sealing paths for post and connectors. Our AGM batteries are approved for all modes of transport(water,road, rail,air,etc.). ower ® Batteries Battery Specification Sheet SLA1161 L , Technical Specifications Nominal Voltage 12.0 V Nominal Capacity 44.0 Ah (20 Hr Rate) 164.0 Chemistry Lead Acid -AGM Physical Specifications Length: 196.0 mm 7.72 in. ■ 196.0 Dimension:mm{+/-0.5) Width: 164.0 mm 6.46 in. Height: 170.5 mm 6.72 in. Height w/Terminal: 170.5 mm 6.72 in. Weight 14.8 kg 32.6 lbs. 174.5 Terminal Type Threaded Insert ._ Case Material Black ABS "'"" moan r Charging Specifications Bloc Per Cell 0 10'0 Charge Voltage Float 13.613.8 2.262.30 (constant) Cycle 14.5-14.9 2.412.48 14.9 t 3.4 Charging Temperature Range 5°F to 122°F ._...=--.-- 1 .7 (-15°C to 50°C) 1 .0 Maximum Charge Current 12.0 A - 15 6.0 Approx Final Charge 0.08 A 0 Current (2.25 volts/cell Float) _ ��i Approx Final Charge 0.4 A Current (2.45 volts/cell Cycle) Dimension: mm (+f- 0.1) Capacity Specifications Cut-off Voltage 20 Hr Rate (2.00A) 44.0 Ah . - f 1.75 volts/cell @ 25°C 10 Hr Rate (3.68A) 36.8 Ah :-. - r • 1.70 volts/cell @ 25°C 5 Hr Rate (6.50A) 31.0 Ah 1.55 volts/cell @ 25°C 1 Hr Rate (23.2A) 23.2 Ah - . Discharge Current (5 seconds maximum) 300 A Discharge Current (maximum continuous) 100 A Discharge Temperature Range -4°F to 140°F Sa.ale (-20°C to 60°C) Internal Resistance(charged) -'11.0 m1 Due to changes in the manufacturing processes,specifications are subject to change without notice 74.:.,,,„,„ nre Five Rechar 8L {:e 41e B. tter ra b74'. ±^• Y-�1an.�Pilla4le°�sii �. ,II:"4 °b wn^81",rwrr.f,�i ?3 '115411101 interstatebatteries.com ©Interstate Battery System of America,Inc. 01/09 ower Batteries Battery Specification Sheet SLA1161 DISCHARGE CHARACTERISTIC TEMPERATURE EFFECTS IN RELATION CURVES AT 25°C (77°F) TO BATTERY CAPACITY (V) (V) (V) 12V 6V 4V J (%) Battery Battery Battery NP Temperature 25.C(77°F) a° 120 13.0- 6.5-433 J Imo 1z.0- 6.0- 4.0 _ - ��``,I♦\. ¢ 100 - 009CA J U 80 11.0' 5.5-3.67 0 r d Q 0.2 Q r 1 AO.OSC' U BO g 10.0- '5.0-3.33 C o - 0.4CA cc Lu , �1CA0.6CA III ¢ q0 ICA ~ s.o- as-3.0 % 1111111 • 20 3CA e.o- a.o-267 i , 2CA 3CA 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 2 4 6 810 20 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 (°C) Amin .I h H -24 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 (°F) DISCHARGE TIME TEMPERATURE SELF DISCHARGE CHARACTERISTICS OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE VS REMAINING CAPACITY (%) (v) AT 25°C(77°F) 100 14.0 } co Ntilli J ▪ 75 13.0 f — 7.U 2 50 ` _� '. 12.0 M 1 20°C(68°F) z 00 I 40°C(104°F) 30°C(86°F) o 25 I ! 11.0 I Ir 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 10.0 0 20 40 60 80 100 STORAGE TIME(MONTHS) REMAINING CAPACITY(%) CYCLE SERVICE LIFE IN RELATION FLOAT SERVICE LIFE TO DEPTH OF DISCHARGE _J TESTING CONDITIONS:DISCHARGE CURRENT:0.17C AMP.(F.V.1.7V/CELL) -1 co CHARGING CURRENT:0.09C AMP. TESTING CONDITIONS:FLOATING VOLTAGE 2.25 TO 2.30V/CELL CHARGING VOLUME:125%OF DISCHARGED CAPACITY ? AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:20°C TO 22°C(64°F TO 72°F) (AH%) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE:20°C TO 25°C(68°F TO 77°F) Q (AH%) ) B- 120 it 120 a ie. a 100 BD r� o 80 o 60 .W 60 r� 40 100%0.0.0. 50/D.O.D. 30%DEPTH OF DISCHARGE z 20 z U cc 40 z 0 1 2 3 1 5 5.5 a a 20 LIFE(YEARS) D 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 NUMBER OF CYCLES CAUTION:Do not charge in a sealed container.Avoid Short Circuit. Before using this battery in high current applications(>3C),consult with Interstate Batteries. Notes:Leak-proof/spill-proof. Most SLA(Sealed Lead Acid)batteries now use AGM(Absorbent Glass Mat)technology which has largely replaced the old"gel"technology. In an AGM battery,fiberglass mats absorb the acid and hold it against the lead plates inside the battery. Because the acid is absorbed by the sponge-like mats,it will not leak or spill(provided proper charging and usage instructions are followed). Additional safety features include the use of special sealing epoxies,tongue-and-groove case and cover construction as well as long sealing paths for post and connectors. Our AGM batteries are approved for all modes of transport(water,road, rail,air,etc.). interstatebatteries.com ©Interstate Battery System of America,Inc. 01/09 EST Catalog ► Intelligent Initiating Devices EST TM Life Safety & Communications Intelligent Smoke �- • •. Detector with •-•;•si 0,6 -411\14 1 Optional , 1 CO Sensor SIGA2-PS, SIGA2-PCOS _ O Overview Standard Features Signature Series SIGA2-P(CO)S photoelectric detectors bring ad- • Optical smoke sensing technology with optional carbon mon- vanced sensing technology to a practical design that increases ef- oxide sensor ficiency, saves installation time,cuts costs, and extends life safety • Field-replacable smoke chamber and property protection capabilities. Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reliability over the long-haul,while innovative field-replaca- • Field-replacable carbon monoxide sensor/daughterboard ble smoke chambers make detector maintenance literally a snap. module With its modular CO sensor,this detector pulls double-duty — • Uses existing wiring continually monitoring the environment for signs of smoke, as well as its invisible yet deadly companion, carbon monoxide. • Automatic device mapping Like all Signature Series detectors,the SIGA2-P(CO)S is an intel- • Ground fault detection by module ligent device that gathers analog information from its smoke and • Up to 250 devices per loop CO sensor(if present), converting this data into digital signals.To make an alarm decision,the detector's on-board microprocessor • Two levels of environmental compensation measures and analyzes sensor readings and compares this infor- • Two levels of dirty detector warning mation to historical data. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires,thus virtually eliminating unwanted alarms. • Twenty pre alarm settings The SIGA2-PCOS includes an advanced carbon monoxide sensor • Five sensitivity settings and daughterboard.When the electrochemical cell reaches its end • Non-volatile memory of life after approximately six years,the detector signals a trouble • Electronic addressing condition to the control panel.The sensor/daughterboard module is field-replaceable. • Environmental compensation • Identification of dirty or defective detectors • Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment • Bicolor(green/red)status LED • Standard, relay,fault isolator,and audible mounting bases Pagel of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-061 9 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Application Sensing and reporting technology Smoke detection The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional ben- The SIGA2-PS detects extremely small particles of combustion efits-Self-diagnostics and History Log,Automatic Device Map- and triggers an alarm at the first sign of smoke.Thanks to its high- ping,Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. performance forward scattering reflective response technology, Self-diagnostics and History Log- Each Signature Series the photoelectric smoke sensor responds quickly and reliably to detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte- a wide range of fire types, especially slow burning fires fuelled by nance information.The results of the self-check are automatically combustibles typically found in modern multi-use buildings. updated and permanently stored in the detector's non-volatile memory Carbon monoxide detection CO detection has rapidly become a standard part of life safety Automatic Device Mapping-The loop controller learns where strategies everywhere. Monitored CO detection is becoming each device's serial number address is installed relative to other mandated with increasing frequency in all types of commercial devices on the circuit.The mapping feature provides supervision applications, but particularly in occupancies such as hotels, room- of each device's installed location to prevent a detector from being ing houses, dormitories, day care facilities,schools, hospitals, reinstalled(after cleaning etc.)in a different location from where it assisted living facilities, and nursing homes. In fact, more than half was originally. of the U.S. population already lives in states requiring the instal- Stand-alone Operation-A decentralized alarm decision by the lation of CO detectors in some commercial occupancies.This detector is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the detector is because carbon monoxide is the leading cause of accidental to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communi- poisoning deaths in America. Known as the"Silent Killer,"CO is cations fail for more than four seconds,all devices on that circuit odorless,tasteless,and colorless. It claims nearly 500 lives, and go into stand-alone mode.The circuit acts like a conventional results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. alarm receiving circuit. Fast Stable Communication -On-board intelligence means less Installation information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response,the Signature Series detectors mount to North American 1-gang detector only needs to communicate with the loop controller when boxes,3-1/2 inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, and to 4 inch square it has something new to report. electrical boxes 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)deep.They mount to Euro- pean BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. See mounting base installation and wiring for more information. Accessories Detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- sible from the"room-side"after mounting the base to the electrical Testing & Maintenance box.The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to Each detector automatically identifies when it is dirty or defective 3'/z inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1'/z inches(38 mm)deep.They and causes a"dirty detector"message.The detector's sensitiv- also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers.The SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 mount to ity measurement can also be transmitted to the loop controller.A North American 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above sensitivity report can be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity mea- boxes.They include the SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt which is used to surements which must be conducted at the end of the first year cover the"mounting ears"on the base.The SIGA-AB4G mounts and every two years thereafter. to a 4"square box only. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each detector and other pertinent messages. Single detectors /��r may be turned off temporarily from the control panel.Availability c1 it 021 of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm systemir used. When the CO sensor's electrochemical cell reaches its end of life,the detector signals a trouble condition to the control panel. SIGA-AB4G/T SIGA-SB SIGA-IB SIGA-RB SIGA-LED Audible Base Standard Base Isolator Base Relay Base Remote LED The sensor/daughterboard module is field-replaceable. Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper detector operation Remote LED SIGA-LED-The remote LED connects to the should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Hav- SIGA-SB or SIGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North ing Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA 720, and American size 1-gang plastic faceplate with a white finish and red ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. alarm LED. SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt-Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke surface imperfections not covered by the smaller bases. cannot reach the detector.Smoke from fires in walls, roofs,or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector to SIGA-AB4G and SIGA-AB4GT-These sounder bases are de- alarm it. signed for use where localized or group alarm signaling is required. The SIGA-AB4G is compatible with Signature Series smoke and heat detectors.The SIGA-AB4GT sounder base,when used with the SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator module,adds an audible output function to any Signature Series detector, including fire and CO detectors. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-061 9 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Typical Wiring Audible Detector Base for CO The detector mounting bases accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16 and Fire Detectors,SIGA-AB4GT (1.0mm2), #14 AWG(1.5mm2), and#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire sizes. The Signature Series AB4GT sounder base,when used with the Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator, adds an audible output preferredfunction to any Signature Series detector. For more information on for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller this device, refer to Data Sheet 85001-0623--Sounder Base for catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. CO and Fire Detectors. . r) . Standard Detector Base,SIGA-SB,SIGA-SB4 2 1 ® 1 =_ This is the basic mounting base Remote LED I —u— 1 ® 000 for Edwards Signature Series de- 1 Max resistance tectors.The SIGA-LED Remote 4E1, per wire _ + must not exceed 1— LED LED is supported by the Stan- 10 ohms o dard Base. ktp o Z ZTerm Description + i ¢ ¢ ¢1 Not Used C" co ,. dad2 DATA IN/OUT(+) � co co 0 0 0 3 Not Used 0„-4OC��,. 0 ///p 4 DATA IN(-) F T`I -�Y -til 5 Remote LED(-) DATA IN I-1 a i O DATA OUT(-) 11IuU!' 6 Remote LED(+) ,ui.� TCDR Riser+ A 1� 111.1 A TCDR Riser+ 7 Not Used TCDR Riser- ,111■ �.1I111■, TCDR Riser- 8 DATA OUT- DATA IN 1+1 DATA OUT(+1 () From Signature Controller To Next Device SLC+ ; :�; SLC+ or Previous Device SLC- SLC- v Isolator Detector Base,SIGA-IB,SIGA-1B4 0 0 This base includes a built-in line fault isolator for use on Class A 1. Volume setting.Default is high volume.For low volume,cut trace per item 4. circuits.A detector must be installed for it to operate.The isolator 2. Reserved for future use.Do not cut. base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. 3. Reserved for future use.Do not cut. The isolator operates as follows: 4. To configure output volume,cut trace as shown. -a short on the line causes all iso- Oo: rr 5. To next SIGA-AB4GT sounder base or EOL relay. lators to open within 23 msec a 6. SLC_OUT to next intelligent addressable device. -at 10 msec intervals, `o . ��J 7. SLC_IN from intelligent addressable controller or previous device. beginning on one side _7�` 8. From SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator or previous SIGA-AB4GT i of the Class A DATA IN(-) \ (�'—z� / DATA OUT(-) sounder base. circuit nearest the loop controller,the isolators close to provide the DATA IN(+) DATA OUT(+) next isolator down the From Signature Controller To Next Device or Previous Device Audible Detector Base,SIGA-AB4G line with power Term Description 1 Not Used -when the isolator next to 2 DATA IN/OUT(+) This base is designed for use where localized or group alarm sig- the short closes,reopens within 10 msec. 3 DATA IN(-) naling is required.When the detector senses an alarm condition, 4 Not Used Theprocess repeats beginning on the 5 Not Used the audible base emits a local alarm signal.The optional SIGA-CRR p g g 6 DATA OUT(-) Polarity Reversal Relay can be used for sounding to other audible other side of the loop controller. 7 Not Used bases on the same 24 Vdc circuit. ® 0 0 Relay Detector Base,SIGA-RB,SIGA-RB4 Volume setting Tone setting Normally-Normally- Common Closed Open Default=High volume Default=Temporal pattern This base includes a relay. Nor- cut for low volume ® ® Cut for steady tone mally open or closed operation DAT,DATA. is selected during installation. II II oll� II IIT o �� The dry contact is rated for 1 amp f a I 17-I11.I.-.I I ^.' r>rllll,rr To configure output volume (pilot duty)CO 30 Vdc.The relay's „:-.. 1,}1t-di .. + +1 or tone,cut the circuit board 7.f tt t_ t tntImr as shown position is supervised to avoid ac- cidentallyjarringit out ofposition. Ili24vdcin - 111111 •„la24 Vdc out-power To next base or EOL relay a control relay if programmed to I Data in do so at the control panel(EST3 DATA IN(+) DATA OUT(+) From Signature controller or - Data out From Signa}ure Con roller To Next Device previous device + +To next Signature device V.2 only).The relay base does not or Previous Device support the SIGA-LED Remote Term D 1 NormTerm allyslly on Open Relay and Audible Bases operate as follows: LED. CONTACT RATING 2 DATA IN/OUT(+) -at system power-up or reset,the relay is de-energized 1.0 Amp(e3 30 VDC 3 Common (Pilot Duty) 4 DATA IN(-) -when a detector is installed in the base with the power 5 Not Used 6 Normally-Closed on,the relay energizes for four seconds,then de-energizes 7 DATA OUT(-) -when a detector is removed from a base with the power on, the relay is de-energized -when the detector enters the alarm state,the relay is energized. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0619 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Compatibility TOWARDS SIGA2-P(CO)S detectors are compatible only with the Signature Loop Controller. A UTC Fire&Security Company Detection&alarm since 1872 Warnings & Cautions u.s. This detector will not operate without electrical power.As fires frequently cause power T 888 378 2329 interruption,we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your fire protection specialist. F 866 503 3996 This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke cannot reach the detec- Canada tor.Smoke from fires in walls, roofs,or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach Chubb Edwards the detector to alarm it. T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Southeast Asia F:+6563919306 Specifications F:+65 6391 9306 India SIGA2-PS SIGA2-PCOS T:+91 80 4344 2000 Normal operating current 45 pA 70 pA F:+91 80 4344 2050 Alarm current 18 mA 18 mA Australia Standalone alarm current 45 pA 70 pA T+61 3 9239 1200 Operating voltage 15.20 to 19.95 VDC F+61 3 9239 1299 Air velocity 0 to 4,000 ft./min(0 to 20 m/s). Europe Construction High impact engineering polymer T+32 2 725 11 20 Wall mounting Maximum 12 in(305 mm)from ceiling F+32 2 721 86 13 Mounting Plug-in Shipping weight 0.44 lb.(164 g) Latin America Compatible bases See Ordering Information T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 Operating environment 32 to 120°F(0 to 49°C),0 to 93%RH,noncondensing Storage temperature —4 to 140°F(-20 to 60°C) utcfireandsecurity.com Environmental compensation Automatic ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. Ordering Information Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lbs(kg) SIGA2-PS Intelligent Photoelectric Detector 0.4(0.16) SIGA2-PCOS Intelligent Photoelectric Detector with carbon monoxide sensor 0.4(0.16) SIGA2 PCOS CA Intelligent Photoelectric Detector with carbon monoxide sensor 0.4(0.16) (for use in Canadian markets only). SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base-Standard SIGA-SB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base c/w Trim Skirt SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Base w/Relay SIGA-RB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Relay, c/w Trim Skirt 0.2(.09) SIGA-IB Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator SIGA-IB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator,c/w Trim Skirt SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED(not for EN54 applications) SIGA-AB4G Audible(Sounder)Base for Fire Detectors 0.3(0.15) SIGA-AB4GT Audible(Sounder)Base for CO and Fire Detectors 0.3(0.15) SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator 0.3(0.15) SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt(supplied with 4-inch bases) 0.1 (.04) 2-SPRC1° Replacement Smoke Chamber(for SIGA2-PS detectors) 0.1 (.04) 2-SPRC2° Replacement Smoke Chamber(for SIGA2-PCOS detectors) 0.1 (.04) 2-CORPL° Replacement CO Sensor 0.1 (.04) `Release pending. a 0 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0619 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 EST Catalog ► Intelligent Initiating Devices EST TM Life Safety & Communications Intelligent Heat •- •. Detectors with N Optional CO Sensors SIGA2-HFS, SIGA2-HRS, SIGA2-HCOS Overview Standard Features Signature Series fixed temperature and rate-of-rise heat detec- Note:Some features described here may not be supported by tors bring advanced sensing technology to a practical design all control systems. Check your control panel's Installation and that increases efficiency, saves installation time, cuts costs, and Operation Guide for details. extends property protection capabilities. Continuous self-diagnos • Fixed temperature or rate-of-rise heat detection with optional tics ensure reliability over the long-haul,while the latest thermister carbon monoxide sensor technology makes these detectors ideal whereever dependable heat detection is required.With their modular CO sensor,these • Field-replacable carbon monoxide sensor/daughterboard devices pull double-duty — continually monitoring the environ- module ment for heat from combustion, as well as its invisible yet deadly • Uses existing wiring companion, carbon monoxide. • Like all Signature Series detectors,these are intelligent device Automatic device mapping that gather analog information from their heat and CO sensor(if • Ground fault detection by module present),converting this data into digital signals.To make an alarm • Up to 250 devices per loop decision,the detector's on-board microprocessor measures and analyzes sensor readings and compares this information to histori- • Non-volatile memory cal data. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of • Electronic addressing fires,thus virtually eliminating unwanted alarms. • Bicolor(green/red)status LED The SIGA2-HCOS is a fixed temperature heat detector that includes an advanced carbon monoxide sensor and daughter- • Standard, relay,fault isolator, and audible mounting bases board.When the electrochemical cell reaches its end of life after • 50 foot(15.2 meter)spacing approximately six years,the detector signals a trouble condition • 15°F(8°C)per minute rate-of-rise alarm point(HRS) to the control panel.The sensor/daughterboard module is field- replaceable. • 135°F(57°C)fixed temperature alarm point(HFS/HCOS) Pagel of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0620 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Application Sensing and reporting technology Heat detection The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional ben- SIGA2-HRS rate-of-rise heat detectors provide a 15°F(9°C)per efits-Self-diagnostics and History Log,Automatic Device Map- minute rate-of-rise heat sensor for the detection of heat due to fire. ping,Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. The heat sensor monitors the temperature of the air and deter- Self-diagnostics and History Log- Each Signature Series mines whether an alarm should be initiated. detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte- SIGA2-HFS and SIGA2-HCOS fixed temperature heat detec- nance information.The results of the self-check are automatically tors provide a 135°F(57°C)fixed-temperature heat sensor for updated and permanently stored in the detector's non-volatile the detection of heat due to fire.The heat sensor monitors the memory temperature of the air and determines whether an alarm should be Automatic Device Mapping-The loop controller learns where initiated. each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit.The mapping feature provides supervision Carbon monoxide detection of each device's installed location to prevent a detector from being The SIGA2-HCOS includes a replaceable chemical cell for the reinstalled(after cleaning etc.)in a different location from where it detection of carbon monoxide(CO).CO detection has rapidly was originally. become a standard part of life safety strategies everywhere. Stand-alone Operation-A decentralized alarm decision by the Monitored CO detection is becoming mandated with increasing detector is guaranteed. On-board intelligence permits the detector frequency in all types of commercial applications, but particularly to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communi- in occupancies such as hotels, rooming houses, dormitories,day cations fail for more than four seconds,all devices on that circuit care facilities,schools, hospitals,assisted living facilities, and nurs- go into stand-alone mode.The circuit acts like a conventional ing homes. In fact, more than half of the U.S. population already alarm receiving circuit. lives in states requiring the installation of CO detectors in some commercial occupancies.This is because carbon monoxide is the Fast Stable Communication -On-board intelligence means less leading cause of accidental poisoning deaths in America. Known information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop as the"Silent Killer,"CO is odorless,tasteless, and colorless. It controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response,the claims nearly 500 lives, and results in more than 15,000 hospital detector only needs to communicate with the loop controller when visits annually. it has something new to report. Installation Accessories Installation Detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- Signature Series detectors mount to North American sible from the"room-side"after mounting the base to the electrical ••" � box.The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to 1-gang boxes, 3-1/2 inch (` o�``''' 31h inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 11h inches(38 mm)deep.They or 4 inch octagon boxes, 0 also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm and to 4 inch square electri- 01116.V0111111% fixing centers.The SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 mount to cal boxes 1-1/2 inches(38North American 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above mm)deep.They mount to 10.41.1.1:1211111,11_ 110,�i boxes.They include the SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt which is used to European BESA and 1-gang �; :I cover the"mounting ears"on the base.The SIGA-AB4G mounts boxes with 60.3 mm fixing 1.Tamper-resist lever arm on base to a 4"square box only. centers. See mounting base (Break off to disable.) installation and wiring for 2.Access slot for tamper-resist mechanism /lam ; . 0 o more information. I+1 £ � >> to 0---"*... A. ' . , � �, SIGA-AB4G/T SIGA-SB SIGA-IB SIGA-RB SIGA-LED Testing & Maintenance Audible Base Standard Base Isolator Base Relay Base Remote LED The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state Remote LED SIGA-LED-The remote LED connects to the of each detector and other pertinent messages. Single detectors SIGA-SB or SIGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North may be turned off temporarily from the control panel.Availability American size 1-gang plastic faceplate with a white finish and red of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system alarm LED. used. When the CO sensor's electrochemical cell reaches its end SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt-Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also of life,the detector signals a trouble condition to the control panel. be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide The sensor/daughterboard module is field-replaceable. Scheduled surface imperfections not covered by the smaller bases. maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper detector operation SIGA-AB4G and SIGA-AB4GT-These sounder bases are de- should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Hav- signed for use where localized or group alarm signaling is required. ing Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA 720, and The SIGA-AB4G is compatible with Signature Series smoke and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. heat detectors.The SIGA-AB4GT sounder base,when used with the SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator module,adds an audible output function to any Signature Series detector, including Compatibility fire and CO detectors. SIGA2-PS detectors are compatible only with the Signature Loop Controller. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0620 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Typical Wiring Audible Detector Base for CO The detector mounting bases accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16 and Fire Detectors,SIGA-AB4GT (1.0mm2), #14 AWG(1.5mm2), and#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire sizes. The Signature Series AB4GT sounder base,when used with the Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator, adds an audible output preferredfunction to any Signature Series detector. For more information on for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller this device, refer to Data Sheet 85001-0623--Sounder Base for catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. CO and Fire Detectors. . c- 0 Standard Detector Base,SIGA-SB,SIGA-SB4 z 1 ® 1 =_ This is the basic mounting base Remote LED I -u- 1 ® 000 for Edwards Signature Series de- 1 Max resistance tectors.The SIGA-LED Remote 4IIli per wire _ + must not exceed r LED is supported by the Stan- >ool,me o dard Base. o . .Term Description + ¢ ¢ ¢1 Not Used Ati„- t"" co ° ¢ a a 2 DATA IN/OUT(+) �f `� � C3 o in 0 3 Not Used 0 0'c,, 0 4 DATA IN(-) F=_T`I I-IYI 0 5 Remote LED(-) DATA IN I-1 I DATA OUT 1-I 11����' 6 Remote LED(+) ,ui.1 TCDR Riser+ A 1� le.' A TCDR Riser+ 7 Not Used TCDR Riser- ,_ �.•'_, TCDR Riser- 8 DATA OUT- DATA IN 1+1 DATA OUT(+1 () From Signature Controller To Next Device SLC+ ; :�; SLC+ or Previous Device SLC- v SLC- Isolator Detector Base,SIGA-IB,SIGA-1B4 0 O This base includes a built-in line fault isolator for use on Class A 1. Volume setting.Default is high volume.For low volume,cut trace per item 4. circuits.A detector must be installed for it to operate.The isolator 2. Reserved for future use.Do not cut. base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. 3. Reserved for future use.Do not cut. The isolator operates as follows: 4. To configure output volume,cut trace as shown. -a short on the line causes all iso- / 6.F. 0 O- 0 5. To next SIGA-AB4GT sounder base or EOL relay. lators to open within 23 msec i © oat- 6. SLC_OUT to next intelligent addressable device. -at 10 msec intervals, L o 7. SLC_IN from intelligent addressable controller or previous device. beginningone side ,,,„12,407,„,If T 8. From SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator or previous SIGA-AB4GT of the Classs A DATA IN(-) .z l / DATA OUT(-) sounder base. circuit nearest the loop controller,the isolators close to provide the DATA IN(+) DATA OUT(+) From Signature Controller To Next Device next isolator down the or Previous Device Audible Detector Base,SIGA-AB4G line with power Term Description 1 Not Used This base is designed for use where localized or group alarm sig- -when the isolator next to 2 DATA IN/OUT(+) naling is required.When the detector senses an alarm condition, the short closes,reopens within 10 msec. 3DNot UsedATA IN ) the audible base emits a local alarm signal.The optional SIGA-CRR Theprocess repeats beginning on the 5 Not Used Polarity Reversal Relay can be used for sounding to other audible p g g 6 DATA OUT(-) bases on the same 24 Vdc circuit. other side of the loop controller. 7 Not Used ® 0 0 Relay Detector Base,SIGA-RB,SIGA-RB4 Volume setting Tone setting Normally-Normally- Default=High volume Default=Temporal pattern Common Closed Open Cut for low volume ® Cut for steady tone This base includes a relay. Norco - mally open or closed operation °' °"IN'"IN- T is selected during installation. I(II�I(II�III�III�III o �— t+t+t—t tt To configure output volume The dry contact is rated for 1 amp 5. 1101, ,I,VP g-10 or tone,cut the circuit board (pilot duty)@ 30 Vdc.The relay's as shown. 111111 position is supervised to avoid ac- 24 Vdc in - - 24 Vdc out 3 Frompowersu or+ ■M■� cidentally jarring it out of position. ,_� supply *To next base or EOL relay The SIGA-RB can be operated as DATA IN(-) , z ,rr DATA OUT c> previous base .,I a control relayif programmed to Data inr Data out p g From Signature controller or do so at the control panel(EST3 DATA IN(+) DATA OUT Co) previous device + To neat Signature device From Signa}ure Con}roller To Next Device V.2 only).The relay base does not or Previous Device Relay and Audible Bases operate as follows: support the SIGA-LED Remote Term Description 1 Normally Open -at system power-upor reset,the relayis de-energized LED. CONTACT RATING 2 DATA IN/OUT(+) Y g 1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC 3 Common -when a detector is installed in the base with the power (Pilot Duty) 4 DATA IN 5 Not Used) on,the relay energizes for four seconds,then de-energizes 6 Normally-Closed -when a detector is removed from a base with the power on, 7 DATA OUT(-) the relay is de-energized -when the detector enters the alarm state,the relay is energized. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0620 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Warnings & Cautions ToWAR D S • This detector does not operate without electrical power.As fires frequently cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards with the local fire protection specialist. A UTC Fire&Security Company • This detector does not sense fires in areas where heat cannot reach the detector. Detection&alarm since 1872 Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector. U.S. T 888 378 2329 • This heat detector by itself does not provide life safety protection Use this detector F 866 503 3996 with ionization and/or photoelectric smoke detectors. Canada • This detector does not detect oxygen levels, smoke,toxic gases,or flames. Use this Chubb Edwards device as part of a broad-based life safety program which includes a variety of infor- T 519 376 2430 mation sources pertaining to heat and smoke levels,extinguishment systems,visual F 519 376 7258 and audible devices, and other safety measures. Southeast Asia • Independent studies indicate that heat detectors should only be used when property T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 protection alone is involved. Never rely on heat detectors as the sole means of fire protection. India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia Specifications T+61 3 9239 1200 SIGA2-HRS SIGA2-HFS SIGA2-HCOS F+61 3 9239 1299 Normal operating current 45 pA 45 pA 45 pA Europe Standalone alarm current 18 mA 18 mA 18 mA T+32 2 725 11 20 Alarm Current 45 pA 45 pA 45 pA F+32 2 721 86 13 Actual alarm point 15°F(8°C)/min. 130 to 140°F(54 to 60°C) Latin America Operating voltage 15.20 to 19.95 VDC T 305 593 4301 Maximum spacing 50 ft.(15.2 m)centers* F 305 593 4300 Construction High impact engineering polymer utcfireandsecurity.com Mounting Plug-in Shipping weight 0.44 lb.(164 g) ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Compatible bases See Ordering Information All rights reserved. Operating environment 32°F to 100°F(0°C to 38°C),0 to 93%RH,noncondensing Storage temperature —4°F to 140°F(—20°C to 60°C) *When replacing SIGA-HRS/HFS ensure spacing is 50ft or less. Ordering Information Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lbs(kg) SIGA2-HRS Intelligent rate-of-rise heat detector 0.4(0.16) SIGA2-HFS Intelligent fixed temperature heat detector 0.4(0.16) SIGA2-HCOS Intelligent fixed temperature heat detector with CO sensor 0.4(0.16) SIGA2 HCOS CA Intelligent fixed temperature heat detector with CO sensor 0.4(0.16) (for use in Canadian markets only) SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base-Standard SIGA-SB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base c/w Trim Skirt SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Base w/Relay SIGA-RB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Relay, c/w Trim Skirt 0.2(.09) SIGA-IB Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator SIGA-IB4 4-inch Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator,c/w Trim Skirt SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED(not for EN54 applications) SIGA-AB4G Audible(Sounder)Base for Fire Detectors 0.3(0.15) SIGA-AB4GT Audible(Sounder)Base for CO and Fire Detectors 0.3(0.15) SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator 0.3(0.15) SIGA-TS4 Trim Skirt(supplied with 4-inch bases) 0.1 (.04) 2-CORPL` Replacement CO Sensor 0.1 (.04) `Release pending. Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0620 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 EST Catalog ► Intelligent Initiating r--E------sTrM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications SIGA-TCDR :_ r �_ ; iiiilifll .--; I Sounder base •7. ��"" + •i, . - ; forGO and fire , .,.5 ��.., \\7 � detectors � r� ...vy V \co,t ..: i � SIGA-AB4GT, SIGA-TCDR0 r • • A SIGA-AB4GT Description Standard Features The Signature Series AB4GT sounder base,which requires the • Compatible with CO,smoke,and heat detectors use of a SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator, adds an audible Approved audible output facilitated by the SIGA-TCDR Tempo- output function to any Signature Series detector.The SIGA-TCDR ral Pattern Generator module. requires EST3 control with V4.0 firmware or higher. It uses the • High or low dB output same address and programming label as the detector it supports. Jumper selects low or high dBA output. The AB4GT is field-configurable for output volume(low or high • Single or group operation dBA). By default,the SIGA-AB4GT sounder base is set for high Optional polarity reversing module configures base for group dBA. alarm output. AB4GT sounder bases on the same circuit may be activated as • UL268, UL464,and UL2075 listed a group or zone with the use of a SIGA-CRR polarity reversal UL listing under smoke detector, CO detector, and audible module. signal standards allows application as smoke alarm, CO alarm Additionally,the AB4GT sounder base can simply operate according and/or audible signal. to the state of its detector,or it can be configured through system • Attractive installation programming to operate in conjuction with all sounder bases on the Flush mount to a wide selection of North American boxes or same circuit,or it can be controlled by program rules. surface mount to optional custom-matched box. The base generates a loud piercing tone that has excellent wall penetration qualities. It uses the same tone generator found in the award-winning Genesis line of wall and ceiling horns. The AB4GT sounder base matches the finish of Signature Se- ries detectors and the sound output slots complement the smoke/heat/CO entry openings of the detector.The result is a compact unit with a clean attractive appearance. Pagel of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0623 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Application SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator The Signature Series AB4GT sounder base is for use with Sig- The SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator is an addressable nature Series detectors in applications where localized or group device that generates sound patterns for carbon monoxide(CO) alarm signaling is required.The base uses the same address and and fire signals for the AB4GT sounder base.The control panel programming label as the detector it supports. sends synchronization and channel commands to the SIGA- The base is listed by Underwriters Laboratories under the UL268, TCDR;the channel selection determines the pattern. In the U.S. UL464, and UL2075 standards,allowing its application where Channel 1 is TC3 and Channel 2 is TC4. In Europe, Channel 1 is TC4 and Channel 2 is TC3(in case both channels are activated, smoke alarms, CO alarms, and/or notification appliances are required.This makes the AB4GT ideal for hotels, dormitories, and Channel 1 has priority). Other markets depend on local require- ment other residential occupancies where supplementary audible output is required to meet required sound levels for sleeping areas or Temporal patterns areas subject to high levels of ambient noise. Name Code Used for TC4 UL2075 CO CO Applications TC3 NFPA 72 Fire When an AB4GT gets a signal from its detector to activate,there The SIGA-TCDR module uses two addresses on the signaling line is a delay so the AB4GT doesn't immediately go in steady tone. circuit(SLC).Address 1 is tied to Channel 1;Address 2 is tied to When the AB4GT detects pulses on the TCDR riser, it activates Channel 2. the sounder. If there are no pulses,the AB4GT just sounds steady after the short delay expires. Depending on the type of alarm,the panel can select the cor- AUX_RISER_IN+ AUX_RISER_OUT+ responding pattern and send the activation command to the AUX RISER IN- AUX RISER OUT- SIGA-TCDR. 0 To control all sounder bases in the loop, use a SIGA-CRR module. 0 0 The panel sends a signal to the SIGA-CRR so it flips the reverse �7TT� relay.With the polarity on the riser reversed, all the sounder bases 8 7 6 5 on this loop activate.The SIGA-TCDR maintains synchronization TCDR by processing the SYNC commands from the loop controller. 0 0 0 1 Configuration 4 3 2 2 © From previous device ' To next device ® I =_ I SLC_IN+ SLC_OUT+ L�� ® 000 0 SLC_IN- SLC_OUT r o 1. Use a power-limited and regulated 24 VDC primary or auxiliary power supply that o z z is UL/ULC listed for fire protective signaling systems. + aa + 2. Power out to AB4GT sounder base or listed EOL relay and supervising module 0 <,) � 000 TCDR Riser+ TCDR Riser+ TCDR Riser- �.„-, TCDR Riser- SLC+ • SLC+ SLC- : I SLC- O 0 1. Volume setting.Default is high volume.For low volume,cut trace per item 4. 2. Reserved for future use.Do not cut. 3. Reserved for future use.Do not cut. 4. To configure output volume,cut trace as shown. 5. To next SIGA-AB4GT sounder base or EOL relay. 6. SLC_OUT to next intelligent addressable device. 7. SLC_IN from intelligent addressable controller or previous device. 8. From SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator or previous SIGA-AB4GT sounder base. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEE 85001-0623 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Typical Wiring Installation and Mounting CO system wiring AB4GT AB4GT Flush Mounting:The sounder base flush mounts into 2-1/8 inch for detectorfiii- 0 UM 0 (54 mm) aNorth an 4 ucbox, operation of bases North American 4 x 4 inch octagonal concrete ring(mud box),and MI standard Europeanst100ndard mm squareAmericelectric boxes.inchsqare Theeleterminal tric 3 block makes field wire connections fast and efficient.After wiring,a deep " 6 simple push and twist motion locks the Signature detector into the 1111111 1111111 base. di OSAXX__R -+ _I OO l O O .1Data from signature J. 011 _ TCDR controller '6 LI `�./ / _J 2. Use a 24 VDC primary or auxiliary (t■` :� 4 P2 P power supply that is ULULC Listed for ,_ o M 7 o fire protective signaling systems Electrical Box -r O si + I- 3. Listed 24 V EOL supervising equipment? ! � � AB4G-SB f;- I{lZ ` Optional Surface Box CO system wiring 1i�� _ _tib/ (6.8"diameter x 1.8"deep) for detector and ,iiiiii 0 fill e system operation Base Plate of bases O_s 'h0,10 0,1 0 Edwards recommends that life "" safety systems and their devices l��I.'j-"".�l ; always th be installedtrcoin accordance of f�l,�� with the latest recognized edition of �IiII� 0 Ring national and local fire alarm codes. AUX RISERt =1�1I Trim EjAUXRISER- ^ mI - B765 3765 igCRR 0 0 1. Data from signature controller 0 0 o 9 2. Use a 24 VDC primary or o L:.1 o o o auxiliary power supply that Sound Level Output 0:', 11 I� is ULULC Listed for fire s« Signal Voltage Low dBA High dBA protective signaling systems 3. Listed 24 V EOL supervising equipment Reverberant room per UL 4641 TC3(fire pattern) 16 VDC 80.5 85.2 TC4(CO pattern) 16 VDC 73.9 77.5 Reverberant room per UL 268 and FM 2 AB4GT Operating current in mA (RMS) TC3(fire pattern) 16 VDC 86.5 90.8 TC4(CO pattern) 16 VDC 77.5 84.1 Voltage Low dBA High dBA 16 VDC 17 24 VDC 24 41 Sound pressure level per CAN/ULC-S525 3 33 VDC 31 52 Temporal 24 VDC 95 91 Steady 24 VDC 93 89 16 VFWR 41 48 24 VFWR 51 60 1 For UL 464 applications,low dBA settings are for private mode only. 33 VFWR 60 66 2 For UL 268 applications,the high setting must be used for evacuation. VDC=Volts direct current,regulated and filtered 3 Voltage is regulated and filtered. VFWR=Volts full wave rectified Audible directional characteristics Angle(degrees) Output sound pressure level 90(ref) 0 dBA 75 and 110 —3 dBA 55 and 115 —6 dBA ULC anechoic room Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0623 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 AB4GT Specifications TOWARDS Riser operating voltage 16 to 33 VDC Current(RMS) A UTC Fire&Security Company Operating 31 mA(low dBA);52 mA(high dBA) Supervisory DC=1.46 mA, FWR=2.15 mA Detection&alarm since 1872 Default output volume High dBA U.S. Resonant frequency 3.2 kHz T 888 378 2329 Temporal pattern As determined by the SIGA-TCDR F 866 503 3996 Compatible detectors All Signature Series detectors connected to a 3-SDU version 3.8 Canada or higher using the latest microcode Chubb Edwards Compatible electrical boxes AB4G-SB surface box for audible base;4 in.square by 2-1/2 T 519 376 2430 in.(64 mm)deep box;3-1/2 in.octagonal by 2-1/2 in.(64 mm) F 519 376 7258 deep box;Standard European 100 mm2 box Wire size 12 to 18 AWG(0.75 to 2.50 mm2) Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 Base diameter 6.8 in.(173 mm) F:+65 6391 9306 Base height from box 0.8 in.(21 mm) Maximum distance from ceiling Wall mount— 12 in.(305 mm) India Environment type Indoor only T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Operating environment Temperature 32 to 120°F(0 to 49°C) Australia Relative humidity 0 to 93%noncondensing T+61 3 9239 1200 Storage temperature -4 to 140°F(-20 to 60°C) F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Ordering Information Latin America Catalog Number Description Ship Wt.,lb.(kg) T 305 593 4301 SIGA-AB4GT Audible(Sounder)Base for CO and Fire Detectors 0.3(0.15) F 305 593 4300 SIGA-TCDR Temporal Pattern Generator 0.2 (0.1) AB4G-SB Surface Box for Audible Base 1.0(0.45) utcfi reandsecu rity.com ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Related Equipment All rights reserved. SIGA-MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay (Plug-in UIO module) 0.18 (0.08) SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay (Standard mount module) 0.2 (0.1) SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module (Plug-in UIO module) 0.18 (0.08) SIGA-CR Control Relay Module (Standard mount module) 0.2 (0.1) SIGA-RM1 Riser Monitor Module 0.2 (0.1) G1M-RM Signal Master (1-gang remote mount) 0.2 (0.1) a 0 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEE 85001-0623 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 EST Catalog►Conventional Initiating ESTrM )1111/Life Safety & Communications Rate- of- rise/Fixed Temperature Heat 7".- 1111111— . .111:111111111111)( Detectors °1 ` .1/4) CR/CF Series 44411:agiolipPVIMP. : Overview Standard Features CR/CF Series heat detectors offer fixed temperature or combina- • Double pole — normally open contact tion rate-of-rise and fixed temperature detection. • Low profile RATE-OF-RISE:A temperature increase at the sensor of 15°F • Aluminum finish (9°C)or more per minute activates the rate-of-rise feature.This closes the contacts in the sensor to transmit the alarm condition • Mounting flexibility with screw terminals to the fire alarm control panel.When the rate-of-rise element alone • Positive alarm indication — for fixed temperature element has been activated,the sensor is self-restoring. FIXED TEMPERATURE: If the temperature of the center disk • 70 ft. spacing(CR models only) rises to the sensor's rated temperature,the fixed temperature element activates.This closes contacts in the sensor and trans- mits an alarm condition to the fire alarm control panel.The fixed Application temperature element is non-restorable and,when activated,the Heat detectors are most suitable for environments where rapid fire detector must be replaced.The need for replacement is indicated development can be expected.When selecting the location on the when the center disk has fallen free from the detector. ceiling for the heat sensor, do not locate it in direct path of hot or cold air flow. Refer to the detector specifications for the recom- mended maximum spacing. Earlier detector response may be obtained by reducing the spacing between detectors. Page 1 of 2 DATA SHEET 85001-0367 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2.1 Mounting Wiring TOWARDS CR/CF Series heat detectors are supplied with a metal mounting plate.The plate A UTC Fire&Security Company installs directly to a standard North Ameri- N/o ���•�, -�I can 31/4 or 4 inch octagon box.Once the "/o �',,,Detection&alarm since 1872 � .,� �X mounting plate is fixed, a simple twist will �,O moi' u.s. hold the detector in place. T 888-378-2329 DOUBLE CIRCUIT NORMALLY OPEN F 866-503-3996 q^-1: ii \\..,/Canada ) — _ Chubb Edwards I I T 519 376 2430 ' F 519 376 7258 2' Southeast Asia (5.1) T:+65 6391 9300 � - F:+65 6391 9306 India mil T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia Specifications T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Catalog Number CR135-2 CR200-2 CF135-2 CF200-2 Europe UL Temperature Rating 135°F(57°C) 200°F(93°C) 135°F(57°C) 200°F(93°C) T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 UL Max Ambient Temp. 100°F(38°C) 150°F(66°C) 100°F(38°C) 150°F(66°C) at Ceiling Latin America Fixed Temperature and Rate-of- T 305 593 4301 Detector Type Rise Rate-of-rise: 15°F(9°C), Fixed Temperature Only F 305 593 4300 self restoring utcfireandsecurity.com UL Recommended 4,900 ft.2(456 m2) 1,600 ft.2(149 m2) Coverage` ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. UL Recommended All rights reserved. Spacing 70 ft.(21.3 m) 40 ft.(12.2 m) 35 ft.(10.5 m)from any wall or 20 ft.(6 m)from any wall or UL Maximum Distance projection extending down from projection extending down from WARNING—Use For Property Protection Only:Heat sen- from Wall the ceiling more than 12 inches the ceiling more than 12 inches sors do not protect life against fire and smoke.In most fires, (305 mm) (305 mm) hazardous levels of smoke,heat and toxic gases can build up before a heat detector would initiate an alarm.Independent Contacts–Ratin Single Pole Normally Open 3.0 amps at 125 Vac; 1.0 amp at 28 Vdc; studies indicate that heat detectors should only be used when g 0.3 amps at 125 Vdc;0.1 amps at 250 Vdc property protection alone is involved.In cases where life safety is a factor,the use of smoke detectors is recommended. Operating Environment Indoor–Dry Under no circumstances should heat detectors be relied upon Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM as the sole measure to ensure fire safety.However,if they are "Maximum detector coverage has been determined by UL to provide detection time equal to sprinkler devices spaced in accordance with the directions in the Specifics- spaced at 10 ft(3.05 m) intervals on a smooth ceiling 15 feet 9 inches(4.8 m)high.Higher ceilings may tions table,these sensors can contribute,within an overall adversely affect detection time.Earlier detection may be obtained by reducing the spacing between sensors. fire safety program,to reducing the risk of avoidable property (See NFPA 72,Chapter 5) losses. Ordering information Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lb.(kg) CR135 2 Heat Detector, 135°F(57°C), Combination Rate-of Rise and Fixed Temperature CR200-2 Heat Detector,200°F(93°C), 1.0 lb (0.5 Combination Rate-of Rise and Fixed Temperature kg) CF135-2 Heat Detector, 135°F(57°C), Fixed Temperature Only CF200-2 Heat Detector,200°F(93°C), Fixed Temperature Only a Cl Page 2 of 2 DATA S H E E , 85001-0367 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2.1 EST Catalog►Conventional Initiating �ESTTM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications Rate Compensation H eat Detectors Box mount Surface Mount ir 302 Series MEA UO Overview Application Series 302 heat detectors are designed for use in normal environ- Sensors rated at 135°F(57.2°C)will not respond to momentary ments as well as environments where the detectors are subject to temperature fluctuations less than 30°F/minute between 60°F weather, moisture(internal condensation), and explosive atmo- (16°C)and 100°F(38°C). Sensors rated at 194°F(90°C)will not spheres.They are normally-open devices designed to close an respond to momentary temperature fluctuations less than 50°F/ electrical circuit upon activation.All models feature rate compen- minute between 60°F(16°C)and 150°F(66°C). 302 Series sen- sation and are available with either 135°F(57.2°C)or 194°F(90 sors should not be used in environments where conditions exceed °C)ratings.They are self restoring, hermetically sealed, shock and these parameters. Do not install them in hot air ducts, in front of corrosion resistant,and are tamperproof. heaters, in paint booths that use heat to cure paint,or any other location subject to temperature fluctuation. Sensor's Rated Minimum Ambient Maximum Ceiling Standard Features Temperature Air Temperature Temperature • Rate compensation offsets thermal lag 135°F(57.2°C) -40°F(-40°C) 100°F(38°C) • Self-restoring—no manual reset required 194°F(90°C) -40°F(-40°C) 150°F(66°C) • Explosion proof and weatherproof models available The sensor's aluminum tube acts as a heat collector when sourc- es of heat radiate directly on the tube. Install these sensors out of • Weatherproof models available that do not require a special direct sunlight and away from radiating heat sources including the backbox direct flow from heaters and heat ducts. • Box mount and surface mount models available Pagel of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0589 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2 Rate Compensation Typical Wiring 302 Series sensors feature rate compensation,which improves performance by offsetting thermal lag, an inherent property of Black conventional fixed temperature heat sensors. I A slow rate of temperature rise allows the heat to penetrate the To control End of ' panel or <-302 Series Detectors Line inner expansion struts.The tubular shell and the struts expand next device Resistor slowly until the total device has been heated to its rated tempera- I ture level of 135°F(57.2°C)or 194°F(90°C).At this point,the ` ' silver contact points close and an alarm is initiated. White When subjected to a rapid rate temperature rise,there is not as much time for heat to penetrate the inner strut. However,the rapid lengthening of the shell allows the struts to come together at a lower level. Electrical Rating When the surrounding air temperature returns to below the rated Voltage Current level,the shell contracts,forcing the contacts to open,thus auto- 6-125 VAC 5 amps matically resetting the sensor. 6-25 VDC 1 amp 125 VDC 0.5 amp Li Li Maintenance 302 Series heat sensors are low maintenance. Sensors automati- cally restore when temperatures drop below their rated tempera- tures.The accumulation of dust and dirt does not normally affect ■ �, Fine silver contact the sensors'operation. Expansion struts High expansion sensing shell,0.040 anodized aluminum Testing IM Heat control sleeve ` = Setting screw Testing for operation is simple and can be done before or after the 6,41M'-' Devcon hermetic seal sensor has been installed. Heat the sensor with a hair dryer(do not use any device with an open flame to test sensors).The sen- sor should operate shortly after the hot air is applied. Refer to NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code and/or the local authority having jurisdiction to determine testing frequency, record keeping, and other testing considerations. Detector Spacing Model 302 302-AW 302-ET 302-EPM UL-Vertical Spacing 50'x 50' 50'x 50' 50'x 50' 40'x 40' (all models) (15.2 x 15.2 m) (15.2 x 15.2 m) (15.2 x 15.2 m) (12.2 x 12.2 m) UL-Horizontal Spacing 40'x 40' 40'x 40' 40'x 40' 30'x 30' (all models) (12.2 x 12.2 m) (12.2 x 12.2 m) (12.2 x 12.2 m) (9.1 x 9.1 m) FM-Horizontal 30'x 30' 30'x 30' 30'x 30' Not Listed or vertical spacing.* (9.1 x 9.1m) (9.1 x 9.1m) (9.1 x 9.1m) Spacing is based on smooth ceilings that are up to 10'(3 m)high.Refer to NFPA 72 for ceilings that are not considered smooth or are higher than 10'(3 m). *EPM models are not FM approved. Dimensions WARNING-Use For Property Protection Only:Heat detectors do not protect life against fire and smoke.In most fires,hazardous levels of smoke,heat and toxic gases can build up before a Model ET EMP heat sensor would initiate an alarm.Independent studies indicate that heat sensors should only be used when property protection alone is involved.In cases where life safety is a factor,the use Tube Length 3"(76.2 mm) 3"(76.2 mm) of smoke detectors is recommended. Tube Diameter 0.5"(12.7 mm) 0.5"(12.7 mm) Under no circumstances should heat detectors be relied upon as the sole measure to ensure fire NPT Thread 0.5"(12.7 mm) 0.5"(12.7 mm) safety.However,if they are spaced in accordance with the specifications found under Application, these sensors can contribute,within an overall fire safety program,to reducing the risk of avoid- 1.25"(31.75 mm) able property losses. Hex Base 1"(25.4 mm)plastic brass When used with automatic fire suppression systems such as pre-action and deluge sprinkler systems,carbon dioxide systems,halon systems,and dry chemical systems,at least two sen- sors should be used to initiate the alarm.This is commonly referred to as cross-zoning or priority matrix zoning and is necessary to eliminate premature discharge of the system.Refer to NFPA 72 for more information. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEE 85001-0589 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2 Ordering Information Interior applications Ship Wt. Heat Detector-Rate Compensation,Interior 302-135 Vertical Surface Mount FM&UL,135°F(57.2 ; 00) For interior mounting. 0.2 lb.(0.09 Heat Detector-Rate Compensation,Interior kg) 302-194 Vertical Surface Mount FM&UL, 194°F(90 °C). , Moisture&dust proof applications Ship Wt. All-weather Heat Detector-Rate Hermetically sealed for moisture proof 302-AW-135 Compensation,Vertical Mounting FM&UL, or dust proof installations.Requires no 135°F(57.2°C) special back box when the all-weather leads are properly spliced to"THW" 0.2 lb.(0.09 All-weather Heat Detector-Rate or equivalent type wire and splices are kg) 302-AW-194 Compensation,Vertical Mounting FM&UL, moisture proof.For indoor or outdoor 194°F(90°C) use. Moisture&dust proof applications(box mount) Ship Wt. All-weather Heat Detector-Rate Hermetically sealed for moisture proof 302-ET-135 Compensation,Vertical,Box Mount(/z" or dust proof installations.Requires no NPT), FM&UL, 135°F(57.2°C).Requires special back box.Has plastic hexagonal STONCO27 or equivalent. grip bushing with 1/2"conduit threads 0.2 lb.(0.09 All-weather Heat Detector-Rate for attachment to threaded hub cover, kg) Compensation,Vertical,Box Mount(1/2" or any outlet box.For indoor or outdoor 302-ET-194 NPT), FM&UL, 194°F(90°C).Requires use when watertight seal is required, STONCO27 or equivalent. use weatherproof box. Explosion proof applications Ship Wt. Heat Detector-Rate Compensation, Explosion proof for installation in 302-EPM- Explosionproof Mounting UL(Not FM hazardous locations.Has hexagonal 135 approved), 135°F(57.2°C).RequiresJALX-11 grip bushing with 1/2"conduit threads for or equivalent attachment to threaded hub covers of 0.3 lb.(0.14 Heat Detector-Rate Compensation, series JL fixture fitting manufactured by kg) 302-EPM- Explosionproof Mounting UL(not FM Killark Electric Co.,or equivalent.Must 194 approved), 194°F(90°C).RequiresJALX-11 be hand tightened only. For indoor use or equivalent. only. Adapter plate Ship Wt. --)1 APP Decorative white plastic adaptor plate for mounting 302 and 302-AW to any 3"outlet box 0.1 lb.(0.05 or 4"octagon outlet box. kg) Outlet body Ship Wt. STONCO27 3'/2"Weatherproof,round backbox and cover(Y2"thread hubs back,four sides and cover) 1111 3.0 lb.(1.4 kg) Explosion proof outlet body Ship Wt. f, JALX11 Explosion proof outlet body with cover(1/2"thread hubs back,four sides and cover) Killark v ", 3.5 lb.(1.6 kg) I,: ., Page 3 of 4 DATA SHE t . 85001-0589 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2 WARDS A UTC Fire&Security Company Detection&alarm since 1872 U.S. T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Canada Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi rean dsec u rity.c om ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 C Page 4 of 4 DATA S H E E 85001-0589 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2 EST Catalog ► Intelligent Initiating ESTrM )IIIPILife Safety & Communications .! Manual Pull PULL_ IN CSE Stations F E SIGH-270, uSIGH-270P, PuFOR \ ,: SIGH-278 FIRE MEA Patented SIGA-270 SERIES Overview • Break glass operation The SIGA-270 and SIGA-278 series Manual Pull Stations are An up-front visible glass rod on the SIGH-270 discourages part of EST's Signature Series system.The SIGA-270 Fire Alarm tampering. Manual Pull Stations feature our very familiar teardrop shape.They • Intelligent device with integral microprocessor are made from die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy powder- All decisions are made at the station allowing lower com- coat paint complemented by aluminum colored stripes and mark- munication speed while substantially improving control panel ings. With positive pull-lever operation, one pull on the station response time. Less sensitive to line noise and loop wiring handle breaks the glass rod and turns in a positive alarm, ensuring properties;twisted or shielded wire is not required. protection plus fool-proof operation. Presignal models(SIGA-270P) • ADA Compliant are equipped with a general alarm(GA)keyswitch for applications Meets ADA requirements for manual pull stations. where two stage operation is required.The up-front highly visible glass rod discourages tampering, but is not required for proper • Electronic Addressing with Non-volatile memory operation. Permanently stores programmable address, serial number, type of device, and job number.Automatically updates historic EST's double action single stage SIGA-278 station is a contempo- information including hours of operation, last maintenance rary style manual station made from durable red colored lexan. To date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last initiate an alarm,first lift the upper door marked"LIFT THEN PULL alarm. HANDLE",then pull the alarm handle. • Automatic device mapping Each station transmits wiring information to the loop control- Standard Features ler regarding its location with respect to other devices on the Note:Some features described here may not be supported by all control sys- circuit. tems.Check your control panel's Installation and Operation Guide for details. • Stand-alone operation • Traditional familiar appearance The station inputs an alarm even if the loop controller's polling SIGA-270 models feature our familiar teardrop design with interrogation stops. simple positive pull action and sturdy die-cast metal body. • Diagnostic LEDs • One stage(GA),two stage(pre-signal),and double action Status LEDs;flashing GREEN shows normal polling;flashing models RED shows alarm state. SIGA-270 models are available for one or two stage alarm • Designed for high ambient temperature operation systems.The single stage double action SIGA-278 features a Install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F(49°C). rugged Lexan housing with keyed reset mechanism. Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0279 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 Application Typical Wiring The operating characteristics of the fire alarm stations are deter- The fire alarm station's terminal block accepts#18 AWG(0.75mm2) mined by their sub-type code or"Personality Code". NORMALLY- to#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire sizes.See Signature Loop Controller OPEN ALARM-LATCHING(Pesonality Code 1)is assigned by the catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. factory; no user configuration is required.The device is configured for Class B IDC operation.An ALARM signal is sent to the loop Wiring Notes controller when the station's pull lever is operated.The alarm con- ARefer to Signature Loop Controller manual for maximum dition is latched at the station. wire distance. 2. All wiring is power limited and supervised. Compatibility REAR VIEW of 278 Signature Series manual stations are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. p T82 I I� Warnings & Cautions 8 7 This device will not operate without electrical power.As fires fre- quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further (AlarmActItive) o o GNor LED (Normal) safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. 3 2 ' 0 TB,10 U►®®N ° IC:I Testing & Maintenance �■l■� To test(or reset)the station simply open the station and operateDATA IN(+) (+)DATA OUT the exposed switch.The SIGA-270 series are opened with a tool; {DATA IN(-) , DATA OUT(-) the SIGA-278 requires the key which is supplied with that station. From Signature Controller TO Next Device or Previous Device 0 The station's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance Figure 4. Single Stage Systems program shows the current state of each Signature series device and other pertinent messages. Single devices may be deactivated temporarily,from the control panel.Availability of maintenance dependent on the fire alarm system used. REAR VIEW features is y of Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper system 270P,270PB o0 operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and o ° ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. TB2 litaffain 8 7 6 5 Red LED Green LED (Alarm/Active) I n 3 2 (Normal) TBl • O O O I SII C (DATA IN(+) DATA OUT WI 1 l DATA IN(-) • DATA OUT(-) From Signature Controller To Next Device or Previous Device Figure 5. Two Stage Systems Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0279 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 Installation Single-stage Signature Series fire alarm manual pull stations mount to North American 21/2 inch(64 mm)deep 1-gang boxes. Two stage presignal(270P)models require 11/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4-inch square boxes with 1-gang, t/-inch raised covers.Openings must be angular.Rounded openings are not acceptable. Recommended box:Steel City Model 52-C-13; in Canada, use Iberville Model Cl- 52-C-49-1/2. All models include terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. Edwards recommends that these fire alarm stations be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Electronic Addressing: The loop controller electronically addresses each manual station, saving valuable time during system com- missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each station has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory.The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft"address to each serial number. If desired,the stations can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Key-Latch Compatible Electrical Box OM Compatible Electrical Box -Cover Release Cover t�r� /\ Release �� � //, $Creta RMg,50, iii ibli ALAI! KHAN '` /�fj rl 1 O /° Back \ ff0 01- ° Back 1 Q Plate ' Plate 11U4';To le o° Mpt „ ,,Switch ° Switch 11 0 ri ” Glass Rod Glass Rod \ 1 I IrOlih:11„ Release Lever OPEN G Figure 1. SIGA-278 installation Figure 2. SIGA-270,SIGC-270F,SIGC-270B installation Cover Release Scr-w O4—Compatible roll• Electrical Box with' inch4,0011raisedCovers 4 E5 V po i r,„,...- Back o ®�' Plate OM Toggle ` ° Switch NORMA 0 o p • / ��l'i:,- Glass Rod Release Lever Do not use �L, boxes with rounded N • openings. O Figure 3. SIGA-270P,SIGC-270PB installation Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0279 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 Specifications TOWARDS SIGA-270,SIGC- SIGA-270P, Catalog Number 270F,SIGC 2706 SIGC-270PB SIGA-278 A UTC Fire&Security Company Single Action Single Action-Two Double Action Description -One Stage Stage(Presignal) -One Stage Detection&alarm since 1872 Addressing Uses 1 Module Uses 2 Module Uses 1 Module u.S. Requirements Address Addresses Address T 888-378-2329 Standby=250pA Standby=396pA Standby=250pA F 866-503-3996 Operating Current Activated=400pA Activated=680pA Activated=400pA Canada Diecast Zinc-Red Epoxy Lexan-Red with Chubb Edwards Construction&Finish with aluminum markings white markings T 519 376 2430 Type Code Factory Set F 519 376 7258 Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) Southeast Asia Operating Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) T:+65 6391 9300 Storage and Operating Storage Temperature:-4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C)Humidity:0 to 93% F:+65 6391 9306 Environment RH India On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled T:+91 80 4344 2000 LED Operation On-board Red LED-Flashes w hen in alarm F:+91 80 4344 2050 Both LEDs-Glow steady when in alarm(stand-alone) Compatibility Use With:Signature Loop Controller Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 Agency Listings UL,ULC(note 1), MEA,CSFM F+61 3 9239 1299 Note:SIGC-270F SIGC-2708 and SIGC-270PB are ULC listed only.Suffix"F"indicates French markings. Suffix"B"indicates English/French biting ual markings. Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Ordering Information Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 Ship Catalog Wt.lbs utcfireandsecurity.com Number Description (kg) SIGA-270 One Stage Fire Alarm Station, English Markings-UL/ULC Listed ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. SIGC-270F One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French Markings-ULC Listed All rights reserved. SIGC-270B One Stage Fire Alarm Station,French/English Markings-ULC Listed SIGA 270P Two Stage(Presignal)Fire Alarm Station,English Markings-UL/ULC Listed 1 (0.5) SIGC- Two Stage(Presignal)Fire Alarm Station,French/English Markings 270PB -ULC Listed SIGA 278 Double Action(One Stage)Fire Alarm Station, English Markings -UL/ULC Listed Accessories 32997 GA Key w/Tag-for pre-signal station(CANADA ONLY) 276-K2 GA Key-for pre-signal station (USA ONLY) 276-K1 Station Reset Key, Supplied with all Key Reset Stations 0.1 (.05) 27165 12 Glass Rods-for SIGA-270 series(CANADA ONLY) 270-GLR 20 Glass Rods-for SIGA-270 series (USA ONLY) 276-GLR 20 Glass Rods-for SIGA-278 series 276B-RSB Surface Mount Box,Red-for SIGA pull stations 1 (0.6) a 9 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0279 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input-Output T.-8T TM Life Safety & Communications Alan .... .-- Input Modules SIGA-CT1 , SIGA-CT1 HT, SIGA-CT2, SIGA-MCT2 _...„.„..,-.1i Signature Series OverviewU10Motherboard The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from 1 6-32 9 9 g- y / � Self-tapping Edwards Security is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and screws mounting bases, multiple-function input and output modules, E _--0 g-in network and non-network control panels, and user-friendly main- 0,Captive tenance ain- tenance and service tools.Analog information from equipment PluModu elf) s�etws connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into __ �__� digital signals.An onboard microprocessor in each Signature de- _ vice measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not \ fi Flat washers to input an alarm.The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four additional benefits-Self-diagnostics and History _—cabinet or electrical enclosure Log,Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. Electronic Addressing-The loop controller electronically ad- Self-diagnostics and History Log-Each Signature Series dresses each module, saving valuable time during system corn- device constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte- missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. nance information.The results of the self-check are automatically Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory.This on-board memory.The loop controller identifies each device on information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, the loop and assigns a"soft"address to each serial number. If PC,or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. desired,the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Automatic Device Mapping-The Signature Data Control- Signature Program/Service Tool. ler(SDC)learns where each device's serial number address is Edwards recommends that this module be installed according to installed relative to other devices on the circuit.The SDC keeps a latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. map of all Signature Series devices connected to it.The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature.With interactive menus and graphic support,the wired circuits be- Application tween each device can be examined. Layout or"as-built"drawing information showing branch wiring(T-taps), device types and their The duty performed by the SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2/MCT2 is de- address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. termined by their sub-type code or"Personality Code".The code is selected by the installer depending upon the desired application Installation and is downloaded from the loop controller. SIGA-CT1,SIGA-CT1 HT and SIGA-CT2: modules mount to One personality code can be assigned to the SIGA-CT1.Two per- North American 21 inch(64 mm)deep 1-gang boxes and 11/2 inch sonality codes can be assigned to the SIGA-CT2/MCT2. Codes (38 mm)deep 4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SIGA 1, 2,3 and 4 can be mixed on SIGA-CT2/MCT2 modules only. For MP mounting plates.The terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG example, personality code 1 can be assigned to the first address (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. (circuit A)and code 4 can be assigned to the second address (circuit B). 411111) NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM -LATCHING(Personality Code 1) Compatible electrical box -Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or �� both for Class B normally open dry contact initiating devices such 11111111111(1111111"t I as Pull Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.An ALARM signal is sent to 1�I the loop controller when the input contact is closed.The alarm + , condition is latched at the module. 1Wall plate,white .���1\ IC,-\\ (1-gang) NORMALLY-OPEN ALARM -DELAYED LATCHING (Person- ality Code 2)-Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally-open dry contact initiat- ing devices such as Waterflow Alarm Switches.An ALARM signal mm ', is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed for �!�� Q approximately 16 seconds.The alarm condition is latched at the module. Status LEDs NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE- NON-LATCHING (Personality Code 3)-Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit LED viewing ports • A or B or both for Class B normally-open dry contact monitoring o input such as from Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.An ACTIVE signal • ° is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed.The active condition is not latched at the module. SIGA-MCT2: mount the UIO motherboard inside a suitable NORMALLY-OPEN ACTIVE- LATCHING (Personality Code Edwards enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the 4)-Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or SIGA-MCT2 into any available position on the motherboard and B or both for Class B normally open dry contact monitoring input secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. such as from Supervisory and Tamper Switches.An ACTIVE signal Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed.The (see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard terminals are suited for#12 active condition is latched at the module. to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. Page 2 of 4 DATA S H E E N 85001-0241 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 Typical Wiring Modules will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16(1.0mm2), and#14AWG(1.50mm2), and#12 AWG(2.50mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation.See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Initiating(Slave)Device Circuit Wire Specifications Maximum Allowable Wire Resistance 50 ohms(25 ohms per wire)per Circuit Maximum Allowable Wire Capacitance 0.1 pF per Circuit For Design Reference: Wire Size Maximum Distance to EOLR #18 AWG(0.75 mm2) #16 AWG(1.00 mm2) 4,000 ft(1,219 m) #14 AWG(1.50 mm2) #12 AWG(1.50 mm2) Typical N.O.Initiating Device Typical N.O.Initiating Device J• INPUT 1 INPUT 2 HHA HH iniii AAA Q4 Style B(Class B) hum .:=:. TB2 11(11171.7 TB2 I I 111 ll_ 8 7 UL/ULC Listed S le B Class B r • 471x1 EOL UL/ULC Listed ( ) e 5 s UL/ULC Listed 47Kg EOL 1., ® 1 .7 • • l 47KII EOL Red LED Green LED (Alarm/Active) 0 (Normal) Red LED Green LED 4 342 1 (Alarm/Active) 4 3 2 1 I (Normal) TB1I(11) TB1I(�)6I. ( DATA IN(+) ► (+) DATA OUT 1 j(DATA IN(+) ' DATA OUT(+) l DATA IN(-) 0,..DATA OUT(-)/ l DATA IN(-) DATA OUT(-) To Next Device From Signature Controller To Next Device From Signature Controller or Previous Device or Previous Device Q 3 SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT1 HT SIGA-CT2 1 1 1 Typical NO Initiating Device I i NOTES UL/ULC Listed +I pin + HD Input2 UL/ULC Listed 47KW EOL47KW EOL A Maximum 25 Ohm resistance per wire. A Maximum#12 AWG(2.5 mm2)wire;Minimum#18 AWG(0.75 mm2). •■' e e e ARefer to Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications. /w\Maximum 10 Vdc CO 350 pA MCT2 AThe SIGA-U106R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14. 2 s 4A UIOIRI series motherboard 6 All wiring is supervised and power-limited. + 4 Data In Li Q 7 These modules will not support 2-wire smoke detectors. : 4 ,RI 1 �isSignature I 2 . �l TB14 No connections required for Data ■ i Uilo,MCT2Circuit+ Other modules may require DataOut+ MCT2connectionsWarnings & Cautions IIi:iIP Green LED(Normal} This module will not operate without electrical power.As fires fre- RedLED(Active) quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. NegconneciMCTz jumper settings Compatibility SIGA-MCT2 The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. Page 3 of 4 DATA S H t t I 85001-0241 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 Specifications TO WA R D S Catalog Number SIGA-CT1HT I SIGA-CT1 SIGA-CT2 I SIGA-MCT2 Description Single Input Module Dual Input Module A UTC Fire&Security Company Type Code 48(factory set)Four sub-types 49(factory set)Four sub-types Detection&alarm since 1872 (personality codes)are available (personality codes)are available Address Requirements Uses One Module Address Uses Two Module Addresses u.S. Operating Current Standby=250pA; Standby=396pA; T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Activated=400pA Activated=680pA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) Canada Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 Mounting North American 21 inch(64 mm)deep one-gang box- UIO2R/6R/6 F 519 376 7258 es and 11/2 inch (38 mm)deep 4 inch square boxes Motherboard with one-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 Operating Environment 32°F to 158°F 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) F:+65 6391 9306 (0°C to 70°C) Storage Environment -4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C);Humidity:0 to 93%RH India LED Operation On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled;On-board Red LED- T:+91 80 4344 2000 Flashes when in alarm/active. F:+91 80 4344 2050 Both LEDs-Glow steady when in alarm(stand-alone) Australia Compatibility Use with Signature Loop Controller T+61 392391200Agency Listings UL,ULC,MEA,CSFM F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 Ordering Information F+32 2 721 86 13 Catalog Ship Wt. Latin America Description Number lbs(kg) T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module— UL/ULC Listed 0.4(0.15) SIGA-CT1HT Single Input Module High Temperature Operation UL/ULC Listed 0.4(0.15) utcfireandsecurity.com SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module— UL/ULC Listed 0.4(0.15) ©201 o UTC Fire&Security. SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Plug-in(UIO)Module — UL,ULC Listed 0.1 (0.05) All rights reserved. Related Equipment 27193-11 Surface Mount Box-Red, 1-gang 1.0(0.6) 27193-16 Surface Mount Box-White, 1-gang 1.0(0.6) SIGA U102R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs 0.32(0.15) —Two Module Positions SIGA U106R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs 0.62(0.28) —Six Module Positions SIGA-U106 Universal Input-Output Module Board —Six Module Positions 0.56(0.25) MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet— Red,supports Signature Module 7,0(3.1) Mounting Plates SIGA-MB4 Transponder Mounting Bracket(allows for mounting 0.4(0.15) two 1-gang modules in a 2-gang box) SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02(0.46) a Page4of4 DATA SHEE 85001-0241 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 8 EST Catalog►Strobes,Horns, Bells,Chimes ESTrM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications 11cMEA Feld C o n f i g u ra b I e -..=�-•-=�- ......... • 1. 1 Horns and CE 0 � FM Strobes % ti _. . a. Pending Genesis Series ECS/MNS appliances available with clear or amber I-• - '�� L[- L* - E � ! E ALERT R H! � TT : .,milli Overview Standard Features The Genesis line of fire alarm and mass notification/emergency • Unique low-profile design communications(ECS/MNS)signals are among the smallest, — The most compact UL-1971/ULC-S526 listed strobe available most compact audible-visible life safety signaling devices in the — Ultra-slim—protrudes less than one inch world.About the size of a deck of playing cards,these devices are — Attractive appearance designed to blend with any decor. — No visible mounting screws Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, Edwards Gen- • Four field-configurable options in one device esis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. — Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output Instead,an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce — Select high(default)or low dB horn output a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development — Select temporal (default)or steady horn output efforts employing this new technology have given rise to a new — Select public mode flash rate(default)or private mode benchmark in strobe performance—FullLight technology. temporal flash FullLight strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution • Fixed 15/75 cd model available pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular re- • ECS/MNS models available flectors.This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent illumination from the strobe flash.As a result, Genesis strobes with • Easy to install FullLight technology go well beyond the UL-1971 and ULC-5526 — Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes —no trim plate needed light distribution requirements. — Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings — Pre-assembled with captive hardware Genesis strobes and horn-strobes offer selectable candela output — #12 AWG terminals—ideal for long runs or existing wiring by means of a conveniently-located switch on the side of the • device. Models are also available that offer fixed 15/75 cd output. Unparalleled performance The candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final — Industry's most even light distribution installation,yet it stays locked in place to prevent unauthorized — Meets tough synchronizing standards for strobes tampering. — Single microprocessor controls both horn and strobe — Independent horn control over a single pair of wires Genesis ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with — Highly regulated in-rush current clear or amber lenses and with optional ALERT housing labels. — Multiple frequency tone improves sound penetration They are ideal for applications that require differentiation between — Field-programmable temporal strobe output option fire alarm and mass notification alerts. Page 1 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0573 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 Application Installation Genesis strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mount- Genesis horns and strobes mount to any standard one-gang sur- ed public-mode notification appliances for the hearing impaired. face or flush electrical box. Matching optional trim plates are used Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise to cover oversized openings and can accommodate one-gang, conditions exceed 105 dBA(87dBA in Canada),where occupants two-gang,four-inch square, or octagonal boxes,and European use hearing protection,and in areas of public accommodation 100 mm square. as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act(see application notes—USA). All Genesis signals come pre-assembled with captive mounting screws for easy in- Combination horn-strobe signals must be installed in accordance F stallation.Two tabs at the top of the signal with guidelines established for strobe devices.Consult with your I , I unlock the cover to reveal the mounting Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. R R hardware.The shallow depth of Genesis All Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements E E devices leaves ample room behind the (within 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period)when used with a signal for extra wiring.Once installed with the cover in place, no mounting screws synchronization source. Synchronization is important in order to IMgt avoid epileptic sensitivity. are visible. WARNING:These devices will not operate without electrical power.As fires frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as Field Configuration Genesis Horn/Strobe Temporal horn and horn-strobe models backup power supplies may be required. with optional trim plate p are factory set to sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern. Units may be con- figured for use with coded systems by cutting a jumper on the Horns circuit board.This results in a steady output that can be turned Genesis horn output reaches as high as 99 dB and features a on and off(coded)as the system applies and removes power to unique multiple frequency tone that results in excellent sound the signal circuit.A Genesis Signal Master is required when horn penetration and an unmistakable warning of danger. Horns may be strobe models are configured for coded systems. Non-temporal, configured for either coded or non-coded signal circuits.They can horn only models sound a steady tone. also be set for low dB output with a jumper cut that reduces horn Genesis clear strobes and horn-strobes are shipped from the fac- output by about 5 dB. Horn-only models may be ceiling-mounted tory ready for use as UL 1971 compliant signals for public mode or wall-mounted. operation.These signals may be configured for temporal flash by The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with cutting a jumper on the circuit board.This batterysaving feature is alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level, intended for private mode signaling only. or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least Genesis clear strobes and horn-strobes may be set for 15,30,75, 60 seconds,whichever is greater,measured 5 feet(1.5 m)above the or 110 candela output.The output setting is changed by simply floor.The average ambient sound level is,A-weighted sound pressure opening the device and sliding the switch to the desired setting. measured over a 24-hour period. The device does not have to be removed to change the output Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result setting.The setting remains visible through a small window on the in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level.The actual side of the device after the cover is closed. effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. Horns and horn-strobes are factory set for high dB output. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. Low dB output may be selected by cutting a jumper on the circuit board.This reduces the output by about 5 dB. ECS/MNS Applications Genesis ECS/MNS strobe appliances bring the same high- performance fire alarm features and unobtrusive design to mass notification applications.Available with amber lenses and optional Wiring ALERT housing labels,they are ideal for applications that require Field wiring terminals accommodate#18 to#12 AWG(0.75 mm2 differentiation between fire alarm and mass notification alerts. to 2.5 mm2)wiring. Horns, strobes,and combination horn-strobes are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below. 0 appliancTonexte, Polarity shown in end-of-line alarm condition i►92©i %p©' or return to �� ►� control 63 equipment ONote:Strobes must have continuous voltage. Page 2 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0573 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 Current Draw Strobes, Horn-Strobes Horns Multi-cd Wall Strobes(G1-VM) Wall or Ceiling Mounted UL 15 cd* 30 cd* 15/75 cd** 75 cd* 110 cd* Temporal Horns(G1-HD) Rating i RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS UL High dB Low dB 16 Vdc 103 141 152 255 311 Rating (RMS) (RMS) 16 Vfwr 125 179 224 346 392 16 Vdc 26 19 *G1-VM multi-cd;**G1 F-V1575 fixed 15/75 cd 24 Vdc 36 27 33 Vdc 41 33 Typical 15 cd 30 cd 15/75 75 cd 110 cd 16 Vfwr 51 37 Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS 24 Vfwr 69 52 16 Vdc 85 127 150 245 285 33 Vfwr 76 70 20 Vdc 71 98 123 188 240 24 Vdc 59 82 104 152 191 Typical High dB Low dB 33 Vdc 46 64 84 112 137 Current RMS RMS 16 Vfwr 119 169 223 332 376 16 Vdc 22 17 20 Vfwr 103 143 189 253 331 20 Vdc 24 19 24 Vfwr 94 129 169 218 262 24 Vdc 27 22 33 Vfwr 87 112 148 179 205 33 Vdc 32 26 16 Vfwr 34 30 Wall Temporal Horn-strobes—High dB Setting 20 Vfwr 40 34 15 30 15/75 75 110 *G1-HDVM multi-cd 24 Vfwr 45 38 UL cd* cd* cd** cd* cd* **G1 F-HDV1575 fixed 15/75 cd 33 Vfwr 52 47 Rating RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS 16 Vdc 129 167 172 281 337 Wall or Ceiling Mounted Horns(G1-P) 16 Vfwr 176 230 269 397 443 UL Designation Voltage Range Max.Current, RMS Typical 15 cd 30 cd 15/75 75 cd 110 cd Regulated 24 16 33 Vdc 13 mA Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS Vdc _ 16 Vdc 102 135 160 246 309 24 fwr 16-33 Vfwr 11 mA 20 Vdc 88 109 137 193 248 24 Vdc 81 94 122 161 203 Typical Current RMS 33 Vdc 74 72 106 124 154 24 Vdc 10 16 Vfwr 144 182 247 352 393 24 Vdc 11 20 Vfwr 141 162 220 274 362 31 Vdc 12 24 Vfwr 136 152 203 235 282 20 Vfwr 9 33 Vfwr 125 144 196 201 232 24 Vfwr 10 Wall Temporal Horn-strobes—Low dB Setting Current values are shown in mA. UL 15 30 15/75 75 110 Rating cd* cd* cd** cd* cd* RMS 1RMS RMS RMS RMS 16 Vdc 122 160 146 274 330 *G1-HDVM multi-cd 16 Vfwr 162 216 231 383 429 **G1 F-HDV1575 fixed 15/75 cd Typical 15 cd 30 cd 15/75 75 cd 110 cd Current RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS 16 Vdc 96 130 158 243 302 20 Vdc 79 104 133 189 241 24 Vdc 68 88 119 156 197 33 Vdc 56 71 100 118 146 16 Vfwr 128 180 241 344 389 20 Vfwr 118 _ 157 213 266 343 24 Vfwr 113 144 195 230 279 33 Vfwr 112 137 182 197 226 Page 3 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0573 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 dBA output Average Sound Output (dBA) Temporal Horns, Horn-strobes(G1-HD,G1-HDVM series) (High dB setting, anechoic, 24V, measured at 10ft) High UL464 Average Peak daa dB Temporal/ Temporal/ °110 °°so 80 ° so so ° 30 ° 90 90° 0 110 120 90° Temporal Steady r Setting Steady Steady 16 Vdc 81.4 85.5 91.4 94.2 -75 5° 24 Vdc 84.4 88.6 94.5 97.6 33 Vdc 86.3 90.4 96.9 99.5 60' 60° Low dB UL464 Average Peak -05"\ /45° Setting Temporal Steady Temporal/ Temporal/ ///// Steady Steady -30.',,............._ 30° 16 Vdc 76.0 80.1 86.3 89.2 -15° 0° 15° 24 Vdc 79.4 83.5 89.8 92.5 33 Vdc 82.1 86.5 92.5 95.3 Light output - (effective cd) Steady Tone Horns(G1-P series) Percent of UL rating versus angle UL464 Average Peak 16 Vdc 77 dBA,min 85 dBA 91 dBA ,m no goo 90 eo 70 eo so ao 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 ao so so ro ao so,Ou no 120 90' 16 Vfwr 77 dBA,min 85 dBA 91 dBA Notes -'5, 75° 1. All values shown are dBA measured at 10 feet(3.01 m). \ 2. UL464 values measured in reverberant room. -0 60° \ 3. Average and Peak values are measured in anechoic chamber. -451N /45° -30',..„,... _________ 30°' 5° 5° 5° 0° Specifications Housing Red or white textured UV stabilized,color impregnated engineered plastic.Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. Lens Optical grade polycarbonate(clear) Strobes and horn-strobes are for wall-mount installation only.Horn-only models may be ceiling-or wall-mounted. Mounting Flush mount:21/2 inch(64 mm)deep one-gang box (indoor only) Surface mount:Model 27193 surface mount box,wiremold box,or equivalent surface-mount box With optional trim plate:One-gang,two-gang,four-inch square,octagonal,or European single-gang box Wire connections Screw terminals:single input for both horn and strobe.#18 to#12 AWG(0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)wire size Operating environment Indoor only:32-120°F(0-49°C)ambient temperature.93%relative humidity Agency listings/approvals UL 1971,UL 1638,UL 464,ULC S525,ULC S526,CSFM,CE,FCC,MEA. (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule.) Dimensions(HxWxD) Signal:4-1/2"x 2-3/4"x 13/16"(113 mm x 68 mm x 21 mm) Trimplate: 5"(127 mm);Height—5-7/8"(149 mm);Depth—Y2"(13 mm) G1-HD series temporal-tone horns:non-coded,filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR(or coded when horn set to steady tone) Operating voltage G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes:non-coded,filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded (audible NAC only)when used with optional G1 M Genesis Signal Master) G1-VM series strobes:non-coded,filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR G1-P series steady-tone horns:coded or non-coded,filtered 20-31 Vdc or unfiltered 20-27 Vfwr UL 1971,UL 1638,ULC S526:selectable 15 cd,30 cd,75 cd,or 110 cd output Strobe output rating UL 1971: 15 cd(fixed 15/75 cd models) UL 1638,ULCS526:75 cd(fixed 15/75 cd models) G1-VM strobes and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes:one flash per second synchronized with optional Strobe flash rate G1 M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds.Temporal setting(private mode only):synchronized to temporal output of horns on same circuit SIGA-CC1S,SIGA-MCC1S,SIGA-CC2A,SIGA-MCC2A,G1M-RM Synchronization Sources BPS6A, BPS10A,APS6A,APS10A,i064,i0500, Fireshield Plus 3,5 and 10 zone. Add G1 M for G1-CVM&G1-HDVM devices only. Horn pulse rate G1-HD temporal-tone horns and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes:temporal rate synchronized with optional G1 M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds.G1-P steady-tone horns:continuous,steady tone only Temporal audible pattern Y sec ON,1/2 sec OFF,1/2 sec ON,Y sec OFF,1/2 sec ON, 11/2 sec OFF,then repeat cycle Page 4 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0573 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 Candela Output Fire appliances available with white or red ho Switch Switch Switch 1 t" F *1 F Lens Switch e = — _ R p Rating Position Position Position Color Position A B C D • FIRE E s 7----. Ail!Amber UL 1638 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd Amber UL 1971" 88 cd 60 cd 24 cd 12 cd Clear UL 1971 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd ECS/MNS appliances available with clear or amber lenses. *Equivalent Rating A A L L E ki E Al PRE T T A[PHl f:=1 =--t 7 -=.4", 177.! Ordering Information Model 1 Housing I Marking I Lens I Strobe I Horn I Ship Wt.lbs(kg) Fire Alarm Appliances(c/w running man icon screen printed on housing) G1-VM White None Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 Cd Strobe only I 0.25 (0.11) G1 F-HD White FIRE Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1F-HDV1575 White FIRE Clear 15/75 cd" Temporal hi/lo dB-24VII 0.25 (0.11) G1 F-HDVM White FIRE Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB_ 0.25 (0.11) G1 F-P White FIRE Clear Steady Horn(not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11) G1F-V1575 White FIRE Clear 15/75 cd1 Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) G1F-VM White FIRE Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) G1-HD White None Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1-HDVM White None Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1-P White _ None Clear Steady Horn(not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11) G1 RF-HD Red FIRE Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1 RF-HDV1575 Red FIRE Clear 15/75 cd1 Temporal hi/lo dB-24V 0.25 (0.11) G1 RF-HDVM Red FIRE Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1 RF-P Red FIRE Clear Steady Horn(not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11) G1 RF-V1575 Red FIRE Clear 15/75 cd" Strobe only _ 0.25 (0.11) G1 RF-VM Red FIRE Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) G1R-HD Red None Clear Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1 R-HDVM Red None Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11) G1 R-P Red None Clear Steady Horn(not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.25 (0.11) G1R-VM Red None Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) ECS/MNS Appliances(no running man icon on housing) G1 WA-VMA White ALERT Amber Selectable A,B,C or D Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) G1 WA-VMC White ALERT Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) G1 WN-VMA White None Amber Selectable A,B,C or D Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) G1WN-VMC White None Clear Selectable 15,30,75,or 110 cd Strobe only 0.25 (0.11) Trim Plates G1T White None Genesis Trim Plate(for two-gang or 4"square boxes) 0.15(0.7) G1 RT Red None Genesis Trim Plate(for two-gang or 4"square boxes) 0.15(0.7) G1T-FIRE _White FIRE Genesis Trim Plate(for two-gang or 4"square boxes) 0.15(0.7) G1 RT-FIRE Red FIRE Genesis Trim Plate(for two-gang or 4"square boxes) 0.15(0.7) G1 WT-ALERT White ALERT Genesis Trim Plate(for two-gang or 4"square boxes) 0.15(0.7) Surface Boxes _ 27193-16 White N/A One-gang surface mount box 1 (0.4) 27193-11 Red N/A One-gang surface mount box 1 (0.4) 1 These 15/75 cd models provide fixed output and are not multi-candela devices.The 15 cd output component complies with UL1971,while the 75 cd output component complies with UL 1638. Page 5 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0573 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 11 WARDS A UTC Fire&Security Company Detection&alarm since 1872 U.S. T 888 378 2329 F 866 503 3996 Canada Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi rean dsec u rity.c om ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. c C Page 6 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0573 Not to be used for installation Issue 11 EST Catalog►Speakers,Telephones r-E---sT rM )IIIPILife Safety & Communications Genesis Speake s F „x1111. II ,."•Iy ^,..... and Strobes R 1 ........ 0 A , ,,...f... ...••..........• ., Genesis G4 Series E ••••.■•••■■•.• ) " ....• ••.............▪. ,1,},....• R ,1)x,1•••• ,,........•......, MEA • ........ ............. ''; ;„ ,. . . ,. ... . , C E 1 PENDING __________________________________________ Patents pending Overview Standard Features The Genesis line of life safety and mass notification/emergency • Unique low-profile design communications(ECS/MNS)signals are the smallest, most — The most compact UL/ULC listed speaker-strobe available compact audible-visible emergency signaling devices in the world. — Ultra-slim, protrudes a mere one inch from the wall Protruding no more than one inch from the wall,Genesis speakers — Attractive appearance, no visible mounting screws and speaker strobes blend with any decor. • Field configurable—no need to remove the device! Life safety appliances feature textured housings in architecturally — 1/a, ih, 1, or 2 watt operation and selectable candela neutral white or traditional life safety red. output with convenient switches that remain visible even after the unit is installed ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with clear or amber lenses,white housings, and optional ALERT housing labels. • ECS/MNS models available They are ideal for applications that require differentiation between • Unparalleled performance life safety and mass notification signals. — loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, Genesis strobes do — Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the not require bulky specular reflectors. Instead,an exclusive design industry's most even light distribution channels and conditions light to produce a highly controllable — Precision timing electronics meet tough new synchronizing distribution pattern. standards for strobes when used with compatibile modules — Optional field-configurable temporal strobe output Speaker-strobes feature selectable candela output with a conven- — 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms models available,all supplied with a iently-located switch on the bottom of the device.The candela DC blocking capacitor for audio circuit supervision setting remains clearly visible even after final installation. • Easy to install All Genesis speakers include a DC blocking capacitor to allow — Fits all standard 4”square electrical boxes with plenty of electrical supervision of the audio distribution circuit.The speaker room behind the signal for extra wire—no extension ring with its sealed back construction provides extra durability and or trim plate needed improved audibility. — #18-#12 AWG terminals—ideal for long runs or using existing wiring Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0549 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Speaker Application Strobe Application The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone Genesis clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as used with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the wall-mounted public-mode notification appliances for the hearing average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound impaired. Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambi- level having a duration ent noise conditions exceed specified levels,where occupants use of at least 60 seconds, Typical Sound Output hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation. UL Distribution dBA whichever is greater.This Measured in anechoic chamber 1638-listed colored-lensed strobe lights are available for ECS/ is measured 5 feet(1.5 m) MNS applications. Consult with your Authority Having Jurisdiction above the floor. ,,� for details. Doubling the distance from I 96 90 0' All Genesis strobes meet UL synchronization requirements(within the signal to the ear will 5ft(1.5m) 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period)when used with a syn- theoretically Radius Y theoretically cause a 6dB chronization source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid reduction in the received 10ft(3.05m) epileptic sensitivity. r a Radius sound pressure level.The tactual effect depends on Field Configuration the acoustic properties Genesis speakers may be set for 1/4, 1/2, 1, or 2 watt operation.The of materials in the space. L. wattage setting is visible through a small window on the bottom Doubling the power outputB, of the device and is changed by simply sliding the switch until the of a device(e.g.: a speaker desired setting appears in the window.The speaker does not have from 1 W to 2W)will in ,'o° 75 0 45° to be removed to change the wattage. crease the sound pressure level by 3dBA. Genesis Series Cone Speaker/strobe Genesis speaker-strobes feature selectable candela output.The output setting is visible through a small window on the bottom of the device and is changed by simply sliding the switch until the desired setting appears in the window.The speaker-strobe does not have to be removed to change the output. Use the Candela Switch and the To change strobe to temporal Installation and Mounting Wattage switch to set desired operation private mode)cut JP1 All models are intended for indoor wall mounted applications only. Speakers and speaker-strobes are flush mounted to a North- zz ° 11 ■ American 4"square electrical box, 21/$"(54 mm)deep or a Euro- R\ �� — _ ) \ Bottom View pean 100 mm square box. Signals may be surface mounted to a Candela switch Wattage switch Genesis surface-mount box(see ordering information for details). Two tabs at the top of the signal unlock the cover to facilitate Genesis speaker-strobes may also be configured for temporal mounting.The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves room flash.This battery-saving feature is intended for private mode behind the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in signaling only.To set the device for temporal flash, snip the circuit place, no mounting screws are visible. board as shown in the Jumper Locations diagram above. Standard electric box OO' ECS/MNS Applications� '2° Genesis ECS/MNS appliances ces bringthe same high-performance lifem,,Si/ Ce . °``a'•''' O safety features and unobtrusive design to mass notification appli- ��1 �. / cations.Standard models are available with clear or amber lenses _ vi,,,. .c),.p° and optional ALERT housing labels,they are ideal for applications /41 / that require differentiation between life safety and mass notifica- Grounding plate tion alerts.Appliances with red,green or blue lenses are available. Contact Edwards Customer Service for details. 1 Q3 _ fril.. Optional Color-matched - _-- -• Surface mount box _ - ...:iii• .i Edwards recommends that these speaker-strobes always be in '; = stalled in accordance with the latest recognized edition of national '?fr and local codes. Refer to installation sheet for mounting height .. information. *3 WARNING:These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions,we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. v' Page 2 of 4 DATA SHE E , 85001-0549 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Light output Lens Switch Switch Switch Switch Rating Position Position Position Per cent of UL rating versus angle Color Position A B C D ---. Of Candela HSpee. Amber UL 1638 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd —%Of Candela V Spee. 0 Amber UL 1971" 88 cd 60 cd 24 cd 12 cd 15.10 •5 5 10 15 so -20- _ 20 -25 25 30 Clear UL 1971 110 cd 75 cd 30 cd 15 cd 35 35 45-ao 40 45 *Equivalent Rating -50 J50 -55 ', 55 -6 1 60 • Wiring -65 65 • 70 Field wiring is connected to Genesis signals with terminals that ac- -00-75 11 %' s0 commodate#18 to#12 AWG(0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)wiring. i -as5 3 Os Speaker-only Wining -90 r 90 mmmrma nm2n nr•M w ' ��w a nnnnunr.n mmm To listed fire alarm control panel- 4 - Minium UL required candela light output N (supervised amplifier signal circuit —25.2 or 70.7V rms)+ I. + To next appliance, UL name plate maximum operating current(RMS-mA) tend-of-line or return to "110"or control equipment Cd rating "15"or"A" "30"or"B" "75"or"C" "D" ((��--jjI� Polarity shown in alarm condition ©©©© ®x(!/ 16 Vdc 96 130 239 294 fn 0 fn COCO0 CO CO 16 Vfwr 120 169 329 375 -0 + + Typical current,milliamps-average(RMS) L_IV L_IV Cd rating "15"or"A" "30"or"B" "75"or"C" "110"or "D" Speaker-Strobe Wiring 20 Vdc 6578 93(101) 182(188) 238(245) To listed fire alarm control panel— ( ) To amplifier signal circuit 24 Vdc 55 65 78 86 153 159 196 203 -25.2 or + + ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) "r"T 31 Vdc 45 53 63 69 120 124 151 157 To listed fire alarm control panel-( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (supervised signal circuit —20-24 Vdc)+20 Vfwr 56(106) 79(147) 147(264) 197(342) " " To next appliance, end-of-line 24 Vfwr 50(95) 68(130) 121 (225) 155(283) Polarity shown in Ci,C,`.,`., C.1 C.,��,Cl, or return to 27 Vfwr 44(84) 60(115) 107(200) 137(251) alarm condition control equipment Light output switch settings for UL 1971 listed models are selectable by numeric candela value.ECS/MNS appliances are selectable by A,B,C,or D designations. 0E14 8 Ell Specifications Genesis Speakers and Speaker-Strobes Housing Red or white textured UV stabilized,color impregnated engineered plastic. Dimensions Height:6.5"(165 mm).Width:5"(127 mm).Depth to wall: 1"(25 mm). Mounting Flush:North-American 4"square box,2 1/8"(54 mm)deep. (indoor wall mount only) Surface:model G4B(white)or G4RB(red)surface mount box. Wire Connections Screw terminals:separate polarized inputs for speaker and strobe, #18 to#12 AWG(0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)wire size Operating environment 32-120°F(0-49°C)ambient temperature;0-93%relative humidity. Agency Listings UL 1971,UL 1638,UL 1480,ULC S526,ULC S541,CSFM,MEA(FM pending) (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule.) Speakers Input/Operating Volts 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS.See ordering information. Speaker Taps/Output* 2 W=89 dBA; 1 W=86 dBA;1/2 W=83 dBA;1/4 W=80 dBA Speaker Cone Speaker frequency response:250 to 5,000 Hz. Optimized for voice intelligibility.4-inch(102mm)mylar cone,sealed back construction. Strobes UL 1971,ULC S526:selectable 15 cd,30 cd,75 cd,or 110 cd output Clear Strobe Output Rating UL 1971: 15 cd(fixed 15/75 cd models) UL 1638,ULCS526:75 cd(fixed 15/75 cd models) Amber Strobe Output Rating UL 1638: 13(D),26(C),65(B),95(A) Strobe Operating Voltage 16-33 Vdc Regulated, 16-33 V Full wave rectified(UL Voltage Designations"Regulated 24"and"24 fwr") Strobe Flash Rate One flash per second. All strobes:one flash per second(fps)within 200 milliseconds over 30 minutes on common circuit. Strobe Flash Synchronization All strobes:Synchronization source required to comply with UL 1971 synchronization standard. Temporal setting(private mode only):synchronized to temporal output on the same circuit. Synchronization Sources SIGA-CC1 S,SIGA-MCC1 S,SIGA-CC2A,SIGA-MCC2A,G1 M-RM BPS6A,BPS10A,APS6A,APS10A,i064,i0500,Fireshield Plus 3,5 and 10 zone. Strobe Lens Material Polycarbonate *Measured in reverberant room using 400-4,000 Hz band limited pink noise per UL 1480. Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0549 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Ordering Information TO WA R D S Light output switch settings for UL 1971 listed models are selectable by numeric candela value. ECS/MNS appliances are selectable by A, B,C,or D designations. A UTC Fire&Security Company All speaker-strobes include field-selectable 1/4,1/2, 1,or 2 watt taps Detection&alarm since 1872 Model I Housing I Marking I Lens I Strobe I Speaker I Ship Wt. U.S. Life safety Appliances(c/w running man icon screen printed on housing) T 888 378 2329 G4-S2 White None F 866 503 3996 G4R-S2 Red None Canada G4F-S2 White FIRE Chubb Edwards G4RF-S2 Red FIRE Selectable T 519 376 2430 G4-S2VM White None 15,30,75,or 25 Volt F 519 376 7258 110 cd G4R-S2VM Red None Southeast Asia G4F-S2VM White FIRE T:+65 6391 9300 G4RF-S2VM Red FIRE F:+65 6391 9306 G4-S7 White None 1.5 lbs. India G4R-S7 Red None Clear (0.68 kg) T:+91 80 4344 2000 G4F-S7 White FIRE F:+91 80 4344 2050 G4RF-S7 Red FIRE Selectable G4-S7VM White None 15,30,75,or Australia 110 cd 70 Volt T+61 3 9239 1200 G4R-S7VM Red None F+61 3 9239 1299 G4F-S7VM White FIRE G4RF-S7VM Red FIRE Europe G4F-S7V1575 White FIRE T+32 2 725 11 20 15/75 cd1 F+32 2 721 86 13 G4RF-S7V1575 1 Red I FIRE Latin America ECS/MNS Appliances(no running man icon on housing) T 305 593 4301 G4WA-S2VMA Alert Amber F 305 593 4300 G4WA-S2VMC Alert Clear Selectable utcfireandsecurity.com G4WN-S2VMA None Amber A,B,C or D G4WN-S2VMC None Clear ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. 25 Volt All rights reserved. G4WA-S2 Alert None Speaker only G4WN-S2 None None 1.5 lbs. G4WA-S7VMA White Alert Amber (0.68 kg) G4WA-S7VMC Alert Clear Selectable G4WN-S7VMA None Amber A,B,C or D G4WN-S7VMC None Clear 70 Volt G4WA-S7 Alert None G4WN-S7 None None Speaker only Accessories G1M-RM Synchronization Output Module (1-gang) 0.2 (0.1) SIGA-CC1 S Intelligent Synchronization Output Module(2-gang) 0.5 (0.23) SIGA-MCC1S Synchronization Output Module(Plug-in UIO) 0.18 (0.08) G4B Surface mount box,white 0.7 (0.32) G4RB Surface mount box,red 0.7 (0.32) C 7 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEE N 85001-0549 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 EST Catalog►Speakers,Telephones �ESTrM Life Safety & Communications Outdoor Rated ............ ......... ........ .... .... ............ ....... ....... Speakers and A R Strobes • Genesis WG4 Series ami :tents pending Overview Standard Features Genesis WG4 Series speakers and speaker-strobe appliances • Outdoor and indoor rated are among the most versatile emergency appliances of their kind. • Low profile design Rated for indoor or outdoor use,they are suitable for a wide range of wet and harsh environments with a listed operating temperature • Wall or ceiling mount range of as low as-31°F to as high as 151°F(-35°C to 66°C). • Room-side wiring accepts 18 to 12 AWG(0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Field-configurable light and sound output settings add to their on- • Wide operating temperature range site flexibility,while optional FIRE or ALERT markings and colored lenses make them ideal for either emergency communications/ • Field-selectable speaker wattage,voltage, and strobe candela mass notification(ECS/MNS)or fire alarm applications. settings These appliances are suitable for indoor and outdoor applications, • Field configurable temporal strobe output option and are ideal for challenging conditions such as parking garages • Clear and amber lenses available and process areas.They are listed for mounting on the ceiling or • the wall, and thanks to an ingenious full backplane sealing gasket, Fully compatible with Genesis synchronization protocols can be installed to recessed(in-the-pour/block)electrical boxes. • Standard and high-output strobe intensities WG4 signals also mount to suitable surface boxes served by race • Speaker only and Speaker/Strobe appliance options ways. Optional color-matched trim skirts provide a clean,finished appearance.All appliance wiring is accomplished room-side for easy installation. WG4 Series appliances feature highly intelligible and efficient mylar-cone loudspeakers.These are dual-voltage(25.2V or 70.7V), and have field-selectable output taps ranging from 80.8 dBA to 90.0 dBA.The multi-candela strobes are available with clear or amber lenses and in two output categories—standard and high-output.They are precision-timed to meet UL 1971 synchro- nization standards, and field-configurable for one of four candela intensities.Wattage and candela settings are viewable even after installation through an innovative sealed viewport display. Pagel of 4 DATA 85001-0626 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Application Installation and Mounting Speaker Application o1- WG4 signals are rated for The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used outdoor use and are with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the aver- caa asp suitable for indoor or age ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level oe°°� �e g a°�p�a outdoor applications on having a duration of at least Typical Sound Output o ,. v0o' walls or ceilings. For 60 seconds,whichever is Distribution dBA V''‘ surface-mounting in Measured in anechoic chamber 'pi /�' greater.This is measured 5 i e� 6� outdoor or wet applica- feet(1.5 m)above the floor. r� ili . . i , „Lo tions, appliances must be °� pp ; > s mounted to an Edwards Doublingthe distance from I Cr :::0':°8ir 96 90 " .888 •1 � 449 electrical box. In dry the signal to the ear will 5ft(1.Sm) • sok . Radius 1 .,'�` conditions,they are theoretically cause a 6dB v'• " compatible with standard � .7i r;.. p reduction in the received loft(3.05m) INS, 4-inch by 11/-inch deep sound pressure level.The ilhi, •3 Radius electrical boxes.When actual effect depends onIlL"0 using the optional the acoustic properties of WG4WTS or WG4RTS trim skirt,a 449 or 2-1/8"deep box must materials in the space. Dou- • be used. bling the power output of a device(e.g.: a speaker from 6. The Genesis WG4 Speaker-Strobe may be wall-or ceiling-mount- 1W to 2W)will increase the ed, and may be placed in one of four positions: strobe above, sound pressure level by 9o° 75 60 45° strobe below, and strobe to either side.The shallow depth of 3dBA. Genesis Series Cone Speaker/strobe Genesis devices leaves room behind the appliance for extra wiring. Strobe Application Field Configuration Genesis clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors Genesis WG4 speakers may be set to 70-or 25-Volt operation, as wall-or ceiling-mounted public-mode notification appliances for and for 1/4, 1/2, 1,or 2 watt operation.The wattage setting(repre- the hearing impaired, and UL 1638-listed for outdoor applications. sented by the letters Z,Y,X,and T)is changed by removing the Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise cover and simply sliding the S1 switch until the desired setting ap- conditions exceed specified levels,where occupants use hearing pears.The setting remains visible through a small window on the protection, and in areas of public accommodation. UL 1638-listed front of the device after the cover is installed.The voltage setting colored lens strobe lights are available for ECS/MNS and outdoor (70V or 25V)is toggled at S3.This setting is not visible after the applications. cover is replaced. Visible appliance synchronization is required to avoid causing Genesis WG4 speaker-strobes also feature selectable candela issues with people who have Photosensitive Epilepsy(PSE). Noti- output.The actual light output for a given selection depends on fication appliance synchronization is also generally required when the color of the strobe lens and whether it is a high output model more than one strobe appliance are in the same field of view from or a standard output model. Refer to the specification tables for any one location.All Genesis strobes meet UL synchronization corresponding settings.The candela setting(represented by the requirements(within 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period)when letters D, C, B, and A)is changed by removing the cover and used with a synchronization source. simply sliding the S2 switch until the desired setting appears.The setting remains visible through a small window on the front of the device after the cover is installed. ECS/MNS Application Genesis ECS/MNS appliances bring the SPKR+ • M• SPKR+ STROBE- ; STROBE- same high-performance life safety features STROBE UN- - STROBE and unobtrusive design to mass notification 111 ss:s olta e r applications.Standard models are available Q g with clear or amber lenses and optional �I / -'�y�� 'P ALERT housing labels,they are ideal for IU b0 G applications that require differentiation O ,r.� �= between life safety and mass notification kAkI ' '_ alerts.Appliances with red,green or blue wattage ��� p ■ • ■ • lenses are also available. Contact Edwards \I� :} Customer Service for details. S2: JP1:Strobe temporal •I ,pn Candela mode selection WARNING:These devices will not operate without electrical power. Genesis speaker-strobes may also be configured for temporal As fires frequently cause power interruptions,we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. flash.This power-saving feature is intended for private mode signaling only.To set the device for temporal flash, snip the jumper Edwards recommends that these devices always be installed in at JP1. accordance with the latest recognized edition of national and local codes. Refer to the appropriate codes and standards for mounting height information. Page 2 of 4 DATA S i-. 85001-0626 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Specifications Light output Operating voltage 0 Speaker 25 VRMS or 70 VRMS,switch selectable ,5 10 -5 5 +° ,5 Default 70 VRMS 30-25 -20 20 25 30 Strobe 24 VDC,24 VFWR nominal Angle .35 35 -40 40 Supervisory voltage 30 V max. -45 45 Speaker response 400 to 4,000 Hz 5550 5055 Wire size 12 to 18 AWG(0.75 to 2.50 mm2) -60 60 SIGA-CC1 S,SIGA-MCC1 S,SIGA-CC2A, -65 65 Compatible strobe -70 70 SIGA-MCC2A,G1 M-RM,BPS6A, BPS10A, synchronization -75 75 APS6A,APS10A,3X-SFS1,1064,10500, 80 sources Fireshield Plus 3,5 and 10 zone. -85 85 -90 90 Compatible Wet:Model 449(WG4 trim skirt recommended) -°"°°°��°°""'""M""���� c�"""""`""°"��"°°°- electrical boxes Dry:4"square by 1-1/2"deep box when used UL off-axis candela requirements as a percent of the UL rated output without a trim skirt.When trim skirt is used, box must be 4"square by 2-1/8"deep. Operating environment Wet Strobe Switch Position Temperature -31 to 151 °F(-35 to 66°C) Indoor rating Relative humidity 0 to 95%noncondensing per UL 1971 (candela) A B C D Lens Clear 87 70 29 15 Sound level output (dBA) Standard Color Output Amber` 62 59 25 13 Wattage Switch Position 25 V 70 VModels Output 2 W T 90.0 89.7 VDC 319 167 144 106 1 W X 87.1 86.9 (-SVMx) Current Y W Y 84.0 83.9 FWR 386 347 178 120 Y4 W Z 80.8 80.8 Lens Clear 161 147 123 102 dBA=Decibels,A-weighted. High Color Amber" 130 125 101 84 UL 1480:Sound level output at 10 ft.(3.05 m)measured in a reverberant Output room using 400 to 4,000 Hz band-limited pink noise. Models VDC 495 494 390 324 (-SVMHx) Current FWR 646 607 487 412 Wiring "UL 1971 Equivalent candela value Field wiring is connected to Genesis signals with terminals that ac Strobe Switch Position commodate#18 to#12 AWG(0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)wiring. Outdoor rating per UL 1638(candela) A B C D Speaker-only Wining To listed fire alarm control panel— Clear 35 28 12 6 (supervised amplifier signal circuit Lens —25.2 or 70.7V rms)+ 'I + Standard To next appliance, Color Amber" 25 24 10 5 end-of-line Output or return to control equipment Models VDC 319 167 144 106 (-SVMx) Current Polarity shown in alarm condition ®®®® (6®® FWR 386 347 178 120 w 1I) W O N lA A A Lens Clear 65 60 50 41 alal I-N 1111 High Color Amber" 52 51 41 34 Output Models VDC 495 494 390 324 Speaker-Strobe Wiring (-SVMHx) Current To listed fire alarm control panel— — FWR 646 607 487 412 (supervised amplifier signal circuit —25.2 or 70.7V rms)+ EMIL + UL 1971 Equivalent candela value To listed fire alarm control panel 111111I 111111(supervised signal circuit —20-24 Vdc)+ 1111111 • " "" " + To next appliance, end-of-line a larm shown in `,`,`�,`t `�,Tin `�, °r return to alarm condition ���� � �� control equipment FM 1 MP Page3of4 DATA Sii.m , 85001-0626 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Ordering Information Eit: WAROS pan F F UTC Fire&SecurityCom Ili''r� I!i''r� Company RR E . E ; :0 :0`��. Detection&alarm since 1872 � _ � ' ., , U.S. WG4RF WG4RF WG4WF WG4WF WG4RN WG4RN WG4WN WG4WN WG4WN WG4WA WG4WA -S -SVMC -S -SVMC -S -SVMC -S -SVMC -SVMA -SVMA -SVMC T 888 378 2329 F 866 503 3996 All speakers include field-selectable 1A,1/2, 1,or 2 watt taps and selectable 25V or 75V operation. Canada Chubb Edwards Model I Housing I Marking I Lens I Strobe Output* I Ship Wt. T 519 376 2430 Life safety Appliances F 519 376 7258 WG4RF-SVMC Red Southeast Asia FIRE Selectable T:+65 6391 9300 WG4WF-SVMC White F:+65 6391 9306 WG4RN-SVMC Red standard output None 15/29/70/87 cd India WG4WN-SVMC White Clear T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 WG4RF-SVMHC Red Selectable FIRE 1.5 lbs. Australia WG4WF-SVMHC White _ high output (0.68 kg) T+61 3 9239 1200 WG4RN-SVMHC Red None 102/123/147/161 cd F+61 3 9239 1299 WG4RF-S Red Europe FIRE WG4WF-S White T+32 2 725 11 20 Speaker Only F+32 2 721 86 13 WG4RN-S Red None Latin America WG4WN-S White T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 ECS/MNS Appliances utcfireandsecurity.com WG4WA-SVMA ALERT Selectable Amber standard output ©2011 UTC Fire&Security. WG4WN-SVMA None 13/25/59/62 cd All rights reserved. WG4WA-SVMC Clear 15/29/70/87 cd ALERT WG4WA-SVMHA White Selectable high output 1.5 lbs. WG4WN-SVMHA Amber 84/101/125/130 cd (0.68 kg) None WG4WN-SVMHC Selectable high output WG4WA-SVMHC Clear 102/123/147/161 cd ALERT WG4WA-S Speaker Only *See light output tables for more specific strobe values. Accessories WG4WTS Surface Skirt for Genesis WG4 appliance family,white. WG4RTS Surface Skirt for Genesis WG4 appliance family,red. WG4GSKT Replacement Mounting Gasket 449 Surface mount box,outdoor rated Page 4 of 4 DATA S i-.L L 85001-0626 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 EST Catalog►Strobes,Horns, Bells,Chimes �ESTTM Life Safety & Communications Temporal Horns and Horn -strobes ori. 757 Series I ; R F M MEA O (E L� Patented Overview Standard Features Integrity temporal horns and temporal horn-strobes are specially • UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe designed for use with compatible life safety communication and Integrity strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 require- control equipment to alert occupants of a life safety event. The ments when used with a synchronization source. horn emits a piercing low frequency sound that is easily heard • Adjustable Audible Output above moderate ambient noise levels.The flash from its strobe Select temporal or continuous tones, and High setting for 98 can be noticed from almost any position in the room, corridor, or large open space. dBA output or Low setting for 94 dBA sound output. • Genesis-compatible Integrity's rugged plastic housing is made from durable and fire All Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet UL retardant, high impact plastic with a slightly textured surface. Its 1971 synchronization requirements when used with an external ingenious mounting plate firmly holds the device in place with a control module. single screw.A separate trim plate is not required.Terminals ac- cept up to#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire for polarized connections. • Approved for public and private mode applications UL 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired Strobes are shipped with standard wall mount style"FIRE" lens and UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. markings. Where ceiling orientation, other languages, or different lens markings are required, Edwards offers optional LKW and LKC • Durable red or white Noryl front plate series Lens Marking Kits.These optional lens markings simply Ideal for outdoor, industrial or harsh environments. snap on to the strobe. Consult Edwards for availability of special • Field changeable field markings lens markings. Lens language or standard"FIRE" marking is easily changed Integrity horns and horn-strobes are designed for 16 to 33 Vdc with optional LKW and LKC series lens kits. operation and must be connected to signal circuits that output a • Easy Installation constant(not pulsed)voltage.A diode is used to allow full signal Flush mount to standard North American 4"square or two- circuit supervision. gang box. Integrity's universal mounting plate allows it to be wired and then left hanging free for easy inspection and testing before it is fastened to the electrical box. Pagel of 6 DATA SHEL , 85001-0341 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Application NOTE:The installation of visible and audible signals are subject to national and local standards,codes,and ordinances. Consult your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements,application standards,and minimum performance specifications. Horns Strobes During installation,the horn is configured for steady or temporal Edwards strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted tone signal and either low(94 dBA)or high(98 dBA)output.When public-mode notification appliances for the hearing impaired. Prevail- temporal output is selected all horns on a common two-wire ing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions circuit are self-synchronized(see specifications). External control exceed specified levels,where occupants use hearing protection, modules are not required for audible synchronization. and in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with Having Jurisdiction for details. alert or alarm signals is at least 15dB above the average ambi- As part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, 757 Series ent sound level,or 5dB above the maximum sound level having a strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements(within 10 mil- duration of at least 60 seconds,whichever is greater, measured liseconds other over a two-hour period)when used with a syn- 5' (1.5m)above the floor.The average ambient sound level is the chronization source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid RMS,A-weighted sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. epileptic sensitivity. Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result Integrity strobes are fully compatible with Edwards Genesis sig- in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level.The actual nals. effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space.A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. NOTE:The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate ut Angle - to alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates outp Degrees that the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90%of sleeping persons -1 0 15 is approximately 100 cd.Edwards recommends that strobes in sleeping -3O..� �1* 30 rooms be rated at at least 110 cd. ♦ ♦ �gim�1 � ♦ 4:; ;I Ii,1��.�:5 WARNING:These devices will not operate without electrical power.As 60 �, ` ,, � 60 fires frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as ��,,,, `` � ��,�,�$t75 backup power supplies may be required. 751•, � Ior I is Nagat is •Iwo -90 ,�wiln ` �, 90 105 95 85 75 dBA 75 85 95 105 Temporal Horn (dBA) Typical Sound Output Distribution dBA measured at 10 ft in anechoic chamber 757 Series Temporal Horn(HIGH'output) Installation and J North American 2-gang electric box,23/4"(69mm)minimum Mounting (Alternative:4"square box 0 2-1/8"(54mm)deep) All models fit to a standard flush ' ' Mounting Plate(provided) mounted, North-American two- \\ gang electrical box, 23/4 inch(69 1 , .. ( 0 m mm)minimum. Optional flush trims are not required. For sur- O face mount, use EST's custom indoor and outdoor surface boxes painted in color-matched red or . 0` i white epoxy. Edwards recom- mends that fire alarm horn/strobes (i) \_#6-32 screws(by others) always be installed in accordance Surface Box-5-5/8"(143mm)sq.x with the latest recognized edi- Housing 3-9/16"(91 mm)deep tion of national and local fire alarm / \ 5-1/2"(140mm)x 5-1/2"(140mm)x 5/8"(16mm) codes. W\ Single Mounting Screw(provided) Page 2 of 6 DATA S H E E N 85001-0341 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Typical Wiring Strobe Operating Current (RMS) The strobe must be connected to signal circuits which output UL a constant(not pulsed)voltage.The horn can be connected to Rating 15 cd 15/75 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd continuous voltage circuits. 16 Vdc 109 150 130 263 329 16 Vfwr 150 210 189 333 420 HORN and STROBE FIRST DEVICE ON SAME CIRCUIT Tical +< Horn/Strobe Horn/Strobeyp 15 cd 15/75 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd To UL/ULC Listed Current Fire Alarm Control H+ + 24 Vdc 69 90 89 159 180 Panel Signal Circuit �H- AH- as+ s+ 24 Vfwr 108 128 134 255 260 -< s- mos- To Next Device or EOL Resistor >- >+ Vdc:Volts direct current,regulated and filtered HORN and STROBE _ ONVfwr:Volts full wave rectified SEPARATE CIRCUIT FIRST DEVICE + To UL/ULC Listed + To Next Device Fire Alarm Control Horn/Strobe Horn/Strobe or EOL Resistor Current Draw Notes and Comments Panel Signal Circuithorn _ 1. Current values are shown in mA.slin Ism •011 2. UL Nameplate Rating can vary from Typical Current due to measurement meth- To UL/ULC Listed + Fire Alarm Control' -M r-ice ods and instruments used. To Next Strobe Device Panel Signal Circuit or EOL Resistor 3. Edwards recommends using the Typical Current for system design including NAC - and Power Supply loading and voltage drop calculations. + 4. Use the 16 Vdc RMS current ratings for filtered power supply and battery AH calculations.Use the 16 Vfwr RMS current ratings for unfiltered power supply calculations. 5. Fuses,circuit breakers and other overcurrent protection devices are typically rated for current in RMS values.Most of these devices operate based upon the heating affect of the current flowing through the device.The RMS current dBA Output Horn-strobes UL464 Average-anechoic Peak-anechoic Temporal Steady Temporal Steady Temporal Steady High dB Output _ 79.0 85.0 97.0 97.0 102.0 102.0 Low dB Output 75.0 79.0 93.0 93.0 98.0 98.0 determines the heating affect and therefore,the trip and hold threshold for those Horns UL464 Average-anechoic Peak-anechoic Temporal Steady Temporal Steady Temporal Steady High dB Output 82.0 85.0 98.0 98.0 104.0 104.0 Low dB Output 75.0 82.0 94.0 94.0 99.0 99.0 dBA Output Notes and Comments • All values shown are dBA measured at 10 feet(3.01 m). • UL1480 values measured in reverberation room. • Average values are measured in anechoic chamber. Page 3 of 6 DATA S H E L . 85001-0341 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Light Output Patterns 15 cd(-5A)Series Strobes 15/75 cd(-7A)Series Strobes 30 cd(-3A)Series Strobes 75 cd 1-4A)Series Strobes 110 cd(-8A)Series Strobes Horizontal Output Horizontal Output Horizontal Output Horizontal Output Horizontal Output degrees degrees degrees degrees degrees -15 0 5 -15 0 5 -15 0 5 -15 0 5 -15 0 5 30 -45 -30 Q�'1 �'4 045 45 30 11 3045 -45 30'`/1 II��045 -45 30,�1� 13045 -45 3o,,'ti"��i�Q 45 60 �V401.--"4�r__��� 60 60 ```11 ,���' 60 60 �,`I itib 0 60 60 `�./ 4,'� vow, - � �����pi =11116/// �. o�a�ipi��� � � � �� ; .,.. 'M.� 140 OM -751 `INV j75 -75 0.4 s�h��4 175 -75���. GI75 -75..6.4 ..<01.....:.:4175 75 � e0y...:4 75 -90.4.1 *--' ;!G��90 -90�� ��ir/� 90 -90�47�—� 5'0��90 -90 al �- 90 -90�i�~ ''!GG---90 30 20 10 cd 10 20 30 100 50 cd 50 100 60 40 20 cd 20 40 60 140 100 60 cd 60 100 140 200 100 cd 100 200 Vertical Output Vertical Output Vertical Output Vertical Output Vertical Output -90.75 100-90.75.60 60-90.75 60 140-90.75.60 150-90_75 60 30 'I' -6045 I�I/ 45 ��% 45 ��% 45 ��it� 45 20 �U�II��'� -30 ,''''�� 30 40 ��%�► 30 100 /I��ry -30 100 ��// 30 I%%/ is 50 11�� ,�� is ��//O`��IyG_ls �� ,Q is II/f�' i is 10 , 9..;I 0 •♦ a 20 7� Ott 2 0 r3cd WI/%p `° , )" `° C `l�'••� o '� 5d ����. `o li�cu -��'� m �. "' cd U� `. "' •27 N cd e��` y l4//) 0 y 10 I``Q���is S0 II1``�`�`°5 20 III\t '' O s 60 ID\�``�`',, 5 so iI\*—30 5 � x,30 � ���\�tea♦ ,� 20 1/�����45 100 II1"`p 45 40 gl�\,,��45 100 (f��\�,��453° 100 ��\�`�45 30 90/`60 90 60 90" 60 140 901„60 150 901``60 =Average UL min= =Average UL min= =Average UL min= =Average UL min= =Average UL min= Vertical _90° -90° , 0° Horizont9al IIMLIIi1' Specifications 90° Rated Strobe Output-candela 757-1A-T 757-5A-T 757-7A-T 757-3A-T 757-4A-T 757-8A-T (cd) UL 1638 15 cod in oor 75 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd y) UL 1971 N/A (horn only) 15 cd 15 cd wall 30 cd wall 75 cd wall 110 cd wall (wall mount only) 15 cd ceiling 15 cd ceiling 60 cd ceiling 60 cd ceiling ULC S526 15 cd 75 cd 30 cd 75 cd 120 cd Standalone Synchronization Strobe flash at 1 per second within 200 milliseconds on common circuit Horn pulses at temporal rate Characteristics(note 2) within 200 milliseconds on common circuit Operating Volts Strobe: 16-33 Vdc or Vfwr Continuous Horn: 16-33 Vdc or Vfwr Continuous Anechoic:High Setting-104 dBA(peak)/98 dBA(avg);Low Setting-99 dBA(peak)/94 dBA(avg) Horn Output(note 1) Reverberent:High Setting-85 dBA(continuous)/82 dBA(temporal); Low Setting-82 dBA(continuous)/75 dBA(temporal) Horn Current High Output:40 mA @ 24 Vdc;55mA @ 24 Vrms FWR Low Output:20 mA @ 24 Vdc; 28 mA @ 24 Vrms FWR Strobe Flash Synchronization Synchronized at one flash per second.External control module necessary to meet UL 1971 synchronization requirements of 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period. Synchronization Sources G1M-RM,SIGA-CC1S,SIGA-MCC1S, BPS6A,BPS10A Strobe Marking Supplied with LKW-1 "FIRE"red letters,vertical both sides(Wall Mount) -see LKW and LKC series for ceiling style and optional markings. Flash Tube Enclosure Clear LEXAN with white marking sleeve Housing Textured,color impregnated engineered plastics-exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating Wire Connections Terminals-separate,polarized inputs for Horn&Strobe,#12 AWG(2.5mm2)maximum INDOOR Operating Environment 32-120°F(0-49°C)ambient temperature.93%relative humidity @ 40°C 98%relative humidity @ 40°C;-31-150°F(-35-66°C)ambient temperature OUTDOOR Operating Environment (757-4A:rated at 48 cd @-35°C per UL/@-40°C per ULC) (must use weatherproof box) (757-7A:rated at 17.7 cd @-35°C per ULJ@-40°C per ULC) (757-8A:rated at 70.7 cd @-35°C per UL/@-40°C per ULC) Mounting INDOOR Flush:North-American 2-gang box,3"high x 4"wide x 23/4"(69 mm)minimum Surface:757A-SB Back box Bi-directional:757A-BDF Mounting Frame Mounting-OUTDOOR Surface:757A-WB Weatherproof Box UL 1971,UL 1638,UL 464,ULC S526,ULC S525, MEA,CSFM,FM.CE Agency Listings (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule) Note 1-Measured at 10 ft(3m)@ 24 Vdc.Subtract 3 dBA for models with strobes.Note 2-Temporal audible pattern is defined as:Y2 sec ON,1/2 sec OFF,1/2 sec ON,1/2 sec OFF,1/2 sec ON,11/2 sec OFF,then repeat cycle.Integrity audible will not be affected by Genesis signal silence operation when on the same two wire circuit with Genesis horn strobes. Page 4 of 6 DATA SHEE N 85001-0341 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 Ordering Information Catalog Ship Wt., LKW-1 "FIRE",Wall Orientation(supplied) Number Description lb.(kg) LKW-1 R "FIRE",Wall Orientation,RED LKW-2 "FEU",Wall Orientation Temporal Horns LKW-3 "FIRE/FEU",Wall Orientation 757-1A-T" Temporal Horn,Red 1.7(0.8) LKW-4 "SMOKE",Wall Orientation 0.1 (.05) LKW-5 "HALON",Wall Orientation Temporal Horn-Strobes LKW-6 "CO2",Wall Orientation 757-7A-T* Temporal Horn-Strobe, 15/75cd,Red LKW-7 "EMERGENCY",Wall Orientation 757-5A-T* Temporal Horn-Strobe, 15cd,Red LKW-8 "ALARM",Wall Orientation 757-3A-T* Temporal Horn-Strobe,30cd,Red 2.0(0.9) LKW-9 "FUEGO",Wall Orientation 757-4A-T* Temporal Horn-Strobe,75cd,Red Add Suffix"W"to catalog no.for WHITE.(e.g. 757-7A-TW) 757-8A-T* Temporal Horn-Strobe, 110cd,Red Change"W"to"C"for CEILING mount.(e.g.LKC-1) Synchronization Sources G1M-RM 9a nge)sis Signal Master Remote Mount(1- 0.2 (0.1) SIGA- Synchronization Output Module(Standard 0.5 (0.23) CC1S Mount)-UL/ULC Listed SIGA- Synchronization Output Module(UIO Mount) 0.18 (0.08) MCC1S -UL Listed BPS6A 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) BPS10A 10 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) Mounting Accessories 757A-SB" Surface Box,Red, Indoor 1.5(0.7) 757A-WB" Weatherproof Box,Red,Surface 757A-BDF* Bi-directional Frame,Red 4(1.8) *Add-W for White housings. Lens Marking Kits(see note 1) Page 5 of 6 DATA S h 85001-0341 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 WARDS A UTC Fire&Security Company Detection&alarm since 1872 U.S. T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Canada Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi rean dsec u rity.c om ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 C Page6of6 DATA SHEE 85001-0341 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 6 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input/Output T.-8T TTM Life Safety & Communications -a • • O Signal Modules . + . ,,�� L.,:. SIGA—CC1 , SIGA—MCC1 , _ _-- a � - "®me MEA SIGA—CC2 & SIGA—MCC2 �� — 7f . _ CE 0 laN~'w�r'� �•^ • ,.~11 i Application Notes 4i i • Available 1 4 SIGA-CC SIGA-MCC Overview Standard Features SIGA-CC1/MCC1 Single Input Signal Modules and SIGA-CC2/ • Single and Dual input(riser)select MCC2 Dual Input Signal Modules are part of EST's Signature Use for connecting supervised 24 Vdc AudibleNisible signal Series system.They are intelligent analog addressable devices circuits, or 25 and 70 VRMS Audio Evacuation and Telephone used for connecting, upon command from the loop controller, circuits to their power inputs. supervised Class B signal or telephone circuits to their respective • Ring-tone generator power inputs.The power inputs may be polarized 24 Vdc to oper- When configured for telephone circuits,the SIGA-CC1 gener- ate audible and visible signal appliances or 25 and 70 VRMS to ates its own ring-tone signal eliminating the need for a separate operate audio evacuation speakers and firefighter's telephones. ring tone circuit. The actual operation of the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 and SIGA-CC2/ • Plug-in(UIO)or standard 2-gang mount MCC2 is determined by the"personality code"selected by the UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules installer. It is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop are required.The 2-gang mount version is ideal for remote controller during system configuration. locations that require a single module. The SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CC2 mount to standard North Ameri- • Automatic device mapping can two-gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for locations Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature connections are made to each module. devices on the wire loop. The SIGA-MCC1 and SIGA-MCC2 are part of the UIO family of • Electronic addressing plug-in Signature Series modules.They function identically to the Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con- SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CC2, but take advantage of the modular troller, a PC,or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool; flexibility and easy installation that characterize all UIO modules. there are no switches or dials to set. Two-and six-module UIO motherboards are available.These can • accommodate individual risers for each on-board module, or risers Intelligent device with microprocessor that are shared by any combination of its UIO modules.All wiring All decisions are made at the module to allow lower corn connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. U10 munication speed with substantially improved control panel assemblies may be mounted in Edwards enclosures. response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties;twisted or shielded wire is not required. • Ground fault detection by address Detects ground faults right down to the device level. Pagel of 6 DATA S N t t l 85001-0237 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Installation Application The SIGA-CC1 and SIGA-CC2:mount to North American The operation of the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 and SIGA-CC2/MCC2 2-1/2 inch(64 mm)deep two-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch(38 mm) is determined by their sub-type code or"Personality Code".The deep 4-inch square boxes with two-gang covers and SIGA-MP code is selected by the installer depending upon the desired ap- mounting plates.The terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 plication and is down-loaded from the loop controller. Codes 5 and mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. 6 apply to the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only. Code 7 is assigned to the VSIGA-CC2/MCC2 only and automatically applies to both circuits(A and B). Ill C iS oril Personality Code 5:SIGNAL POWER or AUDIO EVACU- A0 *0 TION(SINGLE RISER).Valid for the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only. / ! �' Configures the module for use as a Class B AudibleNisible Signal I \OAT�i power(24 Vdc polarized)or Audio Evacuation(25 or 70 VRMS) 0 0 p �i j power selector.The ring-tone generator is disabled.The output �� �� MOW circuit is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists, � ''`�. the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/visible signal �\; o �a ti circuit to prevent connection to the power circuit. �, r� `� o,� Personality Code 6:TELEPHONE w/RING-TONE(SINGLE RISER).Valid for the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only. Configures the module for use as a Telephone power selector.When a telephone m '1, handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its hook,the module generates its own Ring-Tone signal.A separate ring-tone circuit is not needed.The module sends this signal to the control panel to SIGA-MCC1 1dd SIGA-MCC2:mount the UIO motherboard indicate that an off-hook condition is present.When the system inside a suitable Edwards enclosure with screws and washers operator responds to the call,the ring-tone signal is disabled. provided. Plug the SIGA-MCC1 or SIGA-MCC2 into any available Personality Code 7:SIGNAL POWER or AUDIO EVACUA- position on the motherboard and secure the module to the moth- TION(DUAL RISER).Valid for the SIGA-CC2/MCC2 only. Con- erboard with the captive screws.Wiring connections are made figures the module for use as a two circuit Class B AudibleNisible to the terminals on the motherboard(see wiring diagram). UIO Signal power(24 Vdc polarized)or Audio Evacuation(25 or 70 motherboard terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2to VRMS)power selector.The single output circuit is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a short exists,the control panel inhibits ul0 Motherboard the activation of the audible/visible signal circuit to prevent con- - t 6-32 nection to the power circuit. Self-tapping screws l -c fl Warnings & Cautions Plug-in(UIO) Captive Module screws This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires fre- __ __ 0__14 quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further 1 safeguards with your fire protection specialist. #6 Flat washers _ Cabinet or electrical enclosure Com pat i b i l ity The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's 0.75 mm2)wire size. Signature Loop Controller. Edwards recommends that this module be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Testing & Maintenance Electronic Addressing The loop controller electronically ad The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- dresses each module saving valuable time during system com tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. program shows the current state of each module and other perti- Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on nent messages. Single modules may be turned off(de-activated) board memory.The loop controller identifies each device on the temporarily,from the control panel. loop and assigns a"soft"address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper system Program/Service Tool. operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Personality Codes 5 and 6 apply to the SIGA-CC1/MCC1 only and Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and are assigned by the installer. Code 7 applies to the SIGA-CC2/ ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. MCC2 only. It is factory assigned; no user configuration is required. Page 2 of 6 DATA SHEE N 85001-0237 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Typical Wiring (SIGA-CC2/MCC2) Modules will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG(1.50mm2)and#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Typical Speaker Circuit Personality Code 7 nal 47KEt E Listed 47K52 EOL Personality Typical Notification Appli. ce Circuit Bi-polar Transient Protector Code 7 �+ (P/N 235196P) 'c' UL/ULC Listed • ell CH2(INPUT 2) 47K0 EOL From UL/ULC Listed 1 RISER IN(-) ›.— • • . -• Control Panel 11`CH2(INPUT 2)> RISER IN(+) C '/\/Style V(Class B) IP CH2(INPUT 2)RISER OUT(+) or EOL Resistor _0.CH2(INPUT 2)RISER OUT(-) Supplied with UL/ULC - + Listed Control Panel TB4 A0(1)11)(1D1*UO O TB3 14 13 12 11 to 9 Red LED10.0 ®4 Green LED (Alarm/Active) (Normal) e a s 4 3 2 TB] TB2 r111757:7171 ITo Next Device I. (INPUT 1)RISER OUT(+) or EOL Resistor I.CHI(INPUT 1)RISER OUT(-) ME) Control Panel CHI(INPUT 1) > Code 7 Supplied with UL/ULC (CHt(INPUT 1) Listed Control Panel From UL/ULC Listed {CHI IN(+) Personality Typical Speaker Circuit RISER IN(-) From Signature (DATA IN(+) — DATA OUT(+) 1 p� p1 u4 UL/ULE Listed {l 1) Gi Gi 47K52 EOL Controller or To Next Device Previous Device DATA IN(-) DATA OUT(-) 1 Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit SIGA-CC2 Code 7 Bi-polar Transient5Pro[ector ,,��j . . 4L/ULEListed (P/N 23351996P) 47KS2 EOL Notes 00 4 g U10(R)series motherboard /'\ For maximum wire resistance and maximum wire distances, 1 2 3 4 MCC2 refer to IOMC Manual(P/N 270144). /\ Maximum#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire.Min.#18(0.75mm2). + 07 0 Poao ,k.i._ 00 Data In �■ 3 Riser 1 Out r•C - 1 A Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for 4 I �■ ; Riser1 In Signature II ■ wiring specifications. Data ■ 2 ■t I Circuit I 1 ■tic A\ These modules will NOT support two-wire smoke detectors. + Data Out+ eA\ All wiring power limited and supervised.If the input source ■ ; + Riser2Out is non-power limited,then maintain spacing of 1/4 inch or ' - h ■ 1 V + Riser 2ln use FPL,FPLP,FPLR or equivalent in accordance with NEC. Green LED(Normal)Red LED(Active) A The SIGA-U106 does not come with TB8 through TB13. 0NM UIOR series motherboard individual ARiser 1 connection.Install the /� Supervised and power-limited. that use thesamebetween adjacent modules 1 2 3 4 that use same riser. Riser 1 In +; I I 1-j+Riser 1 Out A\ Supervised and power-limited when connected to a power- limited source.If the source is nonpower-limited,maintain SIGH-MCC2 a space of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR,or an equivalent in accordance with the Na- tional Electrical Code. Maximum Output Load The input for this riser is common to all modules. 24Vdc 25V 70V Signals Audio Audio 2A 50W 35W Page 3 of 6 DATA 5 N t t I 85001-0237 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Typical Wiring (SIGA-CC1/MCC1) Modules will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG(1.50mm2)and#12(2.5mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Personality Typical Speaker Circuit Code 5 UL/ULC HI HA Hi 47K0EOL Listed Personality Typical Telephone Circuit Code 6 Maximum Output Load 1 3113 Di UL/ULC Listed 24Vdc 25V 70V 47K0 EOL Signals Audio Audio 2A 50W 35W Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit Code 5 10110 :41 UL/ULC Listed 47K0 EOL • • Style Y Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector(P/N 235196P)here. (Class B) AIAA II-117111 TB3 10 9 Red LED I ® ® Green LED (Alarm/Active) 19 7 6 s 4 3 2 1 I (Normal) Personality Typical Speaker Circuit TB21161 Code 5 �I • UL/ULC Listed IIIMIII RISER OUT(+) To Next Device or OA Hl 47K0 EOL From UL/ULC Listed 'OMNI, l EOL Resistor Supplied Control Panel RISER OUT(-)f with UL/ULC Listed I R (+) Control Panel ,RISER SER IN IN(-) Personality Typical Telephone Circuit Code 6 DATA IN(+) • I DATA OUT(+)l To Next Device Ellti El UL/ULC Listed . DATA IN(-) , DATA OUT(-) J 471(0 EOL From Signature Controller Q or Previous Device SIGA-CC1 Personality Typical Notification Appliance Circuit Code 5 foto Notes UL/ULC Listed 47K0 EOL L • • • 011 A\ Maximum#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire.Min.#18(0.75mm2). 5 -.I' Install the Bi-Polar Transient Protector(P/N 235196P)here. ARefer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet AAAA for wiring specifications. 1 2 3 4 MCC1 ■� series motherboard At These modules will NOT support two-wire smoke deter- ,,,,,tors. + _DataIn IUIO(R) ram3 +Riser 1 Out A All wiring power limited and supervised.If the input Signature 4Riser 1 In source is non-power limited,then maintain spacing Data TB14 AAA of 1/4 inch or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR or equivalent in ac- Circuit ■ 2 , s 6 s cordance with NEC. Data Out z * The SIGA-U106 does not come with TB8 through TB13. — a M4 No connections required for Mg 2 MCC1.Other modules may A Supervised and power-limited. WM e; require connections. Green LED(Normal) TB15 A\ If the source is nonpower-limited,maintain a space of Red LED(Active) °O°„'U■`I® ■ UIOR series motherboard individual 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, 1 2 3 4 Riser 1 connection.Install the FPLR,or an equivalent in accordance with the National L0 p _ jumpers between adjacent '— modules that use the same riser. Electrical Code. Riser 1 In ± 1,+ Riser 1 Out - A\ The input for this riser is common to all modules. SIGA-MCC1 Page 4 of 6 DATA SHE E , 85001-0237 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Signature Series Overview The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Automatic Device Mapping-The Signature Data Control- Edwards is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mount- ler(SDC)learns where each device's serial number address is ing bases, multiple-function input and output modules, network installed relative to other devices on the circuit.The SDC keeps a and non-network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance map of all Signature Series devices connected to it.The Signature and service tools.Analog information from equipment connected Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature.With to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. interactive menus and graphic support,the wired circuits between An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures each device can be examined. Layout or"as-built"drawing and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an information showing branch wiring(T-taps), device types and their alarm.The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four address are stored on disk for printing hard copy.This takes the additional benefits-Self-diagnostics and History Log,Automatic mystery out of the installation.The preparation of as-built drawings Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Corn- is fast and efficient. munication. Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller to discover: Self-diagnostics and History Log-Each Signature Series • Unexpected additional device addresses device constantly runs self-checks to provide important mainte . Missing device addresses nance information.The results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory.This •Changes to the wiring in the circuit. information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, Most Signature modules use a personality code selected by the PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool.The installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are information stored in device memory includes: downloaded from the SDC during system configuration and are • Device serial number, address, and type indicated during device mapping. •Time and date of last alarm (EST3 V 2 only.) • Most recent trouble code logged by the detector— 32 possible trouble codes may be used to diagnose faults. Page 5 of 6 DATA S H t t I 85001-0237 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 Specifications TOWARDS Catalog Num- SIGA-CC1 SIGA-MCC1 SIGA-CC2 SIGA-MCC2 br A UTC Fire&Security Company Description Single Input(Riser)Signal Module Dual Input(Riser)Signal Module Detection&alarm since 187250(factory set)Two sub-types 51 (factory set)One sub-type u.S. Type Code (personality codes)are available (personality code) available(factory ) T 888-378-2329 Address Require- F 866-503-3996 ments Uses one module address Uses two module addresses Canada Wiring Termina Suitable for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75mm2) Chubb Edwards Sons T 519 376 2430 North American North American F 519 376 7258 21/2 inch (64 mm) deep two gang 21/2 inch (64 mm) Southeast Asia deep two-gang T:+65 6391 9300 boxes and 11/2 boxes and 11/2 F:+65 6391 9306 inch(38 mm) Plugs into UI02R, inch(38 mm) Plugs into U102R, Mounting deep 4 inch UIO6R or U106 deep 4 inch UIO6R or U106 India square boxes Motherboards square boxes Motherboards T:+91 80 4344 2000 with 2-gang cov- F:+91 80 4344 2050 ers and SIGA- with 2-gang cov- MP mounting ers and SIGA-MP Australia plates mounting plates T+61 3 9239 1200 — F+61 3 9239 1299 Operating Current Standby=223iA Activated=100pA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) Europe Output Rating 24 Vdc=2 amps 25 V Audio=50 watts 70 V Audio=35 watts T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer Storage&Oper- Operating Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) Latin America ating Environment Storage Temperature:-4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C)Humidity:0 to 93%RH T 305 593 4301 On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled On-board Red LED-Flashes F 305 593 4300 LED Operation when in alarm/active utcfireandsecurity.com Compatibility Use with:Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM,MEA ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. Ordering Information Catalog Ship Wt. Number Description lbs(kg) ( g) SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Module(Standard Mount)-UUULC Listed 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MCC1 Single Input Signal Module(UIO Mount)-UUULC Listed 0.18(0.08) SIGA-CC2 Dual Input Signal Module(Standard Mount)-UUULC Listed 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MCC2 Dual Input Signal Module(UIO Mount)-UUULC Listed 0.18(0.08) Related Equipment 27193-21 Surface Mount Box-Red,2-gang 2(1.2) 27193-26 Surface Mount Box-White,2-gang 2(1.2) SIGA U102R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs-Two Module 0.32(0.15) Positions SIGA U106R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs-Six Module 0.62(0.28) Positions SIGA-U106 Universal Input-Output Module Board-Six Module Positions 0.56(0.25) 235196P Bi-polar Transient Protector 0.01 (0.05) Accessories MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet-Red,supports Signature 7.0(3.1) Module Mounting Plates SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02(0.46) a Page 6 of 6 DATA SHEE 85001-0237 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 9 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input-Output EST TM Life Safety & Communications -- y S nchronization ' ' Output Module o SIGA-CC1S, MCC1S ==" '�i� MEA t: i a II+ ^� Patented Overview Standard Features SIGA-CC1 S and MCC1 S Synchronization Output Modules are • Provides UL 1971-compliant auto-sync output for visual intelligent analog addressable devices that form part of EST's signals Signature line of products.The actual operation of the SIGA-CC1 S Use for connecting a supervised output circuit to a supervised and MCC1 S is determined by the"personality code"selected by 24 Vdc riser input and synchronizing multiple notification appli- the installer,which is downloaded to the module from the Signa- ance circuits. ture loop controller during system configuration. • Functions as an audible signal riser selector Depending on their assigned personality, Synchronization Output Use as a synch module or for connecting supervised 24 Vdc Modules may be used as a signal power riser selector to provide AudibleNisible signal circuits,or 25 and 70 VRMS Audio synchronization of fire alarm signals across multiple zones, or for Evacuation and Telephone circuits to their power inputs. connecting, upon command from the loop controller, supervised • Built-in ring-tone generator Class B signal or telephone circuits to their respective power When configured for telephone circuits,the SIGA-CC1 S gener- inputs.The power inputs may be polarized 24 Vdc to operate au- ates its own ring-tone signal, eliminating the need for a sepa- dible and visible signal appliances or 25 and 70 VRMS to operate rate ring-tone circuit. audio evacuation speakers and firefighter's telephones. • Automatic device mapping Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. • Electronic addressing Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con- troller, a PC,or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool; there are no switches or dials to set. • Intelligent device with microprocessor All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com- munication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties;twisted or shielded wire is not required. Pagel of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0543 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3.1 Application Installation The SIGA-CC1S mounts to a standard North American two-gang The SIGA-CC1S: mounts to North American 2-1/2 inch(64 mm) electrical box, making it ideal for locations where only one module deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch square is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to boxes with 2-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates.The each module. terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) The SIGA-MCC1S is part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature wire size. Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-CC1S, but takes advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that O characterize all UIO modules.Two-and six-module UIO mother- boards are available.These can accommodate individual risers for O ,A each on-board module,or risers that are shared by any combina- tion of its UIO modules.All wiring connections are made to termi- \t nal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted ° ti ►�\\ �''� - ,� in Edwards enclosures. ..4r440-06; Personality Codes ®0 The operation of the SIGA-CC1 S is determined by their sub-type code or"Personality Code".The code is selected by the installer SIGA-MCC1S:mount the UIOxR motherboard inside a suitable depending upon the desired application and is downloaded from Edwards enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the the loop controller. module into any available position on the motherboard and secure Personality Code 5:Signal Power or Audio Evacuation(sin- the module to the motherboard with the captive screws.Wiring gle riser).Configures the module for use as a Class B Audible/ connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard(see Visible Signal power(24 Vdc polarized)or Audio Evacuation(25 wiring diagram). UIOxR motherboard terminals are suited for#12 or 70 VRMS)power selector.The ring-tone generator is disabled. to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. The output circuit is monitored for open or shorted wiring. If a Ulo Motherboard short exists,the control panel inhibits the activation of the audible/ 1 6-32 visible signal circuit to prevent connection to the power circuit. Self-tapping screws Personality Code 6:Telephone with ring-tone(single riser). f — ___1 Configures the module for use as a Telephone power selector. - --�U When a telephone handset is plugged into its jack or lifted from its Plug-in (e1O) 0,Captive hook,the module generates its own Ring-Tone signal.A separate ring-tone circuit is not needed.The module sends this signal to -- --j --� ' the control panel to indicate that an off-hook condition is present. When the system operator responds to the call,the ring-tone I #6 Flat washers signal is disabled. —Cabinet or electrical enclosure Personality Code 25:Visual Signal Synchronization.This personality code configures the module to provide synchronization of fire alarm signals across multiple zones. It functions as a signal power(24 Vdc)riser selector.The output wiring is monitored for Electronic Addressing open circuits and short circuits.A short circuit will cause the fire The loop controller electronically addresses each module saving alarm control panel to inhibit the activation of the audible/visual valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated signal circuit so the riser is not connected to the wiring fault. switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its"on-board memory".The loop control- ler identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft"address Warnings & Cautions to each serial number. If desired,the modules can be addressed This module will not operate without electrical power.As fires fre- the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your fire protection specialist. Testing & Maintenance Edwards recommends that these modules be installed according The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other perti- nent messages. Single modules may be turned off(de-activated) Compatibility temporarily,from the control panel. The Synchronization Output Module is compatible with EST's Sig- Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper system nature Loop Controller operating under EST3 version 2.0 or higher, operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the and QuickStart Signature Loop Intelligent Controller. Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHE E , 85001-0543 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3.1 Typical Wiring SIGA-CC1S(Standard Mount) SIGA-MCC1S(UIO Mount) Personality Typical Speaker Circuit Personality Typical Speaker Circuit Code 5 Code 5 u4 u 4 n 4U7VKUWLCEOLiLsted •�41 •�41 ••� 4U1/KUWLCEOLiLsted Personality Typical Telephone Circuit Personality Typical Telephone Circuit Code 6 Code 6 BIB Ei 47KW EOLted BIB EJ 47KW EOLted Personality Enhanced Integrity and Genesis Devices Personality Enhanced Integrity and Genesis Devices Code 25 Code 25 01204 01 UVULCListed 0201 ©4 © UVULCListed 47KW EOL 47KW EOL 1234 11 11 �� I El U10(R)series motherboard 10 9 Data Inh 9l 5 y+ Riser 1 Out z Riser 1 In S 1—(+ CC1S Signature 3 i I T014 Circuit�1 1-7, o o 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 + _ Data Out_ 111000 00011 0 781 4 I3 Green LED(Normal) /1015 .Riser out 1+1 Red LED(Active) To next device .Riser out I-I 1 2 3 4 Riser in I+1) •Data out 1+1 Riser 1 In±�I I L_. Riser 1 Out From control panel ) .+ Riser in 1-1 ) To next device or EOL resistor.,Data out I-1 Data in 1+1 ) From Signature Controller Data in 1-1 )or Previous Device Multiple CC1(S)modules using the BPS's sense inputs TBI Notification appliance circuit(NAC) • 1/ + a DMZ EUL• OL AU �J E AUX1 - OLL15 KW NAC2/ + saj AUX2 - aJ Notification appliance circuit(NAC) • 3/ + 0 ©I©Z EUL• OL AU 0E AUX3 - OLL 15 KW NAC4/ + GAJ AUX4 - Pi 200 mAAUX Lf) Continuous co 0 IN 0 1- Sense Sense 1 COM 10JEOL 47 K OUTI©J� INI© + Sense 2 COM iS EOL 47 K OUT �J NO © 1 lol®® I 1 l0l°11 in Trouble COM NC 4 109 109 TB?) CC1(S)module CC1(S)module 0 0 0 0 8765 4321 8765 4321 Immmm Iurm Imatmml a 1111rl +—+— [1] +—+— [1] —0.[3] Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0543 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3.1 Specifications TOWARDS Catalog Number SIGA-CC1S SIGA-MCC1S A UTC Fire&Security Company North American 21/2 inch(64 mm) deep two-gang boxes and 11/2 Plugs into UIO2R,UIO6R or U106 Detection&alarm since 1872 Mounting inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch square Motherboards boxes with 2-gang covers and u.S. SIGA-MP mounting plates T 888-378-2329 Description Synchronization Output Module F 866-503-3996 Type Code 50(factory set) Canada Address Requirements Uses one module address Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 Wiring Terminations Suitable for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75mm2) F 519 376 7258 Operating Current Standby=223pA Activated=1 00pA Southeast Asia Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 24 Vdc=2 amps Output Rating 25 V Audio=50 watts India 70 V Audio=35 watts T:+91 80 4344 2000 Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer F:+91 80 4344 2050 Storage and Operating Operating:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) Australia Environment Storage:-4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C) T+61 3 9239 1200 Humidity:0 to 93%RH F+61 3 9239 1299 Green LED-Flashes when polled Red LED-Flashes when in alarm/ LED Operation _ active Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 Compatibility Use with:Signature Loop Controller under EST3 version 2.0 or higher F+32 2 721 86 13 Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM, MEA Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 Ordering Information utcfi reandsecu rity.com Catalog Description Shipping Wt. ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Number lbs(kg) All rights reserved. SIGA-CC1 S Synchronization Output Module(Standard Mount)-UL/ULC Listed 0.5(0.23) SIGA- Synchronization Output Module(UIO Mount)-UL/ULC Listed 0.18(0.08) MCC1S Related Equipment 27193-21 Surface Mount Box-Red,2-gang 2(1.2) 27193-26 Surface Mount Box-White,2-gang 2(1.2) SIGA U102R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs 0.32(0.15) -Two Module Positions SIGA U106R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs 0.62(0.28) -Six Module Positions SIGA-UIO6 Universal Input-Output Module Board-Six Module Positions 0.56(0.25) 235196P Bi-polar Transient Protector 0.01 (0.05) MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet-Red, 7.0(3.1) supports Signature Module Mounting Plates SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02(0.46) a C Page 4 of 4 DATA SH L L , 85001-0543 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3.1 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input-Output EST TM Life Safety & Communications • • Input/Output , • . ModulesSIGH-IOSIGA-MIO ME ig . • Patented • d w'� Overview Standard Features SIGA-IO and MIO Input/Output Modules are intelligent analog • 10 modules in one addressable devices that form part of EST's Signature line of Multiple applications including normally-open or normally- products.The actual operation of the SIGA-IO and MIO is deter- closed alarm relay and latching or non-latching alarm inputs. mined by the"personality code"selected by the installer,which The installer selects one of up to 10 personality codes to be is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop controller downloaded from the loop controller. during system configuration. • Adjustable time delays Depending on their assigned personality, Input/Output Modules User sets the expected response time(5- 120 seconds)for provide the following modes of operation: maximum flexibility. •Output with monitor input(two personalities) • Plug in(UIO)or standard 1-gang mount •Input/programmable output(eight personalities) UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules Each 10 module requires one module address. are required.The 1-gang mount version is ideal for remote locations that require a single module. • Automatic device mapping Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. • Electronic addressing Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con- troller, a PC,or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. There are no switches or dials to set. • Intelligent device with microprocessor All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com- munication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties;twisted or shielded wire is not required. Pagel of 6 DATA SHEL , 85001-0533 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Application Personality codes 33:Alarm input and N.O.relay output Personality code 33 configures the module as a normally-open, The SIGA-IO mounts to a standard North American one-gang dry-contact relay and an alarm latching input for Class B contact electrical box, making it ideal for locations where only one module initiating devices.When the input contact of the initiating de- is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to vice changes state,the I/O module sends an alarm signal to the each module. Signature loop controller and the alarm condition is latched at the The SIGA-MIO is part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature module. Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-IO, but takes Personality code 34:Alarm input and N.C. relay output advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that char- Personality code 34 operates the same as personality code 33, acterize all UIO modules.Two-and six-module UIO motherboards except that the output is configured as a normally closed, dry- are available.These can accommodate individual risers for each contact relay. on-board module,or risers that are shared by any combination of its UlO modules.All wiring connections are made to terminal Personality code 35: Delayed alarm input and N.O. relay blocks on the motherboard. UlO assemblies may be mounted in output Edwards enclosures. Personality code 35 configures the module as a normally-open, dry-contact relay and an alarm latching input for Class B contact initiating devices.This personality requires that a change in the state of the initiating device be maintained for approximately 16 Electronic Addressing seconds before the I/O module sends an alarm signal to the Sig- The loop controller electronically addresses each module saving nature loop controller.The alarm condition is latched at the mod- valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated ule. Use only with non-retarded, N.O.waterflow alarm switches. switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique Personality code 36: Delayed alarm input and N.C.relay serial number stored in its"on-board memory".The loop control- output ler identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft"address Personality code 36 operates the same as personality code 35, to each serial number. If desired,the modules can be addressed except that the output is configured as a normally closed,dry using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. contact relay. Use only with non-retarded, N.C.waterflow alarm switches. Personality Codes Personality code 37:Active input(non-latching)and N.O. relay output A signature module requires a Signature loop controller to down- Personality code 37 configures the module as a normally-open, load the personality code that determines how it will operate.The dry-contact relay and an active input for Class B contact initiating Input/Output Module provides personality codes 31 through 40. devices.When the input contact of the initiating device changes For personalities 33 through 40,the outputs must be programmed state,the I/O module sends an active signal to the Signature loop to be activated by the panel. controller.The active signal does not latch, and restores when the Personality code 31 (default): N.O.relay output with monitor input device returns to its normal state.Typically used for monitor input ing N.O.fans, dampers, doors, etc. Personality code 31 configures the module as a normally-open Personality codes 38:Active input(non-latching)and N.C. output relay contact that requires a maintained dry contact input relay output activation.The activation must take place within a time period Personality code 38 operates the same as personality code 37, defined by the user(15 seconds default; 5- 120 seconds selecta- except that the output is configured as a normally closed, dry- ble)after the output circuit activation. If the fire alarm control panel contact relay.Typically used for monitoring N.C.fans, dampers, does not receive a monitor input within the specified time, it will doors, etc. generate a trouble condition. Personality code 39:Active input(latching)and N.O.relay Personality code 32: N.C.relay output with monitor input output Personality code 32 operates the same as personality code 31, Personality code 39 configures the module as a normally-open, except that the output is configured as a normally closed, dry- dry-contact relay and an active latching input for Class B contact contact relay. initiating devices.When the input contact of the initiating device changes state,the I/O module sends an active signal to the Signature loop controller and the active condition is latched at the module. Personality code 40:Active input(latching)and N.C.relay output Personality code 40 operates the same as personality code 39, except that the output is configured as a normally closed,dry- contact relay. Page 2 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0533 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Installation Warnings & Cautions The SIGA-IO:modules mount to North American 21/2 inch(64 This module will not operate without electrical power.As fires fre- mm)deep 1-gang boxes and 11/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further square boxes with 1-gang covers.They also can be snapped safeguards with your fire protection specialist. directly to the SIGA-MP mounting plates.The terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. Edwards recommends that these modules be installed according UIO Motherboard to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. — 1 6-32 Self-tapping screws __ Testing & Maintenance -- -- -�-- The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec Plug-inModule(U10)IPaNli Captive tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other peril- -- -- ---"'""'i __ Hent messages. Single modules may be turned off(de activated) { — -' __ temporarily,from the control panel. ,\ #6 Flat washers Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper system — —Cabinet or electrical enclosure operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. SIGA-MIO:mount the UIOxR motherboard inside a suitable Edwards enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the module into any available position on the motherboard and secure Compatibility the module to the motherboard with the captive screws.Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard(see Input/Output Modules are compatible with EST's Signature Loop wiring diagram). UIOxR motherboard terminals are suited for#12 Controller operating under EST3 version 3.0 or higher, and Quick- to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. Start Signature Loop Intelligent Controller. a. Compatible electrical box lopX II t.... Wall plate,white /11;`I (1-gang) IAil . a Page 3 of 6 DATA SHE t . 85001-0533 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Typical Wiring (SIGA-IO) Modules will accept#18 AWG to#12 AWG(0.75mm2 to 2.50mm2)wire sizes. Note:Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Input/Output Module (personality codes 31 - 40) A Wiring Notes: N.O.or N.-. O Maximum 25 Ohm resistance per wire. AI N.O.or N.-. UUULC Listed 47 kW 0 #12 AWG(2.5 mmr)max;#18 AWG(0.752)mm min. EOL 0 10 Vdc @ 350 mA,max. A© 'kHz. H 0 See the loop controller installation sheet for wiring � �1� aAAAA ti specifications. ..Z � Input/Output Module 0 System programming determines whether contact r i,r M r r rz� will be normally-open(N/O)or normally-closed(N/C). 8765 0 0 0 6 Supervised and power-limited. , , Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower- Red LED(Active/Alar Green LED(Normal/Trouble) limited source.If the source is nonpower-limited, o o eliminate the power-limited mark and: 4 3 2 1 • Maintain a 1/4-inch(6.4 mm)space from power- limited wiring. 5.1rrrfrfEll or • Use FPL,FPLR,FPLP,or an equivalent cable in Ge A •,�,• accordance with the National Electric Code. Data in(+) Data out k The Nomex isolation barrior separates power-limited From loop controller (-) To next device and nonpower-limited wiring.Watch out for the sharp or previous device Data in(-) Data out(+) corners during installation and maintenance. Typical Wiring (SIGA-MIO) Modules will accept#12 AWG(2.5mm2),#18 AWG(0.75mm2), #16(1.0mm2), and#14 AWG(1.50mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes#16 AWG (1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Input/Output Module (personality codes 31 - 40) Wiring Notes: Al2 4 0 Maximum 25 Ohm resistance per wire.Maximum TB1 through TB6 circuit capacitance of 0.1 mF. Green LED(Normal/Trouble) Input/Output Module 0 10 Vdc @ 350 mA,max. Red LED(Active/Alarm) 1 234 U102R or U106R motherboard . . See the Signature loop controller installation sheet for A.A 1 pW( wiring specifications. Data In a Supervised and power-limited — Data 4■ 0 UL/ULC listed 47 kW EOL Circuit z 7 /e\ System programming determines whether contact will be normally-open(N/O)or normally-closed(N/C). Data Out — , . Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower- n4 No connections required limited source.If the source is nonpower-limited, [_73 for NO.Other modules eliminate the power-limited mark and: .� n 1 May require connections. • Maintain a 1/4-inch(6.4 mm)space from power- nal TB15 limited wiring. "•�y`„® — Remove motherboard jumpers. or • Use FPL,FPLR,FPLP,or an equivalent cable in 1234 T68 through TB1 I accordance with the National Electric Code. 8 See the UIO2R or UIO6R installation sheet for e®Dry contact relay additional instructions about the separation of power- limited and nonpower-limited wiring. Page 4 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0533 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Signature Series Overview The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Edwards dalone mode.The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases,multiple- Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze function input and output modules,network and non-network control information from its slave devices.When connected to a panel utilizing panels,and user-friendly maintenance and service tools.Analog informa- standalone operation,modules with their"personality"set as alarm devices tion from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and con- (IDC)will alarm should their slave alarm-initiating device activate. verted into digital signals.An onboard microprocessor in each Signature Fast Stable Communication—Built-in intelligence means less informa- device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to tion needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller input an alarm.The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four (SDC).Other than regular supervisory polling response,Signature devices additional benefits—Self-diagnostics and History Log,Automatic Device only need to communicate with the SDC when they have something new Mapping,Stand-alone Operation and Fast,Stable Communication. to report.This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower Self-diagnostics and History Log—Each Signature Series device con- baud rate(speed)to be used for communication on the circuit.The lower stantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance information.The baud rate offers several advantages including: results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored • Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. in its non-volatile memory.This information is accessible for review any • Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. time at the control panel, PC,or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ • Less emitted noise from the data wiring. Service Tool. •Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Automatic Device Mapping—The Signature Data Controller(SDC)learns Diagnostic LEDs—Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other de- indication of normal and alarm-active conditions.A flashing green LED vices on the circuit.The SDC keeps a"map"of all Signature Series devices shows normal system polling.A flashing red LED means the module is connected to it.The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the in alarm-active state.Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm-active state— mapping feature.With interactive menus and graphic support,the wired cir- standalone mode. cuits between each device can be examined.Layout or"as-built"drawing Testing&Maintenance—Automatic self-diagnosis identifies when a information showing branch wiring(T-taps),device types and their address Signature device is defective and causes a trouble message.The user- are stored on disk for printing hard copy.This takes the mystery out of the friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each device and installation.The preparation of"as built"drawings is fast and efficient. other pertinent information.Single devices may be turned off temporarily,from Most Signature modules use a"personality code"selected by the installer the control panel.Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper to determine their actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority the SDC during system configuration and are indicated during device map- Having Jurisdiction(AHJ).Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC ping. 536 standards. Standalone Operation—A decentralized alarm decision by the device is Quality and Reliability—Edwards Signature devices are manufactured guaranteed.Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in stan- in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards.All electronics dalone(degrade)mode.If Signature loop controller CPU communications utilize surface mount technology(SMT)for smaller size and greater im- fail for more than four seconds,all devices on that circuit go into stan- munity to RF noise.A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. Specifications Model • SIGA-IO SIGA-MIO Description Standard Mount Input/Output Module Plug-in(UIO)Input/Output Module North American 21 inch(64 mm)deep one-gang boxes Mounting and 11/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch square boxes with one- Plugs into UIO2R or UIO6R Motherboards only. gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates Current Standby 250 pA Activated 430 pA Relay type Form A or B Contact ratings(pilot duty) 24 Vdc 2 A 120 AC 0.5A Initiating Device Circuit EOL(end-of-line)resistor UL/ULC listed 47k Ohm Max.circuit resistance 50 Ohm(25 Ohms per wire) Max.circuit capacitance 0.1 pF Wiring Terminations Suitable for#12 to#18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75mm2) Personality Codes Ten Selectable Codes Available Address Requirements Uses One Module Address Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer Environment Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature -4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C) Humidity 0 to 93%RH LED Operation On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled;On-board Red LED-Flashes when in alarm/active Compatibility Use SIGA-IO and SIGA-MIO with:Signature Loop Controller Plug SIGA-MIO into:UIO6R or UIO2R Motherboards Agency Listings UL,ULC,MEA,CSFM Page 5 of 6 DATA SHE85001-0533 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Ordering Information TOWARDS Catalog Ship Wt. Number Description lbs(kg) A UTC Fire&Security Company 0.34 SIGA-IO Input/Output Module(Standard Mount)-UL/ULC Listed (0.15) Detection&alarm since 1872 U.S. 0.22 SIGA-MIO Input/Output Module(Plug-in)-UL/ULC Listed (0.10) T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Related Equipment Canada 27193-11 Surface Mount Box-Red, 1-gang 2(1.2) Chubb Edwards 27193-16 Surface Mount Box-White, 1-gang 2(1.2) T 519 376 2430 SIGA U102R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs 0.32 F 519 376 7258 -Two Module Positions (0.15) Southeast Asia SIGA U106R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs 0.62 T:+65 6391 9300 -Six Module Positions (0.28) F:+65 6391 9306 MFC-A UL listed cabinet for mounting releasing modules,red with white 7,0(3.1) "FIRE". India Transponder Mounting Bracket(allows for mounting T:+91 80 4344 2000 SIGA MB4 two 1-gang modules in a 2-gang box) 0.4(0.15) F:+91 80 4344 2050 SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) Australia SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02 (0.46) Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi reandsecu rity.com ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 9 Page 6 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0533 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input-Output T TM Life Safety & Communications • • Isolator Module • SIGA-IM us 01.4 ." -' MEA J I CE V Patented Application Notes Available Overview Automatic Device Mapping-The Signature loop controller learns keeps a map where each device's serial number address is The SIGH-IM Isolator Module is part of EST's Signature Series sys- installed relative to other devices on the data circuit. tem.This intelligent device enables part of the Signature data loop to continue operating should a short circuit occur. The module Fast Stable Communication Built-in intelligence means less can be wired into a Class A data loop at any point. information needs to be sent between the module and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response,the If a fault occurs,the isolator cuts power to all devices beyond the module only needs to communicate with the loop controller when isolator on the loop as follows: it has something new to report. • a short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23 msec. • at 10 msec intervals, beginning on one side of the Class A cir- Standard Features cuit nearest the loop controller,the isolators close to provide the next isolator down the line with power. • Automatic device mapping • when the isolator next to the short closes, it reopens within 10 Each module transmits wiring information to the loop control- msec. ler regarding its location with respect to other devices on the circuit. Once activated,the line fault isolator continuously checks the • Electronic addressing faulted side of the loop to determine if the short still exists. When Addresses are downloaded and permanently stored from a PC, the fault is removed,the module automatically restores the entire or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool.There are data loop to the normal condition. no switches or dials to set. The microprocessor in every Signature module provides at least • Ground fault detection by address three important benefits — Self-diagnostics and History Log,Auto Detects ground faults right down to the device level. matic Device Mapping, and Fast, Stable Communication. • Self-restoring Self-diagnostics and History Log- Each Signature Series mod- ule constantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance • 2-gang mounting information. This information is automatically updated and perma- • Designed to ISO 9001 standards nently stored in the module's non-volatile memory and is acces- sible for review any time using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ Service Tool. Page 1 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0271 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4.1 Testing & Maintenance Typical Wiring The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- IM IM tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance = 0 0 -4� program shows the current state of each module and other pertinent ~"~�~"~SHORT'S ~'"~� messages.Single modules may be turned off(deactivated)tempo- CIRCUIT rarily,from the control panel.Availability of maintenance features is This part is removed dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance from circuit (Regular or Selected)for proper system operation should be planned 0 0 0 to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). A A Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. 1001 1001 Typical Class A Configuration r N Data Out Data Return Warnings&Cautions Signature Loop Controller This module will not operate without electrical power.As fires frequently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further safeguardwith your fire O IMO IM protection specialist. �r - � © O -.-_ SHORT y� © .. CIRCUIT This part is removed Typical Wiring and Installation - from the circuit The SIGA-IM module mounts to North American 2-1/2 inch(64 mm) - • deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch square iki boxes with 2 gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates.The n A O module will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2), #16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG 00 00 1.50mm2, and#12 AWG(2.50mm2)wire sizes. Note:Sizes#16 Typical Class A Configuration ( ) Data Out Data Return with Class B T-Taps AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease Signature Loop Controller of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for 1� detailed wiring requirement specifications. Edwards recommends that this module be installed according to 114 0 latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. O Application & Compatibility O` oto" �- This module should only be used on Class A circuits.The operation of the SIGA-IM is determined by its hardware type code I ��� ®. and is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is required. l� oto ',, The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's 1 i Signature Loop Controller. 61 flI ` 9 a \-... Green LED ` © o. (normal-flashing) *OM Ea From Signature Loop To Next Device or EOL Controller or Previous Resistor supplied with Device UL/ULC Listed Control Panel DATA IN 1+1 i_j 0 DATA OUT 1+1 DATA IN I-I . • DATA OUT I-I . . L\ Q For maximum wire resistance,refer to the appropriate manufacturer's documentation. ® Max.#12 AWG 12.5mm2lwire. I Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications. This module should be used only with Class A wiring. • Maximum circuit resistance between isolators is 6 ohms. All wiring is power-limited and supervised. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0271 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4.1 Specifications Ordering Information Description Isolator Module-factory set hardware type Catalog Description Ship Wt. code Number lb(kg) Address Requirements Uses One Detector Address SIGA-IM Fault Isolator Module-UL/ULC Listed .5(.23) Circuit Resistance Six ohms maximum between isolators Operating Current Standby=45pA;Activated=45pA Accessories Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) 27193-21 Surface Mount Box-2-gang RED 1 (.4) Construction&Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer 2-gang 27193-26 Surface Mount Box-2-gang WHITE front plate-White Finish Multifunction Fire Cabinet-Red,supports Storage Environment Temperature:-4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C) MFC-A Signature Module Mounting Plates 7.0(3.1) Operating Environment Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C); SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) Humidity:0 to 93%RH SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) LED Operation On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled SIGA- Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 ex- 1.02 (normal) MP2L tended footprint (0.46) Compatibility Use with:Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM,MEA Page 3 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0271 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4.1 WARDS A UTC Fire&Security Company Detection&alarm since 1872 U.S. T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Canada Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 F 519 376 7258 Southeast Asia T:+65 6391 9300 F:+65 6391 9306 India T:+91 80 4344 2000 F:+91 80 4344 2050 Australia T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Europe T+32 2 725 11 20 F+32 2 721 86 13 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 utcfi rean dsec u rity.c om ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. 0 0 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0271 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4.1 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input/Output ESTrM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications Control Relayiiii * ,,, 1 „. Modules , s SIGA-CR, SIGA-MCR, SIGA- -IMpal. CRR, SIGA-MCRR N : . � z ' �1i r� b J l I. •• ( g MEA q I t 1 SIGA-CR U SIGA-MCR Overview Standard Features The Control Relay Module and the Polarity Reversal Relay Module • Provides one no/nc contact(SIGA-CR/MCR) are part of the Signature Series system.They are intelligent analog Form "C"dry relay contact can be used to control external ap- addressable devices available in either plug-in(UIO)versions, or pliances such as door closers,fans, dampers etc. standard 1-gang mount versions. • Allows group operation of sounder bases The SIGA-CR/MCR Control Relay Module provides a Form"C" The SIGA-CRR/MCRR reverses the polarity of its 24 Vdc out- dry relay contact to control external appliances such as door clos- put,thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop. ers,fans, dampers etc.This device does not provide supervision • Plug-in(UIO)or standard 1-gang mount of the state of the relay contact. Instead,the on-board micro- UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules processor ensures that the relay is in the proper ON/OFF state. are required.The 1-gang mount version is ideal for remote Upon command from the loop controller,the SIGA-CR/MCR relay locations that require a single module. activates the normally open or normally-closed contact. • Automatic device mapping The SIGA-CRR/MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module provides Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller a Form"C"dry relay contact to power and activate a series of regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature SIGA-AB4G Audible Sounder Bases. Upon command from the devices on the wire loop. Signature loop controller,the SIGA-CRR reverses the polarity of its • Electronic addressing 24 Vdc output,thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop. Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con- Standard-mount versions(SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR)are troller, a PC,or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool; installed to standard North American 1-gang electrical boxes, there are no switches or dials to set. making them ideal for locations where only one module is re- • Intelligent device with microprocessor quired. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to each All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com- module. munication speed with substantially improved control panel Plug-in UIO versions(SIGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR)are part response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules.They func properties;twisted or shielded wire is not required. tion identically to the standard mount versions, but take advantage • Ground fault detection by address of the modular flexibility and easy installation that characterizes Detects ground faults right down to the device level. all UIO modules.Two-and six-module UIO motherboards are available.All wiring connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted in Edwards enclosures. Pagel of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0239 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 7.2 Installation Application SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR:modules mount to North American The operation of Signature Series control relays is determined by 21/2 inch(64 mm)deep 1-gang boxes and 11/2 inch(38 mm)deep their sub-type code or"Personality Code." 4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting Personality Code 8:CONTROL RELAY(SIGH-CR/MCR)-Dry plates.The terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. Contact Output.This setting configures the module to provide one Form"C" DRY RELAY CONTACT to control Door Closers, Fans, Dampers, etc. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @ 24 Vdc; 0.5 Compatible electrical box amp @ 120 Vac(or 220 Vac for non-UL applications). Personality Code 8 is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is re 161,1111610, --------- -poire- quired. , Personality Code 8: POLARITY REVERSAL RELAY MODULE + (SIGA-CRR/MCRR).This setting configures the module to re- 1 I Wall plate,white verse the polarity of its 24 Vdc output. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @ ♦�i,l� 24 Vdc(pilot duty). PersonalityCode 8 is assigned at the ��,i< (1-gang) 9 factory. "'�' No user configuration is required. 00, a Compatibility ,, The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's Status LEDs Signature Loop Controller. 9, LED viewing ports . C Warnings & Cautions 9 w This module will not operate without electrical power.As fires fre- quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further SIGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR:mount the UIO motherboard safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. inside a suitable Edwards enclosure with screws and wash- ers provided. Plug the module into any available position on the motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with the Testing & Maintenance captive screws.Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard(see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard terminals The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other per- _u10 Motherboard tinent messages. Single modules may be turned off(deactivated) 1 6-32 temporarily,from the control panel.Availability of maintenance Self-tapping features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled screws maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper system operation 0- *I ` should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Hav- Plug-in 0,Captive ing Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ Module ULC 536 standards. -- -- fl--„t I #6 Flat washers J 4—Cabinet or electrical enclosure Electronic Addressing -The loop controller electronically ad- dresses each module, saving valuable time during system com- missioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on- board memory.The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft"address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Edwards recommends that this module be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Page 2 of 6 DATA SHE E , 85001-0239 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 7.2 Typical Wiring Modules will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG(1.50mm2)and#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Normally- Normally- Open Common Closed A TB2 0 8 7 6 • • • Red LED Green LED (Alarm/Active) '3O2 lO 411-- (Normal) TBl 0 0 0 0 Notes IA Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications. DATA IN(+) DATA OUT(+) J} A NFPA 72 requires that the SIGA-CR/SIGA-MCR be DATA IN(-) DATA OUT(-) installed in the same room as the device it is control- From Signature Controller To Next Device ling.This requirement may not apply in all markets. or Previous Device Check with your local AHJ for details. 0 A The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-U102R do not come with TB14. SIGA-CR Control Relay The SIGA-U106 does not come with TB8 through TB13. Normally Open Common Normally Closed A\Supervised and power-limited. /\ If the source is nonpower-limited,maintain a space of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR,or an equivalent in accordance with the National Electrical Code. L-111P/1\ 7) Maximum#12 AWG(2.5mm2)wire. Q1 2 3 4 Min.#18(0.75mm2). A Data In+ , 4 NUS® 3 ®4 Q IP �z 1 ,� TB14 + No connections required for Data Out 4 MCR.Other modules may require connections. a 4 Green LED(Normal) ® rA 2 Red LED(Active) PG:®a a TB15 1234 A'T\ No connections required for MCR.Other modules may require connections. SIGA-MCR Control Relay Page 3 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0239 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 7.2 Typical Wiring Modules will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16(1.0mm2), #14 AWG(1.50mm2)and#12 AWG(2.50mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes#16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. AB4G AB4G AB4G Audible Base Audible Base Audible Base o o o ® 1 ® 0. e ® o o ® =IL 6254A-003 I EOL Relay Listed 24 VDC + —A II Nominal Power II 111 n n ?I a 1 Ii) II 11 a II Irl fl 11 II oI, A Supply _ — — A Mi A A A ® A D h VA ii • 1_11 0 © 1 • • • • • • • • • CR CRR ASIGA—CRR CT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 _ Ir II I A � L Signature Controller A A Optional CR for disabling/disconnecting sounder base SIGA—MCRR SIGA-CRR Schematic SIGA-MCRR Schematic /® o o ®\ Power In Power Out Polarity Reverses Power In Power Out _ <a When Activated Polarity reverses r— O 6254A-003 + `T ��when activated. Z Z Ell �; EOL Relay [II 111 111 11 J Audible O I I8 �. kri0 � Z. _ + 1{ o., required for • Bases supevision + Q Q Q ill P•: I'D IDa a a to u o 0 0 Ell I I m'h II I I II 'Ni NM ell_ 4 3 2 1 .� �.� `� II 111® I. El J •a�J Signature A . 8 7 Notes Data Data Out —" ' • • • Circuit A + Refer to the Signature controller installation sheet for 44111111E�For normal operation CT1 wiring. Q *r+ r For Ge neral Fire Alarm Operation 0 0 /L\ One Pair of Wires(24 Vdc power). UL/ULC Listed + 4 3 2 1 24 Vdc power — 0 One Pair of Wires(Signature Data). supply or I CT Zf 12117 / Single Wire(24 Vdc power). —' 1 2 /o\ 3 4 ` // 4�\ % 1 2 3 4 The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come ■•• MCRR /�� with TB14. A A pppp ipeip 510(R)series motherboard /b\The SIGA U106 does not come with TB8 through Data oat+ `wIr /� TB13./ \ � • i Q No connections required for Sienatu . 14 S MCRR.Other modules may A Supervised and power-limited. Data M� ' 11\ require connections. Circuit 1 U1 , \ 8 If the source is nonpower-limited,maintain a space 1B7 of 1/4 inch from power-limited wiring or use FPL, + Data In FPLP,FPLR,or an equivalent in accordance with the — Green LED(Normal) National Electrical Code. 1 z Red LED(Active) 9 Maximum#12 AWG(2.5 mm2)wire;Minimum #18 WM WM .. 1 No connections required for TB15 MCRR.Other modules maAWG(0.75 mm2). Green LED(Normal) rl l�r�Ir�I�r�I� Y 10 End-of-Line Relay must monitor and report power Red LED(Active) lw;:2 require connections. supply trouble to control panel. .L A 11 Class B Data wiring may be"T-tapped." Optional MCRR or MCR for No connections required for MCRR.Other disabling/disconnecting an audible base. modules may require connections. Page 4 of 6 DATA SHE E r 85001-0239 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 7.2 Specifications Catalog Number SIGA-CR SIGA-MCR SIGA-CRR SIGA-MCRR Description Control Relay Polarity Reversal Relay Type Code Personality Code 8(Factory Set) Personality Code 8(Factory Set) Address Requirements Uses 1 Module Address Operating Current Standby=100pA Activated=100pA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominal) Relay Type and Rating Form"C"24 VDC=2 amps(pilot duty)120 Vac=0.5 amps 220 Vac(non-UL)=0.5 amps Mounting North American 21/2 inch Plugs into UIO2R,UIO6R or North American 21/2 inch Plugs into UIO2R,UIO6R or (64 mm)deep 1-gang boxes UIO6 Motherboards (64 mm)deep 1-gang boxes UIO6 Motherboards and 11/2 inch(38 mm)deep and 11/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch square boxes with 4 inch square boxes with 1-gang covers and SIGA- 1-gang covers and SIGA- MP mounting plates MP mounting plates Construction&Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer Storage and Operating Operating Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) Environment Storage Temperature:-4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C)Humidity:0 to 93%RH LED Operation On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled On-board Red LED-Flashes when in alarm/active Compatibility Use With:Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL,ULC,CSFM, MEA Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Ship Weight-lbs (kg) SIGA-CR Control Relay Module(Standard Mount) 0.4(0.15) SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module(UIO Mount) 0.18(0.08) SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module(Standard Mount) 0.4(0.15) SIGA-MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module(UIO Mount) 0.18(0.08) Related Equipment 27193-11 Surface Mount Box-Red, 1-gang 1 (0.6) 27193-16 Surface Mount Box-White, 1-gang 1 (0.6) SIGA-UIO2R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs-Two Module Positions 0.32(0.15) SIGA-UIO6R Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs-Six Module Positions 0.62(0.28) SIGA-U106 Universal Input-Output Module Board-Six Module Positions 0.56(0.25) SIGA-AB4G Audible(Sounder)Detector Base 0.3(0.15) Accessories MFC-A Multifunction Fire Cabinet-Red,supports Signature Module Mounting Plates 7.0(3.1) SIGA-MB4 Transponder Mounting Bracket(allows for mounting two 1-gang modules in a 2-gang box) 0.4(0.15) SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5(0.70) SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02(0.46) Page 5 of 6 DATA SHEET 85001-0239 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 7.2 Signature Series Overview The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Edwards is an entire TOWARDS family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple-function input and output A UTC Fire&Security Company modules, network and non-network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance and Detection&alarm since 1872 service tools.Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals.An onboard microprocessor in each Signature u.s. device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. T 888-378-2329 The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four additional benefits-Self-di- F 866-503-3996 agnostics and History Log,Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Canada Stable Communication. Chubb Edwards T 519 376 2430 Self-diagnostics and History Log-Each Signature Series device constantly runs self- F 519 376 7258 checks to provide important maintenance information.The results of the self-check are Southeast Asia automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory.This information T:+65 6391 9300 is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC,or using the SIGA-PRO Signa- F:+65 6391 9306 ture Program/Service Tool.The information stored in device memory includes: India • Device serial number, address, and type T:+91 80 4344 2000 •Time and date of last alarm F:+91 80 4344 2050 • Most recent trouble code logged by the detector— 32 possible trouble codes may be Australia used to diagnose faults. T+61 3 9239 1200 F+61 3 9239 1299 Automatic Device Mapping-The Signature Data Controller(SDC)learns where each Europe device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit.The T+32 2 725 11 20 SDC keeps a map of all Signature Series devices connected to it.The Signature Series F+32 2 721 86 13 Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature.With interactive menus and graphic Latin America support,the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or"as-built" T 305 593 4301 drawing information showing branch wiring(T-taps), device types and their address are F 305 593 4300 stored on disk for printing hard copy.This takes the mystery out of the installation.The preparation of as-built drawings is fast and efficient. utcfi reandsecu rity.com Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller to discover: ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. All rights reserved. • Unexpected additional device addresses • Missing device addresses •Changes to the wiring in the circuit. Most Signature modules use a personality code selected by the installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SDC during system configu- ration and are indicated during device mapping. Standalone Operation-A decentralized alarm decision by the device is guaranteed. Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in standalone(degrade)mode. If Sig- nature loop controller CPU communications fail for more than four seconds, all devices on that circuit go into standalone mode.The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its slave devices.When connected to a panel utilizing standalone operation, modules with their"personality"set as alarm devices(IDC)will alarm should their slave alarm-initiat- ing device activate. a C Page 6 of 6 DATA SHEE , 85001-0239 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 7.2 EST Catalog►Intelligent Input-Output �ESTrM )1111/-Life Safety & Communications tiegioq‘ • SP Riser Monitor v - • Modules MRM1 , RM1 _ _. . ... - • �( g _ �._ -- MEA Patented Overview Standard Features • SIGA-RM1 and MRM1 Riser Monitor Modules are intelligent ana- log addressable devices that form part of EST's Signature line of 0 75 seconds(default 15 seconds) products.The actual operation of the SIGA-RM1 and MRM1 is de- • Monitors audio power or telephone risers termined by the"personality code"selected by the installer,which Reports a trouble condition when voltage on the riser drops is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop controller below the trouble threshold. during system configuration. • Plug in(UIO)or standard 2-gang mount Depending on their assigned personality, Riser Monitor Modules UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules may be used to monitor telephone risers or 70 Vac audio, 25 Vac are required.The 2-gang mount version is ideal for remote audio,or 12 Vdc to 24 Vdc risers. locations that require a single module. Upon the loss of a signal,the fire alarm control panel indicates • Automatic device mapping an alert status.The Riser Monitor Module requires one module Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller address. regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. • Electronic addressing Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop con- troller, a PC,or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. There are no switches or dials to set. • Intelligent device with microprocessor All decisions are made at the module to allow lower com- munication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties;twisted or shielded wire is not required. • Non-volatile memory Permanently stores serial number,type of device, and job number.Automatically updates historic information including hours of operation, last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. Pagel of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0535 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Application Installation The SIGA-RM1 mounts to a standard North American two-gang The SIGA-RM1: mounts to North American 2-1/2 inch(64 mm) electrical box, making it ideal for locations where only one module deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2 inch(38 mm)deep 4 inch square is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to boxes with 2-gang covers and SIGA-MP mounting plates.The each module. terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. The SIGA-MRM1 is part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-RM1, but takes ;; advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that char- 10 0 0'. acterize all UlO modules.Two-and six module UlO motherboards `ro e O -� are available.These can accommodate individual risers for each " o , ..moi on-board module,or risers that are shared by any combination \ --� of its UIO modules.All wiring connections are made to terminal c)44. --=,,P, �i� -4 , blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies maybe mounted in � , `�' • A / jam0: ®0 Edwards enclosures. Electronic Addressing ®� The loop controller electronically addresses each module saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique SIGA-MRM1: mount the UIOxR motherboard inside a suitable serial number stored in its"on-board memory".The loop control- Edwards enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the ler identifies each device on the loop and assigns a"soft"address module into any available position on the motherboard and secure to each serial number. If desired,the modules can be addressed the module to the motherboard with the captive screws.Wiring using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard(see wiring diagram). UIOxR motherboard terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2)wire size. Personality Codes U10 Motherboard — Signature modules require the Signature loop controller to down- 1 6-32 load the personalitycode that determines how it will operate. Self-tappingce p screws The Riser Monitor Module provides personality codes 23 and 24, r - iromm which are described below. -- -II--'.p PersonalityCode 23: Riser Monitor(factorydefault) Plug-in(`�ii scretws Module Personality code 23 configures the Riser Monitor Module to moni- -- tor 70 Vac audio, 25 Vac audio, or 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc risers.A trouble condition is reported back to the panel wherever the volt- i age on the riser drops below the trouble threshold.The hardware #6 Flat washers jumper on the Riser Monitor Module must be configured for either _ —Cabinetor electrical enclosure 70 Vac or 25Vac/24Vdc/12Vdc. Personality Code 24:Telephone Riser Monitor Personality code 24 configures the Riser Monitor Module to Testing & Maintenance monitor telephone risers.A trouble condition is reported back to The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec- the panel whenever voltage on the riser drops below the trouble tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenance threshold. program shows the current state of each module and other perti- The delay time from when the device falls below the trouble nent messages. Single modules may be turned off(de-activated) threshold to when it sends a trouble signal to the panel is user temporarily,from the control panel. definable in the appropriate data entry program.A delay of 5 to 75 Scheduled maintenance(Regular or Selected)for proper system seconds can be assigned to the device;the default delay period is operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the 15 seconds. Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Warnings & Cautions Compatibility This module will not operate without electrical power.As fires fre The Riser Monitor Module is compatible with EST's Signature quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further Loop Controller operating under EST3 version 2.0 or higher,and safeguards with your fire protection specialist. QuickStart Signature Loop Intelligent Controller. Edwards recommends that these modules be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Page 2 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0535 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Typical Wiring (SIGA-RM1) Typical Wiring (SIGA-MRM1) Modules will accept#18 AWG(0.75mm2),#16(1.0mm2), #14 Modules will accept#12 AWG(2.5mm2), #18 AWG(0.75mm2), AWG(1.50mm2)and#12 AWG(2.50mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16(1.0mm2), and#14 AWG(1.50mm2)wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for #16 AWG(1.0mm2)and#18 AWG(0.75mm2)are preferred for ease of installation.See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Jumper settings (-)t Telephone riser 25 ve i a Vdc/12 Vac /(+)t II 0 JP1 OR(d(do not connect both risers to one module) 0 0I,'�l \ 70 Vac or 25 Vac/24 Vdc/12 Vdc Note:Leave the jumper out for telephone riser operation. AA Green LED(Normal) 1 2 3 4 Riser Monitor Module Red LED(Active) �� Green LED(Normal) Q , UIO6 or UIO6R motherboard 2 'e .p Data In+ IFAII Q RM1 - ��' � 4 Data Q O Circuit .,1 qt T614 J 'Q 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 = No connections required 0000 IDII/00 + Data Out el gppp TB15 (+) Data out() QNo connections required mm. Remove motherboard jumpers. �I 70 Vac or 25 Vac/24 Vdc/12 Vdc To Signature device / (-) I Data out(+) OR(do not connect both risers to one module) Notes \ (+) Data in(-) From Signature AMaximum#12 AWG(2.5 mm')wire;Minimum#18 AWG(0.75 mm') �L Telephone riserloop controller (-) Data in(+) for previous device Q See the loop controller installation sheet for wiring specifications. Notes ,L Power-limited if the source is power-limited.If the source is nonpower-limited, maintain a space of 1/4 inch(6.4 mm)from power-limited wiring.Otherwise,use Qi 25 W,max per wire n FPL,FPLP,FPLR,or an equivalent in accordance with the National Electric Q#12 AWG(1.5 mm')max; Code. #18 AWG(0.75 mm2)min Q 4 160 mA,max The UIO6R does not come with TB14. QSee the Signature loop confoller installation Q The UIO6 does not come with TB8 through TB13. sheet for wiring specifications. s All wiring is supervised and power-limited. 7 All wiring is supervised. 8 Wire the Riser Monitor Module in accordance with NFPA 70-1999,National Electric Code 760-54(a)(1),exception no.2 and no.3. Signature Series Overview The Signature Series intelligent analog-addressable system from Edwards the SDC during system configuration and are indicated during device map- is an entire family of multi-sensor detectors and mounting bases,multiple- ping. function input and output modules,network and non-network control Standalone Operation—A decentralized alarm decision by the device is panels,and user-friendly maintenance and service tools.Analog informa- guaranteed.Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in stan- tion from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and con- dalone(degrade)mode.If Signature loop controller CPU communications verted into digital signals.An onboard microprocessor in each Signature fail for more than four seconds,all devices on that circuit go into stan- device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to dalone mode.The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. input an alarm.The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze additional benefits—Self-diagnostics and History Log,Automatic Device information from its slave devices.When connected to a panel utilizing Mapping,Stand-alone Operation and Fast,Stable Communication. standalone operation,modules with their"personality"set as alarm devices Self-diagnostics and History Log—Each Signature Series device con- (IDC)will alarm should their slave alarm-initiating device activate. stantly runs self-checks to provide important maintenance information.The Fast Stable Communication—Built-in intelligence means less informa- results of the self-check are automatically updated and permanently stored tion needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller in its non-volatile memory.This information is accessible for review any (SDC).Other than regular supervisory polling response,Signature devices time at the control panel,PC,or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ only need to communicate with the SDC when they have something new Service Tool. to report.This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower Automatic Device Mapping—The Signature Data Controller(SDC)learns baud rate(speed)to be used for communication on the circuit.The lower where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other de- baud rate offers several advantages including: vices on the circuit.The SDC keeps a"map"of all Signature Series devices • Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. connected to it.The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the • Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. mapping feature.With interactive menus and graphic support,the wired cir- • Less emitted noise from the data wiring. cuits between each device can be examined.Layout or"as-built"drawing •Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. information showing branch wiring(T-taps),device types and their address Diagnostic LEDs—Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual are stored on disk for printing hard copy.This takes the mystery out of the indication of normal and alarm-active conditions.A flashing green LED installation.The preparation of"as-built"drawings is fast and efficient. shows normal system polling.A flashing red LED means the module is Most Signature modules use a"personality code"selected by the installer in alarm-active state.Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm-active state— to determine their actual function.Personality codes are downloaded from standalone mode. Page 3 of 4 DATA S H E L , 85001-0535 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 Specifications TOWARDS North American 21/2 inch(64 mm)deep 2-gang box; 11/2 inch(38 mm) Mounting (SIGA-RM1) deep 4 inch square box with 2-gang cover and SIGA-MP mounting A UTC Fire&Security Company plates Detection&alarm since 1872 Mounting (SIGA- Plugs into UIO2R,UIO6R or U106 Motherboards MRM1) u.S. Current T 888-378-2329 Standby 200 pA F 866-503-3996 Activated 200 pA Canada Maximum Input Chubb Edwards Voltages 12 Vdc+15% T 519 376 2430 Riser monitor 24 Vdc+15% F 519 376 7258 25 Vac+15% Southeast Asia 70 Vac+15% T:+65 6391 9300 Telephone 28 Vdc F:+65 6391 9306 Input Currents India 12 Vdc 10 mA dc T:+91 80 4344 2000 24 Vdc 10 mA do F:+91 80 4344 2050 25 Vac 10 mA rms 70 Vac 10 mA rms Australia Telephone 24 Vdc 20 mA dc T+61 3 9239 1200 Riser loading F+61 3 9239 1299 70 Vac Z>11kOhm Europe 25 Vac Z>1k Ohm T+32 2 72511 20 24 Vdc R>2.4k Ohm(2 amps) F+32 2 721 86 13 12 Vdc R>1.2k Ohm Telephone R>1.2k Ohm,Z>1.2k Ohm Latin America Trouble Threshold Approximately 25%of riser input T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 Wiring Terminations Suitable for#12 to#18 AWG(2.5 mm2 to 0.75mm2) Personality Codes Two Selectable Codes Available utcfireandsecurity.com Address Requirements Uses One Module Address ©2010 UTC Fire&Security. Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc All rights reserved. Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer Storage and Operating Operating Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) Environment Storage Temperature:-4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C) Humidity:0 to 93%RH LED Operation On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled; On-board Red LED-Flashes when in alarm/active Compatibility Use With:Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL,ULC,MEA,CSFM Ordering Information Catalog Description Ship Wt. Number lbs(kg) SIGA-RM1 Riser Monitor Module(Standard Mount) -ULJULC Listed 0.5 (0.23) SIGA Riser Monitor Module(Plug-in) -UL/ULC Listed 0.18 (0.08) MRM1 Related Equipment 27193-21 Surface Mount Box-Red,2-gang 2.0(1.2) 27193-26 Surface Mount Box-White,2-gang 2.0(1.2) SIGA- Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs-Two Module 0.32 (0.15) UIO2R Positions SIGA- Universal Input-Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs-Six Module 0.62 (0.28) UIO6R Positions SIGA-U106 Universal Input-Output Module Board -Six Module Positions 0.56 (0.25) MFC-A UL listed cabinet for mounting releasing modules,red with white"FIRE". 7.0 (3.1) SIGA-MP1 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1 footprint 1.5 (0.70) SIGA-MP2 Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 footprint 0.5(0.23) SIGA-MP2L Signature Module Mounting Plate, 1/2 extended footprint 1.02 (0.46) a 9 Page 4 of 4 DATA SHEET 85001-0535 Not to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 -------••----4., . , AREA-OF-REFUGE TH AREA-OF-REFUGE www.....Aw.�•m _ COMMAND CENTER i- Command Center Cabinet (Surface Mount) Command Center System includes: Cabinet, Phone& (Desk Mount) Termination Module • 2500-16RC(Up to 16 Zones) &COMIMANDCENTER Size: 12"W x 15.12" H x 6.125" 0 I' • 2500-56RC(Up to 56 Zones) Size: 20.3"W x 21.07"H x 5.125"D i=it 13:16 -7 I el) N --- i • 2500-112RC(Up to 112 Zones) ;..Size: Same as 2500-56RC . °-- -° Command Center Cabinet (Flush Mount) ' System includes: Cabinet, Phone& . NMI COMM CEMER Termination Module 7.•-_,. " ,* • 2500-16RCF(Up to 16 Zones) IOW' j , Front Cover: 14"W x 16.11" H x 3" D System includes Phone&Termination Module Back Box: 12" H x 15.625"W x 3.06" D • 2500-16NC(Up to 16 Zones) • 2500-16NC(Up to 56 Zones) • 2500-56RCF(Up to 56 Zones) • 2500-16NC(Up to 112 Zones) Front Cover: 25"W x 21.11"H x 3"D Back Cover: 23"W x 20.64"H x 3"D Note: Expandable to larger systems • 2500-112RCF(Up to 112 Zones) Command Center Cabinet: Size: Same as 2500-56RCF • Surface or flush mount cabinet ( • Powder coated steel enclosure with twist lock closure. Termination , Will accept Fireman's lock (not provided by Rath) Module i . • Single pair back to Termination Module -' Model Number: ' • + ,. • Works with either our model 2100 series (up to 10 call Termination Module I boxes/ zone) or our 2400 series (one call box/ zone) Size: 5-3/4"H x 7"W x 10"D L. 1 Surface Mount t* I • Powered from Termination Module (only 2400 series) / f• • Audible alert sounds when Call Box(es) place a call until t 4/ Command Center joins conversation • Calls wait in queue until previous call is disconnected Module: • LED's indicate which Call Box(es) have initiated a call • Install on a wall or table top • Rescue personnel can communicate with individual • Requires 120vac power with battery back up Call Box(es) and also outside party or Rath RP7700104 power supply with • IBC, NFPA and ADAAG code compliant battery back up • 3 year warranty • Single dedicated phone line For larger projects, contact us N56 W24720 N. Corporate Circle • Sussex, WI 53089 04/12 800-451-1460 • 262-246-4828 (fax) • e www.area-of-refug .com Made in the USA www.area-of-refuge.com Year Warranty . TH AREA-OF-REFUGE F•REF AREA•O [FGE w�.. . ..t� REFUGE POWER SUPPLY l �r'Y'✓ stis mei K i '6• • 'fl o • Model Number: RP7700104 • Dimensions: 9.8" x 3.9" x 15" • Power Supply with Battery Back-up • 1000VA/600 W • Underwriters Laboratory Recognized (UL 1778) • Visual & Audible Alarms • 120vac • Sealed, lead-acid, maintenance free battery • LCD Screen gives utility & battery back-up status • Battery back-up & surge protected outlets keep Refuge Command Center and Refuge Call Boxes running when the power goes out during an emergency N56 W24720 N. Corporate Circle • Sussex, WI 53089 in the USA 09/12 800-451-1460 • 262-246-4828 (fax) • www.area-of-refuge.com Made inWarranty • AREA-OF-REFUGE N POWER SUPPLY4 • Model: 2500-PWR24 • Size: 9.275" x 8.125" x 3.75" • Shipping Weight: 11 lbs. • 24vdc, 9 Outputs. Install up to (5) phones per output • 4 Amp (100VA) Supply Current • Integral Surge Protection • Underwriters Laboratory Recognized • Individual LED power Indication TH AREA-OF-REFUGE N56 W24720 N. Corporate Circle • Sussex, WI 53089 -^^°•���'� °•m 800-451-1460 • 262-246-4828 (fax) • www.area-of-refuge.com 02/13 AREA-OF-REFUGE TH AREA-OF-REFUGE CALL BOXES 4 � rif # 4 �RTH J 011..11k OMR% 1111111.% HELP PHONE HELP PHONE HELP PHONE •wu„UGHi:[AUHYG .4,—.LI.. ! 'ECM. BUNMI O LIGHT e[�Ivm • ) • i • 4 ] 4 Model Number: 2100-956S_(D or R) Model Number: 2100-956SRM_(D or R) Model Number: 2100-956R_(D or R) Size: 4-3/4”W x 7-1/4" H x 1-7/8" D Size: 4-3/4"W x 7-1/4" H x 1-7/8" D Size: 4-3/4"W x 7-1/4" H x 1-7/8" D Standard: Stainless Steel, Surface Mount Standard: Stainless Steel, Surface Mount Standard: Red, Powder Coated, Options: Power, Strobe Interface& Relay Mushroom Push Button Surface Mount Options: Power, Strobe Interface&Relay Options: Power, Strobe Interface& Relay Mushroom Push Button Mushroom Push Button • • • HELP PHONE r•-•;• l •• .IINIMGLIGHT fi£I. • •• HELP PHONE EMERGENCY PHONE PUSH FOR HELP STH Model Number: 2100-956B_(D or R) Model Number: 2100-984L_(D or R) Model Number: 2100-958S_(D or R) Size: 4-3/4"W x 7-1/4" H x 1-7/8" D Size: 6"W x 9-1/2" H x 2-7/8" D Plate Size: 9-3/4"W x 12-1/2" H x 3" D Standard: Black Call Box Standard: Red, Nema 4X Back Box: 6"W x 8" H x 3" D Options: Power, Strobe Interface & Relay Options: Power, Strobe Interface&Relay Standard: Brushed Stainless Steel, Mushroom Push Button Mushroom Push Button Flush Mount Options: Power, Strobe Interface& Relay Mushroom Push Button Model: 2500-PWR24(Power Supply) Size: 9.275"x 8.125"x 3.75" Shipping Weight: 11 lbs. 24vdc, 9 Outputs. Install up to(5) phones per output 4 Amp (100VA)Supply Current Integral Surge Protection Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Individual LED power Indication OATI Individual PTC Output Protection N56 W24720 N. Corporate Circle • Sussex, WI 53089 in the USA 05/12 800-451-1460 • 262-246-4828 (fax) • www.area-of-refuge.com Made Year inarranty • AREA-OF-REFUGE N CALL BOXES ► Rath Microtech General Features: •ADA compliant speaker phones (Meets all requirements of IBC, ADAAG and NFPA) • Requires analog telephone line either POTS, PBX or central office phone lines. If used on a digital system, you must purchase an ATA analog telephone adaptor from Rath Microtech or the digital provider. Make sure to have them program it with a standard wink or disconnect signal per FCC and CRTC requirements • 3 year warranty • Battery back-up (Allows for 4 hours of full operation upon loss of power) • Power Requirements: Local 120vac power or Low Voltage 24vac power (Phone suffix D=local 120vac or R=remote 24vac). Remote power requires model 2500-PWR24 • Built-in 10 phone consolidator feature allows you to install 10 Call Boxes on one telephone line • Programmable with up to 5 emergency numbers • On-site or remote programming • Pictorial keypad • Remote or on-site diagnostic test • Location Message (18 second recordable message) • Phone checks every 24 hours for an active phone line, if one is not detected, phone will provide a relay trip • Compatible with SmartRescue Base Stations for in-building rescue coordination • Temperature range -40°F to +150°F •Automatic dialer (31 digit programmable memory) • Programming error indicator • Fully automated operation. No special codes or procedures to remember •Automatic answer feature •Audible ring • LED: 2vdc, 1/3 watt (Lights when phone is activated and flashes when call is received) • Touch Tone operation only (Touch Tone is an AT&T registered trademark) • On hook telephone line voltage: 24V-48V (Off hook: 48V=3.55V & 24V=3.59V) (Most standard telephone lines are 48V & many switchboard/PBX lines are 24V) • Loop current: (48V=23.89mA and 24V=24.32mA) • Ringer equivalent number (REN): .5B • FCC Part 68 Registered TH AREA-OF-REFUGE www DN. nelup•corn N56 W24720 N. Corporate Circle • Sussex, WI 53089 Made in the USA 04/12 800-451-1460 • 262-246-4828 (fax) • www.area-of-refuge.com 3Year Warranty ____-.... . AREA-OF-REFUGE `- � 'T'H REA•OF-REFUGE SIG NAG E w w....wr n.e.... • 1 PUSH FOR HELP LOCATION FLOOR Persons able to use the exit ‘. . 41/ stairway do so as soon as possible, unless they are AREA OF I AREA OF assisting others. AREA OF REFUGE REFUGE REFUGE After activating the Area of Refuge Photo Luminescent*Wall Sign communication system,wait Model Number: Raise Letter/Braille Entry Way Sign here for assistance. 7041 (8" x 8") Model Number: J 7043 - Black/White (6" x 9") 7044- Blue/White (6" x 9") "Directions for Call Boxes" Wall Sign (With Braille) oto 1 (s. O O F Rk- Model Number: 7049 Size. 6 x 8 - __ t AREA OF REFUGE t. AREA OF . (-)‘• REFUGE Skid Resistant Floor Decal Braille Photo Luminescent*Wall Sign Model Number: 7045 Model Number: 7046 Size: 17" D Size: 8"x 8" 120/277 VAC Lighted Wall Sign Model Number: AREA OF REFUGE L 7050 (Single Sided) or 7050D (Double Sided) -411111 EXTERIOR Size: 10.5" H x 14" W x 3" D AREA FOR Features: • Power: 120/277 VAC ASSISTED • Battery Back-up AREA OF REFUGE RESCUE • LED Lights I 6.. 111110.- • Constant Uniform Illumination • UL Listed to meet UL 924, NEC, OSHA, NFPA & Life Safety Code Illumination requirements Directional Sign Exterior Rescue Assistance • White Aluminum Housing With Acrylic Surface Model Numbers:7047L(left arrow) Wall Sign • Voltage Surge & Short Circuit Protection 7047R (right arrow) Model Number: 7086 • Directional Arrows Available Upon Request Size: 15" x 5" Size: 8"x 8" N56 W24720 N. Corporate Circle • Sussex, WI 53089 Made in the USA 03/13 800-451-1460 • 262-246-4828 (fax) • www.area-of-refuge.com 3 Year Warranty